DMNG PDF

CURRICULUM - 2016
(C - 16)
DIPLOMA IN
MINING ENGINEERING
STATE BOARD OF
TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING
HYDERABAD
TELANGANA STATE
i
ii
CONTENTS
S.NO CONTENT Page No.
I PREAMBLE 1
II RULES AND REGULATIONS 3
1. Admission Procedures 3
2. Scheme of Examination 6
3. Rules of Promotion to Next Level 9
4. Students Performance evaluation 15
5. Issue of Certificates and Veto 20
III SYLLABUS 21
I SEMESTER
S.No Subject Subject Page No.
Code
Theory
1. MNG-101 ENGLISH-I 28
2. MNG-102 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-I 33
3. MNG-103 ENGINEERING PHYSICS-I 39
4. MNG-104 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY &
ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES-I 44
5. MNG-105 ELEMENTS OF MINING-I 49
6. MNG-106 MINING GEOLOGY-I 54
7. MNG-107 ENGINEERING DRAWING-I 58
8. MNG-108 BASIC WORKSHOP PRACTICE-I 66
9. MNG-109 PHYSICS LAB PRACTICE-I 73
10. MNG-110 CHEMISTRY LAB PRACTICE-I 76
11. MNG-111 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS
LAB PRACTICE-I 79
iii
II SEMESTER
1. MNG-201 ENGLISH-II 86
2. MNG-202 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-II 90
3. MNG-203 ENGINEERING PHYSICS-II 96
4. MNG-204 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY &
ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES-II 102
5. MNG-205 ELEMENTS OF MINING-II 107
6. MNG-206 MINING GEOLOGY-II 112
7. MNG-207 ENGINEERING DRAWING-II 116
8. MNG-208 BASIC WORKSHOP PRACTICE-II 120
9. MNG-209 PHYSICS LAB PRACTICE-II 124
10. MNG-210 CHEMISTRY LAB PRACTICE-II 127
11. MNG-211 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS
LAB PRACTICE-II 130
III SEMESTER
1. MNG-301 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-III 136
2. MNG-302 BASIC ELECTRICAL AND
ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING 141
3. MNG-303 METHODS OF WORKING COAL-I 146
4. MNG-304 MINE MACHINERY-I 153
5. MNG-305 MINE SURVEYING-I 159
6. MNG-306 MINING GEOLOGY-III 166
7. MNG-307 ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS
ENGINEERING LAB PRACTICE 170
8. MNG-308 COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND
LIFE SKILLS LAB PRACTICE 173
9. MNG-309 MINE SURVEYING LAB PRACTICE-I 177
10. MNG-310 MINING GEOLOGY LAB PRACTICE 185
11. MNG-311 PRACTICAL TRAINING ASSESSMENT 189
iv
IV SEMESTER
1. MNG-401 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-IV 191
2. MNG-402 BASIC MECHANICAL ENGINEERING 195
3. MNG-403 METHODS OF WORKING COAL-II 201
4. MNG-404 METHODS OF WORKING METAL 205
5. MNG-405 MINE MACHINERY-II 211
6. MNG-406 MINE SURVEYING-II 216
7. MNG-407 MINE VENTILATION 221
8. MNG-408 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
LAB PRACTICE 228
9. MNG-409 MINE PLANNING AND DESIGN
LAB PRACTICE 232
10. MNG-410 PROGRAMMING IN C LAB PRACTICE 236
11. MNG-411 MINE SURVEYING LAB PRACTICE-II 242
12. MNG-412 MINE MACHINERY LAB PRACTICE 246
V SEMESTER
1. MNG-501 SURFACE MINING 253
2. MNG-502 MINE MANAGEMENT AND
ENTREPRENEURSHIP 258
3. MNG-503 MINE LEGISLATION AND
GENERAL SAFETY 263
4. MNG-504 ROCK MECHANICS AND
STRATA CONTROL 269
5. MNG-505 (A) ADVANCED MINE SURVEYING 277
6. MNG-505 (B) MINERAL PROCESSING
AND QUALITY CONTROL 283
7. MNG-506 MINE ENVIRONMENTAL
ENGINEERING 287
8. MNG-507 ROCK MECHANICS AND STRATA
CONTROL LAB PRACTICE 293
v
9. MNG-508(A) ADVANCED MINE SURVEYING
LAB PRACTICE 300
10. MNG-508(B) COMPUTER APPLICATION IN
MINING LAB PRACTICE 305
11. MNG-509 MINE ENVIRONMENTAL
ENGINEERING LAB PRACTICE 309
12. MNG-510 PROJECT WORK 314
VI SEMESTER
1. MNG-601 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
(PRACTICAL TRAINING) 317
*****
vi
CURRICULUM (C-16) Semester Pattern
FOR DIPLOMA COURSES IN TELANGANA
I. PREAMBLE
The State Board of Technical Education and Training,
Telangana under the aegis of the Department of Technical Education,
Telangana generally reviews the Curricula to tune up the updated
development both in academic and industry side. However,
recognizing the changing needs as stated by the user industries, the
Board has decided to bring forward the revision of curriculum.
Consequently the Board with the assistance of senior faculty of the
concerned branches has performed the evaluation of C-14
Curriculum in force. On finding the merits and demerits of C-14
Curriculum the faculty have made a thorough assessment of the
curricular changes that have to be brought in. It was felt that there is
an urgent need to improve hands-on experience among the students
pursuing diploma courses. Further, the urgency of enhancing
communication skills in English was also highlighted in the feedback
and suggestions made by the user industries. Keeping these in view,
a number of meetings and deliberations were held at state level, with
experts from industry, academia and senior faculty of the department.
The new Curricula for the different diploma courses have been
designed with the active participation of the members of the faculty
teaching in the Polytechnics of Telangana, besides reviewed by Expert
Committee constituted with eminent academicians.
The primary objective of the curriculum change is to produce
best technicians in the country by correlating growing needs of the
industries with the academic input.
The revised New Curriculum i.e., Curriculum – 2016 or C-16 is
planned and designed duly introducing semester pattern in 1st year
and 6 months industrial training in 3rd year level (5th or 6th semester)
to have good exposure with industries and it will be implemented
from the academic year 2016-17.
Salient Features:
1. Duration of course is 3 years / 3½ years of Regular Academic
Instruction.
2. The entire Curriculum is prepared in Semester Pattern right
from 1st year.
1
3. Six months Industrial Training is placed in VI semester to acquire
the industrial exposure and experience for the students.
4. Mathematics, Physics and Chemistry is common to all
branches in 1st and 2nd semester except Foot Wear, DCCP,
DCT, DHS, DHMCT & DGT branches.
5. Mathematics-III at 3rd semester level is common to all branches
except DCT, DHS, DCCP, DGT and DHMCT.
6. Programming in ‘C’ lab is introduced in 4th Semester in
consideration with the AICTE model curriculum and to meet
NBA requirement.
7. The policy decisions taken at the State and Central level with
regard to environmentalscienceare implemented by including
relevant topics in Chemistry. This is also in accordance with
the Supreme Court guidelines issued in Sri Mehta’s case.
8. Keeping in view of the increased need of communication skills
which is playing a vital role in the success of Diploma Level
students in the Industries, emphasis is given for learning and
acquiring listening, speaking, reading and writing skills in
English. Further as discussed in the Curriculum meetings,
Communication Skills and Life Skills lab is introduced in III
semester for all the branches.
9. Modern topics relevant to the needs of the industry and global
scenario suitable to be taught at Diploma level are also
incorporated in the curriculum.
10. Introduction of CAD/CAM specific to the branch has been given
more emphasis in the curriculum for preparing drawings using
CAD and also preparation of Part programme for CAM software.
11. Every student is exposed to the computer lab at the 1st and 2nd
semester level itself in order to familiarize himself/herself with
the operating systems.
12. The number of teaching hours allotted to a particular topic/
chapter has been rationalized keeping in view the past
experience
13. Upon reviewing the existing C-14 curriculum, more emphasis
is given to the practical content of Laboratories and Workshops,
thus strengthening the practical skills.
2
14. With increased emphasis for the student to acquire Practical
skills, the course content in all the subjects is thoroughly
reviewed and structured as outcome competency based than
the conventional based. While the course content in certain
subjects felt overloaded is reduced, in rest of the subjects the
content has been enhanced as per the need.
15. All Practical subjects are independent of each other and the
practice of grouping two or more practical subjects is dispensed
with.
16. Laboratory and Workshops practicals have been thoroughly
revised based on the suggestions received from the industry
and faculty, for better utilization of the equipment available at
the Polytechnics. The experiments /exercises that are chosen
for the practical sessions are identified to conform to the field
requirements of industry.
17. The Members of the working group are grateful to Smt. A. Vani
Prasad, I.A.S., Commissioner of Technical Education
&Chairperson, S.B.T.E.T. Telangana for her constant guidance
and valuable inputs in revising, modifying and updating the
curriculum.
18. The Members acknowledge thanks for cooperation and
guidance extended by Sri. D. Venkateswarlu, Secretary and
his team of SBTET, Telangana and other officials of Directorate
of Technical Education and the State Board of Technical
Education, Telangana, experts from industry, academia from
the universities and higher learning institutions and all teaching
fraternity from the Polytechnics who are directly or indirectly
involved in preparation of the curricula.
II. RULES AND REGULATIONS
1. ADMISSION PROCEDURES:
1.1 DURATION AND PATTERN OF THE COURSES
All the Diploma programs run at various institutions are of AICTE
approved 3 years or 3½ years duration of Academic Instruction.
All the Diploma courses are run in the semester pattern and
incorporated 6 months Industrial Training as integral part of the
Curriculum in 5th semester. In respect of few courses, the training
will be in the seventhsemester.
3
1.2 PROCEDURE FOR ADMISSION INTO THE DIPLOMA
COURSES:
Selection of candidates is governed by the Rules and regulations
laid down in this regard from time to time.
i) Candidates who wish to seek admission in any of the Diploma
courses will have to appear for Common Entrance Test for
admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET) conducted by the
State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana,
Hyderabad.
Only the candidates satisfying the following requirements will
be eligible to appear for the Common Entrance Test for
admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET).
a) The candidates seeking admission should have appeared for
the X class examination, conducted by the Board of Secondary
Examination, Telangana or equivalent examination thereto, at
the time of making application to the Common Entrance Test
for Polytechnics for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET).
In case of candidates who apply pending results of their
qualifying examinations, their selection shall be subject to
production of proof of their passing the qualifying examination
in one attempt or compartmentally at the time of interview for
admission.
b) Admissions are made based on the merit obtained in the
Common Entrance Test (POLYCET) duly following the
reservation rules stipulated by the Government of Telangana
from time to time.
c) For admission into the following Diploma Courses for which
entry qualification is 10+2, candidates need not appear for
POLYCET. A separate notification will be issued for admission
into these courses.
1). D.H.M.C.T. 2). D.Pharmacy
1.3 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION
The medium of instruction and examination shall be English.
1.4 PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)
A cumulative / academic record shall be maintained in respect
of the Marks secured in sessional work and end examination of each
4
semester for determining the eligibility for promotion etc., a Permanent
Identification Number (PIN) will be allotted to each candidate so as
to facilitate this work and avoid errors in tabulation of results.
1.5 NUMBER OF WORKING DAYS PER SEMESTER:
a). The Academic year for all the Courses usually shall be from
June 2nd week of the year of admission to the 31st March of the
succeeding year.
b). The Working days in a week shall be from Monday to Saturday.
c). There shall be 7 periods of 50 minutes duration on all working
days.
d). The minimum number of working days for each semester shall
be 90 days excluding end examination days. If this prescribed
minimum is not achieved due to any reason, special
arrangements shall be made to conduct classes to make up
the working days and to cover the syllabus.
1.6 ELIGIBILITY OF ATTENDANCE TO APPEAR FOR THE
END EXAMINATION
a). A candidate shall be permitted to appear for the end examination
in all subjects, if he or she has attended a minimum of 75% of
working days during the Semester.
b). Condonation of shortage of attendance in aggregate upto 10%
(65% and above and below 75%) in each semester shall be
granted on medical grounds subject to production of medical
certificate from the Govt. Doctor not below the rank of Asst.
Civil Surgeon.
c). Candidates having less than 65% attendance shall be detained.
d). Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in
any semester are not eligible to take their end examination of
that class and their admissions shall stand cancelled. They
may seek re-admission for that semester when offered next.
e). A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condonation for
shortage of attendance.
1.7 READMISSION
Readmission shall be granted to eligible candidates by the
respective Principal for the students who applies for readmission
within the year i.e., subsequent next academic year. Otherwise, it
5
has to be referred to the RJD. The readmissions shall be processed
1) Within 15 days after commencement of class work in any
semester (Except industrialTraining).
2) Within 30 days after commencement of class work for D.
Pharmacy course since it is year wise pattern.
Otherwise such cases shall not be considered for readmission
for that semester/year and are advised to seek readmission in the
next subsequent eligible academic year by referring it to RJD.
The percentage of attendance of the readmitted candidates
shall be calculated from the first day of begining of the regular class
work for that year / Semester, as officially announced by CTE/SBTET
but not from the day on which he/she has actually reported to the
class work, after readmission is granted.
2. SCHEME OFEXAMINATION
2.1 I. II, III, IV, V, VI and VII Semesters:
THEORY EXAMINATION: Each theory subject carries usually
80 marks and 60 marks in respect of Drawing and Laboratories/
Workshops of 3hours duration, along with 20/40 marks for internal
evaluation (sessional marks) respectively.
PRACTICAL EXAMINATION: Each subject carry 60/30 marks
of 3hours duration 40/20 sessional marks, however in specified
subjects it is 30:20 ratio.
2.2 INTERNAL ASSESSMENT SCHEME
a) Theory Subjects: Theory Subjects carry 20 sessional marks,
Internal examinations will be conducted for awarding sessional
marks on the dates specified. Two Unit Tests will be
conducted in each semester. Average of marks obtained in
all the prescribed tests will be considered for awarding the 10
sessional marks. For remaining 10 sessional marks, 5 for
assignment and 5 for group discussion & seminar.
b) Practicals: Student’s performance in Laboratories / Workshop
shall be assessed during the year of study for 40 marks in
each practical subject. Allotment of internal marks of 20 should
be discrete taking into consideration of the students skills,
accuracy, recording and 20 of internal marks for performance
of the task assigned to him / her lab practicals assessment
test is on par with Unit test. Each student has to write a record
6
/ log book for assessment purpose. In the subject of Drawing,
which is also considered as a practical paper, the same rules
hold good. Drawing exercises are to be filed in seriatum.
c) Internal assessment in Labs / workshops / Survey field etc.,
during the course of study shall be done and sessional marks
shall be awarded by the concerned Lecturer / Senior Lecturer
/ Workshop superintendent with the concurrence of concerned
HOS as the case may be.
d) For practical examinations, except in drawing, there shall be
two examiners. External examiner shall be appointed by the
Principal in consultation with respective head of section
preferably choosing a person from an Industry. Internal examiner
shall be the person concerned with internal assessment as in
(c) above. The end examination shall be held along with all
theory papers in respect of drawing.
e) Question Paper for Practicals: Question paper should cover
all the experiments /exercise prescribed.
f) Records pertaining to internal assessment marks of both theory
and practical subjects are to be maintained for official inspection
and preserved.
g) Evaluation and assessment of industrial training, shall be
done and marks be awarded in the following manner.
Industrial assessment : 200 marks (in two spells of 100
marks each)
Maintenance of log book : 30 marks
Record Work : 30 marks
Seminar/viva-voce : 40 marks
_________
TOTAL 300 marks
_________
The assessment at the institute level will be done by a minimum
of three members Internal Faculty, Industrial Experts and H.O.D. and
be averaged for finalizing the marks.
2.3 MINIMUM PASS MARKS
THEORY EXAMINATION:
For passing a theory subject, a candidate has to secure a
7
minimum of 35% in end examination and a combined minimum of
35% of both Sessional and end examination marks put together.
PRACTICAL EXAMINATION:
For passing a practical subject, a candidate has to secure, a
minimum of 50% in end examination and a combined minimum of
50% of both sessional and end examination marks put together. In
case of D.C.C.P., the pass mark for typewriting and Shorthand is
45% in the end examination. There are no sessional marks for
typewriting and Shorthand subjects of D.C.C.P course.
2.4 PROVISION FOR IMPROVEMENT
1. Improvement is allowed only after he / she has completed all
the subjects from First semesterto Final semester of the
Diploma.
2. Improvement is allowed in any 4(Four) subjects of the Diploma.
3. The student can avail improvement chance only once, that too
within the succeeding two examinations after the completion
of Diploma, with the condition that the duration including
Improvement examination shall not exceed FIVE years from
the first admission.
4. No improvement is allowed in Practical / Lab subjects or Project
work or Industrial Training assessment. However, improvement
is allowed in drawing subject.
5. If improvement is not achieved, the marks obtained in previous
Examinations hold good.
6. Improvement is not allowed in respect of the candidates who
are punished under Mal-practice in any Examination.
7. Examination fee for improvement shall be paid as per the
notification issued by State Board of Technical Education and
Training from time to time.
8. All the candidates who wish to appear for improvement of
performance shall deposit the original Marks Memos of all the
years / Semesters and also original Diploma Certificate to the
Board. If there is improvement in performance of the current
examination, the revised Memorandum of marks and Original
Diploma Certificate will be issued or else the submitted
originals will be returned.
8
2.5 PROVISION FOR INSTANT EXAMINATION:
i. The candidate shall be on regular rolls of final during academic
year and last appeared for exams from the scheme inforce
basing on industrial training slot allotted.
ii. The candidate should not have more than two backlog subjects
(either theory or practical or both) put together i.e., from 1st
year to 5th/7th semester (in case of sandwich courses)
However, (a) the candidate registered/appeared for instant
examination are not eligible to appear for winter session of
supplementary examination.
(b) The candidates awarded punishment under malpractice is not
eligible.
PROMOTION RULES AND ELIGIBILITY CONDITIONS
OF C-16 CURRICULUM
3 RULES OF PROMOTION TO NEXT LEVEL:
3.1 For Diploma Courses (Except Metallurgy, Chemical Engg.,
Textile Technology, Footwear Technology) of 1 st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th,
5th and 6th Semesters:
1. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first semester
examination provided he / she puts the required percentage of
attendance (i.e., 75%) and pays the examination fee. However,
attendance can be condoned by the Principal on Medical
grounds upto 10% ( i.e. attendance after condonation on Medical
grounds should not be less than 65%) and he/she has to pay
the condonation fee along with examination fee as prescribed
by SBTET from time to time.
2. A candidate shall be promoted to 2nd semester if he/she puts
the requisite percentage of attendance (i.e., 75% in general
and 65% on medical grounds) in the 1st semester and pays
the examination fee. A candidate who could not pay the 1st
semester examination fee has to pay the promotion fee as
prescribed by SBTET from time to time before commencement
of 2nd semester.
3. A candidate shall be promoted to 3rd semester if he/she puts
the requisite percentage of attendance (i.e., 75% in general
and 65% on medical grounds) in the 2nd semester and pays
9
the examination fee. A candidate who could not pay the 2nd
semester examination fee has to pay the promotion fee as
prescribed by SBTET from time to time before commencement
of 3rd semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 3rd semester exam if
he/she puts the requisite percentage of attendance (i.e., 75% in
general and 65% on medical condonation) in the 3rd semester.
4. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/
she puts the requisite percentage of attendance (i.e., 75% in
general and 65% on medical condonation) in the 3rd semester
and pays the examination fee of 3rd semester. A candidate who
could not pay the 3rd semester exam fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical
Education and Training from time to time before
commencement of 4th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester exam if
he/she
a) Should have requisite % of attendance i.e., 75%, on
condonation due to Medical grounds 65% to appear for 4th
semester.
b) Should not have failed in more than 6 backlog subjects of 1st
and 2nd semester put together.
5. A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester( T h e o r y /
Industrial Training) as the case may be provided he /she puts
the required percentage of attendance (i.e., 75% in general and
65% on medical grounds) in the 4th semester and pays the
examination fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 4th semester
examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed
by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time
to time before commencement of 5th semester as the case
may be in respect of the following.
A candidate is eligible to appear for 5th semester exam, if he/
she
i. THEORY:
a. Should have requisite % of attendance i.e., 75%, on condonation
due to Medical grounds 65% to appear for 5th semester.
b. Should have appeared for 4th semester examination.
10
c. IVC students should not have failed in more than 2 backlog
subjects of 3rd semester
ii. INDUSTRIAL TRAINING (In Case Swapped):
a. Should have requisite % of attendance i.e., 90% in V semester.
6. A candidate shall be promoted to 6th semester (Theory/Industrial
Training) as the case may be provided he /she puts the required
percentage of attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on
medical grounds, 90% in case of Industrial Training) in the 5th
semester and pays the examination fee. A candidate, who could
not pay the 5 th semester examination fee, has to pay the
commencement of 6th semester as the case may be in respect
of the following.
A candidate is eligible to appear for 6th semester exam, if he/
she
i. THEORY (In Case Swapped):
c. Should have completed Industrial Training in V semester (in
case swapped)
d. IVC students should not have failed in more than 2 backlog
subjects of 3rd semester
ii. INDUSTRIAL TRAINING:
a. Should have requisite % of attendance i.e., 90% in VI semester.
3.2 For Diploma Courses of 3 ½ Years duration
3.2.1 (Metallurgy/ Chemical Engg./ Textile Technology)
1. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first semester
examination provided he / she puts the required percentage of
attendance (i.e., 75%) and pays the examination fee. However,
attendance can be condoned by the Principal on Medical
grounds upto 10% (i.e. attendance after condonation on Medical
11
grounds should not be less than 65%) and he/she has to pay
the condonation fee along with examination fee as prescribed
by SBTET from time to time.
2. A candidate shall be promoted to 2nd semester if he/she puts
the required percentage of attendance in the 1st semester and
pays the examination fee. A candidate who could not pay the
1st semester examination fee has to pay the promotion fee as
prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
from time to time before commencement of 2nd semester. A
candidate is eligible to appear for the 2nd semester exam, if he/
she put the required percentage of attendance in 2nd semester.
3. A candidate shall be promoted to 3rd semester if he/she puts
the required percentage of attendance in the 2nd semester and
pays the examination fee. A candidate who could not pay the
2nd semester examination fee has to pay the promotion fee as
prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
from time to time before commencement of 3rd semester. A
candidate is eligible to appear for the 3rd semester exam, if he/
she put the required percentage of attendance in 3rd semester.
4. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/
she puts the required percentage of attendance in the 3 rd
semester and pay the examination fee. A candidate, who could
not pay the 3rd semester exam fee, has to pay the promotion
fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and
Training from time to time before commencement of 4th
semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester exam if
he/she
b. Should not have failed in more than 6 backlog subjects of 1st
and 2nd semester put together
5. A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester provided he /
she puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4 th
semester and pays the examination fee. A candidate, who could
not pay the 4 th semester examination fee, has to pay the
12
commencement of 5th semester.
6. Promotion from 5th to 6th semester is automatic (i.e., from 1st
spell of Industrial Training to 2nd spell) provided he/she puts the
required percentage of attendance, which in this case would
be 90 % attendance and attends for the VIVA-VOCE
examination at the end of training.
Industrial Training:
A candidate is eligible to go for Industrial Training if he/she
Should have requisite % of attendance i.e., 90% in V & VI
semester.
7. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester of the course
provided he/she has successfully completed both the spells of
Industrial Training.
A candidate is eligible to appear for 7th semester examination if
he/she
Theory:
due to Medical grounds 65% to appear in 7th semester.
b. Should have appeared 4th semester Examination
c. Should have completed Industrial Training
d. IVC students should not have failed in more than 2 backlog
subjects of 3rd semester.
3.2.2 For Diploma Courses of 3½ Years duration: FW
In respect of Diploma in Footwear Technology, the Industrial
training is offered in two spells, the 1st spell of Industrial training after
the 2nd semester (i.e. III semester of the course) and the second
spell of industrial training after the VI semester (i.e VII Semester of
the course). The promotion rules for this course are on par with the
other sandwich Diploma courses except that there is no restriction
on number of backlog subjects to get eligibility to appear for the 4th
semester examination
A candidate is eligibility to appear for 4th semester exam, if he/
she
13
b. Should have completed Industrial Training and appeared for
Viva-Voce in III semester
i. A candidate is eligible to appear for 5th semester examination
if he/she
b. Should not have failed altogether in more than 6 backlog
subjects of 1st and 2nd semesters.
A candidate shall be promoted to 6th semester provided he /
she puts the required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester
and pays the examination fee, a candidate, who could not pay the 5th
semester examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed
by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time
before commencement of 6th semester.
ii. A candidate is eligible to appear for 6th semester examination
if he/she,
Theory:
due to Medical grounds 65% to appear in 6th semester.
b. Should have appeared 5th semester Examination.
3.3 OTHER DETAILS
a) In case acandidate does not successfully complete the
Industrial training, he / she will have to repeat the training at his
/ her own cost.
b) The 1stspell of Industrial training shall commence 10 days after
the completion of the last theory examination of IV semester.
c) The 2nd spell of Industrial training shall commence within 10
days after the completion of 5th semester besides successful
completion of 1st spell of Industrial training.
d) Each Semester of Institutional study shall be a minimum of 90
working days. (With 6 working days in a week i.e. from Monday
to Saturday, with 7 periods of 50 minutes duration per day).
4 STUDENTS PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
4.1 AWARD OF DIPLOMA
Successful candidates shall be awarded the Diploma under
14
the following divisions of pass.
1. First Class with Distinction shall be awarded to the candidates
who secure an overall aggregate of 75% marks and above.
2. First Class shall be awarded to candidates who secure overall
aggregate of 60% marks and above and below 75% marks.
3. Second Class shall be awarded to candidates who secure a
pass with an overall aggregate of below 60%.
The Weightage of marks for various year/Semesters which
are taken for computing overall aggregate shall be 25% of 1st and 2nd
semester marks + 100% of 3rd and subsequent Semesters.
With respect to the intermediate vocational candidates who
are admitted directly into diploma course at the 3rd semester (i.e.,
second year) level the aggregate of (100%) marks secured at the 3rd
and subsequent semesters of study shall alone be taken into
consideration for determining the overall percentage of marks secured
by the candidates for award of class/division.
4. Second Class Diploma course certificate shall be awarded to
all students, who fail to complete the Diploma with in stipulated
time i.e., double the duration of the course and subsequently
pass in mercy/special mercy chances.
4.2 EXAMINATION FEE SCHEDULE:
The examination fee should be paid as per the notification issued
by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time.
4.3 STRUCTURE OF END EXAMINATION QUESTION
PAPER:
The question paper for theory examination is patterned in such
a manner that the Weightage of periods/marks allotted for each of
the topics for a particular subject be considered.
Examination paper is of 3/6/9 hour’s duration for general and
Architectural Assistantship respectively.
a) In case of 1st and 2nd semesters each theory paper consists of
Section ‘A’ and Section ‘B’. Section ‘A’ contains 20 short answer
questions out of which 15 questions are to be answered and
each question carries 2 marks Max. Marks: 15 x 2 = 30.
Section B contains 8 essay type questions including Numerical
questions, out of which 5 questions are to be answered each carrying
15
10 marks are to be answered.
Max. Marks: 5 x 10 = 50. Total Maximum Marks: 80.
b) For Engineering Drawing Subjects (107 and 207) consist of
section ‘A’ and section ‘B’. Section ‘A’ contains four (4) questions.
All questions in section ‘A’ are to be answered and each question
carries 5 marks. Max. Marks: 4 x 5=20. Section ‘B’ contains
six (6) questions. Out of which four (4) questions are to be
answered and each question carries 10 Marks. Max. Marks 4 x
10 =40.
c) Practical Examinations- For Workshop practice and
Laboratory Examinations,
Each student has to pick up a question from the designed
question paper by Lottery System.
Max. Marks for an experiment/exercise : 50
Max. Marks for VIVA-VOCE : 10
Total : 60
In case of practical examinations with 50 marks, the marks will
be worked out basing on the above ratio.
In case of the subsequent 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th semesters
excluding Industrial Training semester each theory paper
consists of section ‘A’ and Section ‘B’. Section ‘A’ contains 10
short answer questions in which all the 10 questions need to
be answered and each question carries 3 marks.
Max. Marks 10 x 3 = 30
Section B contains 8 essay type questions including Numerical
questions, out of which 5 questions are to be answered each
carrying 10 marks are to be answered.
Max. Marks: 5 x 10 = 50. Total Maximum Marks: 80.
In case of any change in the pattern of question paper, the
same shall be informed sufficiently in advance to the
candidates.
4.4 ISSUE OF MEMORONDUM OF MARKS
All candidates who appear for the end examination will be issued
memorandum of marks without any payment of fee. However
candidates who lose the original memorandum of marks have to pay
the prescribed fee to the Secretary, State Board of Technical Education
16
and Training, Telangana. for each duplicate memo.
4.5 MAXIMUM PERIOD FOR COMPLETION OF DIPLOMA
COURSES:
Maximum period for completion of the course is twice the
prescribed duration of the course from the date of First admission
(includes the period of detention and discontinuation of studies by
student etc) failing which they will have to for feit the claim for qualifying
for the award of Diploma (They will not be permitted to appear for
examinations after that date). This rule applies for all Diploma courses
of 3 years and 3 ½ years of engineering and non-engineering courses
including candidates who seek admission under lateral entry. In
respect of Pharmacy courses the completion period is 4 years as
the prescribed duration of the course is 2 years.
4.6 ELIGIBILITY FOR AWARD OF DIPLOMA
A candidate is eligible for award of Diploma Certificate if he /
she fulfill the following academic regulations.
i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 3 / 3 ½
academic years & not more than 6 / 7 academic years
respectively.
ii. He / she must have passed all the subjects.
Students who fail to fulfill all the academic requirements for the
award of the Diploma within 6/7 academic years as the case may be
from the year of admission shall forfeit their seat in the course &
their seat shall stand cancelled.
4.7 RECOUNTING, ISSUE OF PHOTOCOPY OF VALUED
ANSWER SCRIPT & REVERIFICATION:
4.7.1 a) A candidate desirous of applying for Recounting/ issueof
Photocopy of valued answer scripts/ Reverification should
submit the application to the Secretary, State Board of Technical
Education and Training, Telangana., Hyderabad – 500 063 within
15 days from thedate of receipt of Tabulated Marks Statement
by the Principal of concerned Polytechnic or the date specified
in the notification issued for Reverfication/Recounting.
Recounting shall be done for any TWO theory subjects per
Semester only, including drawing subjects. No request for recounting
shall be entertained from any candidate who is reported to have
resorted to Mal practice in that examination. The fee prescribed for
17
Recounting should be paid by way of Demand Draft drawn on any
Scheduled Bank payable at Hyderabad in favour of the Secretary,
State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana.,
Hyderabad. The verification of the totaling will be done by an Officer
of the Board and will be intimated to the candidate by postonly.
The following documents should be invariably be enclosed with
the application failing which the application will not be considered.
4.7.1.1 Marks secured as per Tabulated Marks Sheet certified by
the Principal.
4.7.1.2 The payment of prescribed fee shall be online as notified in
the circular issued from time to time.
4.7.1.3 Self – addressed and stamped envelopes of 11" X 5" size.
The applications received after the prescribed date will not be
accepted and any correspondence in this regard will not be
entertained.
4.7.2 FOR ISSUE OF PHOTO COPIES OF VALUED ANSWER
SCRIPTS
1. A candidate desirous of applying for Photo copy of valued
answer script/scripts should submit the application to the
Secretary, State Board of Technical Education and Training,
Telangana., Hyderabad – 500 063 along with the required fee
in the form of Demand Draft within 07 days from the date of
receipt of Tabulated Marks Statement by the Principal of
concerned Polytechnic or the date specified in the covering
letter whichever is earlier.
2. Photo copies of valued answer scripts will be issued to all
theory subjects including drawing subjects.
3. The following documents should invariably be enclosed with
the application
i. Marks secured as per Tabulated Marks Sheets certified by the
Principal
ii. Self-addressed Stamped Envelope/Cloth-line cover of size 10’’
x 14’’.
iii. Fee in the form as notified from time to time.
18
4.7.3 FOR RE-VERIFICATION OF THE VALUED ANSWER
SCRIPT
1. A candidate desirous of applying for Re-verification of valued
answer script should submit the application to the Secretary,
State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana.,
Hyderabad – 500 063 along with the required fee in the form of
Demand Draft, within 15 days from declaration of result.
2. Re-verification of valued answers cript shall be done for all theory
subjects including drawing subjects.
3. The following documents should invariably be enclosed with
the application failing which the application will not be
considered.
(i) Marks secured as per Tabulated Marks Sheets certified by the
Principal.
(ii) Fee in the form of Demand Draft.
4.7.4 MALPRACTICE CASES:
If any candidate resorts to any Mal Practice during
examinations, he / she shall be booked and the Punishment shall be
awarded as per rules and regulations framed by SBTET from time to
time.
4.7.5 DISCREPANCIES/PLEAS:
Any Discrepancy /Pleas regarding results etc., shall be
represented to the Board within one month from the date of issue of
results. Thereafter, no such cases shall be entertained in any manner.
5 ISSUE OF CERTIFICATES AND VETO
5.1. ISSUE OF DUPLICATE DIPLOMA
If a candidate loses his/her original Diploma Certificate and
desires a duplicate to be issued he/she should produce written
evidence to this effect. He / she may obtain a duplicate from the
Secretary, State Boardof Technical Education and Training, Telangana
on payment of prescribed fee and on production of an affidavit signed
before a First Class Magistrate (Judicial) and non-traceable certificate
from the Department of Police. In case of damage of original Diploma
Certificate, he / she may obtain a duplicate certificate by surrendering
the original damaged certificate on payment of prescribed fee to the
State Board of Technical Education and Training.
19
In case the candidate cannot collect the original Diploma within
1 year from the date of issue of the certificate, the candidate has to
pay the penalty prescribed by the SBTET from time to time.
5.2 ISSUE OF MIGRATION CERTIFICATE AND
TRANSCRIPTS:
The Board on payment of prescribed fee will issue these
certificates for the candidates who intend to pursue Higher Studies
in India or Abroad.
5.3 GENERAL
i. The Board may change or amend the academic rules and
regulations or syllabi at any time and the changes or
amendments made shall be applicable to all the students, for
whom it is intended, with effect from the dates notified by the
competent authority.
ii. All legal matters pertaining to the State Board of Technical
Education and Training are within the jurisdiction of Hyderabad.
In case of any ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules,
the decision of the Secretary, SBTET is final.
*****
20
DIPLOMA IN MINING ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATION
I SEMESTER
Subject Name of the No. of Total Scheme of Total

Code Subject Periods Periods/ Examination Marks
/Week Semester
Theory Practi- Dura Sessi End
cal tion onal Exam
Hours Marks Marks
THEORY
MNG-101 ENGLISH-I 3 45 3 20 80 100
MNG-102 Engineering
Mathematics-I 5 75 3 20 80 100
MNG-103 Engineering
Physics-I 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-104 Engineering
chemistry & Envi-
ronmental studies-I 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-105 Elements of
Mining-I 5 75 3 20 80 100
MNG-106 Mining Geology-I 5 75 3 20 80 100
PRACTICAL
MNG-107 Engineering
Drawing-I 6 90 3 40 60 100
MNG-108 Basic Workshop

Practice-I 4 60 3 40 60 100
MNG-109 Physics Lab

Practice-I 3 45 3 20 30 50
MNG-110 Chemistry Lab

Practice-I 20 30 50
MNG-111 Computer Funda-

mentals Lab
Practice-I 3 45 3 40 60 100
TOTAL 26 16 630 -- 280 720 1000
21
II SEMESTER

/Week Semester

cal tion onal Exam
Hours Marks Marks
THEORY
MNG-201 ENGLISH-II 3 45 3 20 80 100
MNG-202 Engineering
Mathematics-II 5 75 3 20 80 100
MNG-203 Engineering
Physics-II 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-204 Engineering
chemistry & Enviro-
nmental studies-II 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-205 Elements of
Mining-II 5 75 3 20 80 100
MNG-206 Mining Geology-II 5 75 3 20 80 100
PRACTICALS
MNG-207 Engineering
Drawing-II 6 90 3 40 60 100

Practice-II 4 60 3 40 60 100
MNG-209 Physics Lab

Practice-II 3 45 3 20 30 50

Practice-II 20 30 50

mentals Lab
Practice-II 3 45 3 40 60 100
TOTAL 26 16 630 -- 280 720 1000
22
III SEMESTER

/Week Semester

cal tion onal Exam
Hours
THEORY
MNG-301 Engineering
Mathematics-III 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-302 Basic Electrical

and Electronics
Engineering 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-303 Methods of working

Coal-I 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-304 Mining Machinery-I 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-305 Mine Surveying-I 5 75 3 20 80 100
MNG-306 Mining Geology-III 4 60 3 20 80 100
PRACTICAL
MNG-307 Electrical and

Electronics Engi-
neering Lab Practice 4 60 3 40 60 100
MNG-308 Communication
skills and life Skills
Lab Practice 4 60 3 40 60 100
MNG-309 Mine Surveying

Lab Practice-I 6 90 3 40 60 100
MNG-310 Mining Geology

Lab Practice 3 45 3 20 30 50
MNG-311 Practical Training

Assessment 3 20 30 50
TOTAL 25 17 630 280 720 1000
23
IV SEMESTER

/Week Semester
cal tion onal Exam
Hours
THEORY
MNG-401 Engineering
Mathematics-IV 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-402 Basic Mechanical
Engineering 3 45 3 20 80 100
MNG-403 Methods of
working Coal-II 3 45 3 20 80 100
MNG-404 Methods of
working Metal 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-405 Mine Machinery-II 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-406 Mine Surveying-II 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-407 Mine Ventilation 4 60 3 20 80 100
PRACTICAL
MNG-408 Mechanical Engi-
MNG-409 Mine Planning and
Design Lab Practice 3 45 3 20 30 50
MNG-410 Programming in C
Lab Practice 4 60 3 40 60 100
MNG-411 Mine Surveying-II
Lab Practice 3 45 3 40 60 100
MNG-412 Mining Machinery
Lab Practice 3 45 3 40 60 100
TOTAL 26 16 630 36 300 800 1100
24
V SEMESTER

/Week Semester
cal tion onal Exam
Hours Marks Marks
THEORY
MNG-501 Surface Mining 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-502 Mine Management

and Entrepreneurship 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-503 Mine Legislation and

General safety 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-504 Rock Mechanics

and Strata Control 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-505 505(A)Advanced
(Elective) Surveying
505(B)Mineral Pro- 4 60 3 20 80 100

cessing and Quality
Control
MNG-506 Mine Environmental

Engineering 4 60 3 20 80 100
PRACTICAL
MNG-507 Rock Mechanics and

Strata Control Lab
Practice 6 90 3 40 60 100
MNG-508 508(A) Advanced

(Elective) Mine Surveying
Lab Practice 6 90 3 40 60 100
508(B)Computer
application in Min-
ing Lab Practice

Engineering Lab
Practice 3 45 3 40 60 100
MNG-510 Project Work 3 45 3 40 60 100
TOTAL 24 18 630 30 280 720 1000
25
C-16
VI SEMESTER
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTION AND EXAMINATION
(PRACTICAL TRAINING)
S.No. Subject Dura- Item Max. Remarks

tion M ar ks
1 MNG:601 Practical 1.First Assessement
Training and 6 (at the end of 2nd
Assessment months month) 100
2. Second Assessment
(at the end of 4th month) 100
3.Training Report
a.Log book 30
b.Record 30
4. Seminar/Viva voce 40
TOTAL MARKS 300
*****
26
I SEMESTER
27
I SEMESTER

/Week Semester
cal tion onal Exam
Hours Marks Marks
THEORY
MNG-101 ENGLISH-I 3 45 3 20 80 100
MNG-102 Engineering
Mathematics-I 5 75 3 20 80 100
MNG-103 Engineering
Physics-I 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-104 Engineering
chemistry & Envi-
ronmental studies-I 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-105 Elements of
Mining-I 5 75 3 20 80 100
MNG-106 Mining Geology-I 5 75 3 20 80 100
PRACTICAL
MNG-107 Engineering
Drawing-I 6 90 3 40 60 100

Practice-I 4 60 3 40 60 100
MNG-109 Physics Lab

Practice-I 3 45 3 20 30 50

Practice-I 20 30 50

mentals Lab
Practice-I 3 45 3 40 60 100
TOTAL 26 16 630 -- 280 720 1000
28
ENGLISH -I
(Common to All the Branches)
First Semester
Subject Title : English - I
Subject Code : MNG-101
No. of periods per week : 03
No. of periods per Semester : 45
TIME SCHEDULE
S. Major Topics No. of Weightage Short Essay
No Periods of Marks Type Type
Questions Questions
1. Speaking 9 26 8 1
2. Grammar 22 34 12 1 (Quest-
ioning)
3. Reading 6 20 - 2
4. Writing 8 40 - 4 (2 from
paragraph
writing,
2 from
letter
writing)
Total 45 120 20 8
29
OBJECTIVES AND KEY COMPETENCIES
S.No. Name of Unit Objectives Key Competencies
01 Need for Understand the need Know the need to learn

English to learn English English
Find solutions to Identify the problems
some problems of students face in learning
Learning English |English
Discuss the various
solutions to overcome
them
02 Classroom Identify expressions How to greet the teacher

English useful in the and other students
classroom Learn the expressions
Use classroom frequently used by the
e x p r e s s i o n s teacher
meaningfully Practise to express
one's ideas in English
03 Expressing Express feelings Know the structures to

Feelings Speak about what express feelings
others feel Use the vocabulary
related to feelings
04 Expressing Express likes and Study the different ways

Likes and dislikes to express likes and
Dislikes Express likes and dislikes
dislikes of others Learn several words and
phrases to express likes
and dislikes
05 Making requests Learn some ways of Examine the various

making requests structures to make
Learn some ways of requests
offering help Learn to make requests
in formal and informal
situations
06 The Mighty Comprehend the Understand the main

Mountain and central idea idea
Little Lads of Learn about Practise to read aloud
Telangana Expeditions Learn new vocabulary
07 Adventures of Read and compre- Understand the central

Toto hend the main idea idea
Appreciate a humo- Learn to make infere-
rous narrative nces
30
Learn new vocabulary
Complete a story
08 Tiller Turns Read and understand Focus on minute details

Engineer - An the main idea Develop innovative skills
Innovation Improve vocabulary Present one's view
09 The Present Differentiate between Learn the three broad

Tense- I time and tense categories of tense
Describe habits and Learn the action words
facts and auxiliary words
Learn the simple
present tense structure
Talk about routine, habits
and facts
Make negative
sentences
10 The Present Describe the actions Express the actions

Tense- II happening in the happening in the present
present Express the actions that
Describe past actions have been completed in
as relevant to the the recent past
present Make sentences in the
present perfect
continuous tense
11 The Past Tense- I Understand what Learn the irregular verbs

irregular verbs are Narrate the stories or
Describe actions which incidents in simple past
took place in the past tense
12 The Past Tense- Describe an action that Describe the actions in

II was happening in the progress in the past
past Use past perfect tense
Describe a past action
that took place before
another past action
13 The Future Tense Describe future actions Express the actions that
Understand various are going to happen in
aspects of future tense the future
Know the uses of the
modals
14 Basic Sentence Learn how English is

Understand basic
Structures- I different from Indian
sentence structures
Languages from
31
Use basic sentence structures point of view
structures in spoken Learn intransitive verbs
and in written forms Use Subject +Verb
Identify common errors structure
in the usage of basic Use Subject + Verb +
sentence structures Subject Complement
structure
15 Basic Sentence Understand basic Learn transitive verbs

Structures- II sentence structures which are followed by
Form basic sentence only one object
structures Learn transitive verbs
which are followed by
two objects
Identify the structures
Use Object
Complement structure
16 Voice - I Identify and use the Learn when to use the

passive voice active voice and passive
Know when the passive voice
voice is used Observe the language
Use the passive voice used in sign boards and
newspaper headlines
Change the voice
17 Voice - II Identify the two objects Change the voice when

of a verb two objects are given
Omit the object in a
passive voice sentence
18 Asking Yes/No Understand the word Communicate using

Questions order in questions yes/no questions
Ask yes/no questions Invert the position of
helping verb to make
questions
Know the common
errors in framing
questions
19 Asking Wh- Frame wh- questions Learn wh-words

Questions Seek information using Ask for specific
such questions information using wh-
questions
20 Paragraph Generate ideas for Write a paragraph using

Writing - I writing a paragraph hints
Organize ideas before Organize the ideas
writing Write the rough draft
32
Write a short paragraph Edit the paragraph to
make final copy
21 Paragraph Identify a topic sentence Write a short paragraph

Writing - II W rite a cohesive using the first sentence
paragraph Learn a few ways of
W rite supporting beginning paragraph
sentences Write a few supporting
sentences
Write a short paragraph
22 Letter Writing - I Understand the format Learn the main

of a personal letter components (the format)
Write a personal letter of a personal letter
Practise a few ways of
greetings, openings and
closures
Write a personal letter
23 Letter Writing - II Understand the format Know the format of official

of an official letter letters
Write an official letter Learn the expressions
often used in official
letters
W rite an official letter
using the hints
33
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS - I
(Common to all branches)
Subject title : Engineering Mathematics-I
Subject code : MNG-102
Periods per week : 5
Total Periods per Semester : 75
Time Schedule with BLUE PRINT
S. Major Topic No of Periods Weightage Short Type Essay Type

No of Marks
Unit - I Algebra Theory Practice R U App R U App
1 Logarithms 2 1 2 0 1 0 0 0 0
2 Partial Fractions 5 1 9 1 1 0 ½ 0 0
3 Matrices and
Determinants 18 6 25 2 3 0 0 ½ 1
Unit - II Trigonometry
4 Compound Angles 4 2 14 1 1 0 1 0 0
5 Multiple and Sub
multiple angles 6 3 16 1 2 0 0 1 0
6 Transformations 6 3 17 1 0 0 0 ½ 1
7 Inverse Trigonometric
Functions 6 2 17 1 0 0 ½ 1 0
8 Properties of triangles 2 0 4 2 0 0 0 0 0
9 Hyperbolic Functions 2 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 0
10 Complex Numbers 4 2 14 1 1 0 1 0 0
Total 55 20 120 11 9 0 3 3 2
M ar ks 22 18 0 30 30 20
R: Remembering type : 52 marks

U: Understanding type : 48 marks
App: Application type : 20 marks
34
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS - I
COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES
Objectives
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to:
UNIT - I
Algebra
1.0 Use Logarithms in engineering calculations
1.1 Define logarithm and list its properties.
1.2 Distinguish natural logarithms and common logarithms.
1.3 Explain the meaning of e and exponential function.
1.4 State logarithm as a function and its graphical representation.
1.5 Use the logarithms in engineering calculations.
2.0 Resolve Rational Fraction into sum of Partial Fractions in
engineering problems
2.1 Define the following fractions of polynomials:
1. Rational,
2. Proper
3. Improper
2.2 Explain the procedure of resolving rational fractions of the type
mentioned below into partial fractions
f ( x) f ( x)
i) ii) 2
( x  a )( x  b)( x  c ) ( x  a ) ( x  b)( x  c )
f ( x) f ( x)
iii) 2 iv)
( x  a )( x  b) ( x  a )( x 2  b)2
3.0 Use Matrices for solving engineering problems
3.1 Define a matrix and order of a matrix.
3.2 State various types of matrices with examples (emphasis on
3rd order square matrices).
35
3.3 Compute sum, scalar multiplication and product of matrices.
3.4 Illustrate the properties of these operations such as associative,
distributive, commutative properties with examples and counter
examples.
3.5 Define the transpose of a matrix and write its properties.
3.6 Define symmetric and skew-symmetric matrices.
3.7 Resolve a square matrix into a sum of symmetric and skew-
symmetric matrices with examples in all cases.
3.8 Define minor, co-factor of an element of a 3x3 square matrix
with examples.
3.9 Expand the determinant of a 3 x 3 matrix using Laplace
expansion formula.
3.10 Distinguish singular and non-singular matrices.
3.11 Apply the properties of determinants to solve problems.
3.12 Solve system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns using
Cramer's rule.
3.13 Define multiplicative inverse of a matrix and list properties of
adjoint and inverse.
3.14 Compute adjoint and multiplicative inverse of a square matrix.
3.15 Solve system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns by matrix
inversion method
3.16 State elementary row operations.
3.17 Solve a system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns by Gauss-
Jordan method
UNIT - II
Trigonometry:
4.0 Solve simple problems on Compound Angles
4.1 Define compound angles and state the formulae of Sin (A±B),
Cos (A±B), tan (A±B) and Cot (A±B)
4.2 Give simple examples on compound angles to derive the values
of Sin150, Cos150, Sin750, Cos750, tan 150, tan750 etc.
36
4.3 Derive identities like Sin (A+B) .Sn (A-B) = Sin 2 A - Sin2 B etc.
4.4 Solve simple problems on compound angles.
5.0 Solve problems using the formulae for Multiple and Sub- multiple
Angles
5.1 Derive the formulae of multiple angles 2A, 3A etc. and sub
multiple angles A/2 in terms of angle A of trigonometric functions.
5.2 Derive useful allied formulas like sin2A = (1- cos2A)/2 etc.
5.3 Solve simple problems using the above formulae
6.0 Apply Transformations for solving the problems in Trigonometry
6.1 Derive the formulae on transforming sum or difference of two
trigonometric ratios in to a product and vice versa - examples
on these formulae.
6.2 Solve problems by applying these formulae to sum or difference
or product of three or more terms.
7.0 Use Inverse Trigonometric Functions for solving engineering
problems
7.1 Explain the concept of the inverse of a trigonometric function
by selecting an appropriate domain and range.
7.2 Define inverses of six trigonometric functions along with their
domains and ranges.
7.3 Derive relations between inverse trigonometric functions so
that given A=sin-1x, express angle A in terms of other inverse
trigonometric functions - with examples.
7.4 State various properties of inverse trigonometric functions and

identities like sin-1x + cos-1 x = etc.
2
7.5 Derive formulae like
tan
1
x  tan
1
y  tan
1
 
x y
1  xy
, where x  0, y  0, xy  1 etc., and solve
simple problems.
8.0 Appreciate Properties of triangles
37
8.1 State sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and projection rule.
9.0 Represent the Hyperbolic Functions in terms of logarithm
functions
9.1 Define Sinh x, cosh x and tanh x and list the hyperbolic identities.
9.2 Represent inverse hyperbolic functions in terms of logarithms.
10.0 Represent Complex numbers in various forms

10.1 Define complex number, its modulus and conjugate and list
their properties.
10.2 Define the operations on complex numbers with examples.
10.3 Define amplitude of a complex number
10.4 Represent the complex number in various forms like modulus-
amplitude (polar) form, Exponential (Euler) form - illustrate with
examples.
COURSE CONTENT
Unit-I
Algebra
1. Logarithms:
Definition of logarithm and its properties, natural and common
logarithms; the meaning of e and exponential function, logarithm
as a function and its graphical representation.
2. Partial Fractions:
Rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials.
Resolving rational fractions in to their partial fractions covering
the types mentioned below:
f ( x) f ( x)
i) ii) 2
( x  a )( x  b)( x  c ) ( x  a ) ( x  b)( x  c)
f ( x) f ( x)
iii) iv)
( x 2  a )( x  b) ( x  a )( x 2  b)2
38
Matrices:
3. Definition of matrix, types of matrices-examples, algebra of
matrices-equality of two matrices, sum, scalar multiplication
and product of matrices. Transpose of a matrix, Symmetric,
skew-symmetric matrices-Minor, cofactor of an element-
Determinant of a square matrix-Laplace's expansion, properties
of determinants. Singular and non-singular matrices-Adjoint and
multiplicative inverse of a square matrix- examples-System of
linear equations in 3 variables-Solutions by Cramer's rule, Matrix
inversion method-examples-Elementary row operations on
matrices -Gauss-Jordan method to solve a system of
equations.
Unit-II
Trigonometry:
4. Compound angles: Formulas of sin (A±B), cos (A±B), tan
(A±B), cot (A±B) and related identities with problems.
5. Multiple and sub-multiple angles: trigonometric ratios of
multiple angles 2A, 3A and submultiple angle A/2 with problems.
6. Transformations of products into sums or differences and vice
versa simple problems
7. Inverse trigonometric functions: definition, domains and
ranges-basic properties- problems.
8. Properties of triangles: relation between sides and angles
of a triangle- sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and projection
rule - statements only.
9. Hyperbolic functions: Definitions of hyperbolic functions,
identities of hyperbolic functions, inverse hyperbolic functions
and expression of inverse hyperbolic functions in terms of
logarithms.
10. Complex Numbers: Definition of a complex number, Modulus
and conjugate of a complex number, Arithmetic operations on
complex numbers, Modulus- Amplitude (polar) form,
Exponential (Euler) form of a complex number- Problems.
Reference Books:
1. A text book of matrices by Shanti Narayan,
2. Plane Trigonometry, by S.L Loney
*****
39
ENGINEERING PHYSICS-I
Subject Title : Engineering Physics - I
Total periods per semester : 60
TIME SCHEDULE
(2 marks) (10 marks)
1. Units and Dimensions 08 08 4 -
2. Modern Physics 12 28 4 2
3. Heat and Thermodynamics 12 28 4 2
4. Elements of Vectors 14 28 4 2
5. Kinematics 14 28 4 2
TOTAL 60 120 20 8
INTERNAL ASSESSMENT
UNIT TEST 1 : UNITS 1,2 and 3
UNIT TEST 2 : UNITS 4 and 5
OBJECTIVES
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able
to
1.0 Understand the concept of Units and dimensions
1.1 Explain the concept of Units
1.2 Define the terms
a) Physical quantity, b) Fundamental physical quantities
and
c) Derived physical quantities
1.3 Define unit
1.4 Define fundamental units and derived units
1.5 State SI units with symbols
1.6 State Multiples and submultiples in SI system
40
1.7 State Rules of writing S.I. units
1.8 State advantages of SI units
1.9 Define Dimensions
1.10 Write Dimensional formulae
1.11 Derive dimensional formulae of physical quantities
1.12 List dimensional constants and dimensionless quantities
1.13 State the principle of Homogeneity of Dimensions
1.14 State the applications of Dimensional analysis (without
problems)
1.15 State the limitations of dimensional analysis
2.0 Understand the concept of Modern physics
2.1 Explain Photo-electric effect
2.2 Write Einstein's photoelectric equation
2.3 State the laws of photoelectric effect
2.4 Explain the Working of a photoelectric cell
2.5 List the Applications of photoelectric effect
2.6 Recapitulate refraction of light and its laws
2.7 Define critical angle
2.8 Explain the Total Internal Reflection
2.9 Explain the basic principle of optical Fiber
2.10 Mention types of optical fibbers
2.11 List the applications of optical Fiber
2.12 Define super conductor and superconductivity
2.13 List the examples of superconducting materials
2.14 List the applications of superconductors
3.0 Understand the concept of Heat and thermodynamics
3.1 Explain the concept of expansion of gases
3.2 Explain Boyle's law
3.3 State Charle's laws in terms of absolute temperature
41
3.4 Define absolute zero temperature
3.5 Explain absolute scale of temperature
3.6 Define ideal gas
3.7 Derive the ideal gas equation.
3.8 Define gas constant and Universal gas constant
3.9 Explain why universal gas constant is same for all gases
3.10 State SI unit of universal gas constant
3.11 Calculate the value of universal gas constant
3.12 State the gas equation in terms of density
3.13 Distinguish between r and R
3.14 Define Isothermal process
3.15 Define adiabatic process
3.16 Distinguish between isothermal and adiabatic process
3.17 State first and second laws of thermodynamics
3.18 Define specific heats & molar specific heats of a gas
3.19 Derive the relation Cp - Cv = R
3.20 Solve the related numerical problems
4.0 Understand the concept of Elements of Vectors
4.1 Explain the concept of Vectors
4.2 Define Scalar and Vector quantities
4.3 Give examples for scalar and vector quantities
4.4 Represent a vector graphically
4.5 Classify the Types of Vectors
4.6 Resolve the vectors
4.7 Determine the Resultant of a vector by component method
4.8 Represent a vector in space using unit vectors ( i, j, k )
4.9 State triangle law of addition of vectors
4.10 State parallelogram law of addition of vectors
4.11 Illustrate parallelogram law of vectors in case of flying
bird and sling.
42
4.12 Derive an expression for magnitude and direction of
resultant of two vectors
4.13 State polygon law of addition of vectors
4.14 Explain subtraction of vectors
4.15 Define Dot product of two vectors with examples (Work
done, Power)
4.16 Mention the properties of Dot product
4.17 Define Cross products of two vectors and state formulae
for torque and linear velocity
4.18 Mention the properties of Cross product.
5.0 Understand the concept of Kinematics
5.1 Write the equations of motion in a straight line
5.2 Explain the acceleration due to gravity
5.3 Derive expressions for vertical motion
a) Maximum Height, b) time of ascent, c) time of descent,
and d) time of flight
5.4 Derive an expression for height of a tower when a body
projected vertically upwards from the top of a tower.
5.5 Explain projectile motion with examples
5.6 Explain Horizontal projection
5.7 Derive an expression for the path of a projectile in
horizontal projection
5.8 Explain Oblique projection
5.9 Derive an expression for the path of projectile in Oblique
projection
5.10 Derive formulae for projectile in Oblique projection
a) Maximum Height, b) time of ascent, c) time of descent,
d) time of flight e) Horizontal Range and f) Maximum
range
43
COURSE CONTENT
1. Units and Dimensions: Introduction - Physical quantity -
Fundamental and Derived quantities - Fundamental and Derived
units- SI units -Multiples and Sub multiples - Rules for writing
S.I. units-Advantages of SI units - Dimensions and Dimensional
formulae- Dimensional constants and Dimensionless
quantities- Principle of Homogeneity- Applications and
limitations of Dimensional analysis.
2. Modern Physics: Photoelectric effect -Einstein's photoelectric
equation-laws of photoelectric effect - photoelectric cell -
Applications of photo electric effect- Total internal reflection-
fiber optics- -principle of an optical fiber-types of optical fibers
- Applications of optical fibers- concepts of superconductivity -
applications
3. Heat and Thermodynamics: Expansion of Gases- Boyle's law-
Absolute scale of temperature- Charle's laws- Ideal gas
equation- Universal gas constant- Differences between r and
R- Isothermal and adiabatic processes- Laws of
thermodynamics- Specific heats of a gas - Problems
4. Elements of Vectors: Scalars and Vectors -Types of
vectors(Proper Vector, Null Vector, Unit Vector, Equal , Negative
Vector, Like Vectors, Co-Initial Vectors, Co-planar Vectors and
Position Vector).Addition of vectors- Representation of vectors-
Resolution of vectors - Parallelogram, Triangle and Polygon
laws of vectors-Subtraction of vectors- Dot and Cross products
of vectors-Problems
5. Kinematics: Introduction- Concept of acceleration due to
gravity- Equations of motion for a freely falling body and for a
body thrown up vertically- Projectiles- Horizontal and Oblique
projections- Expressions for maximum height, time of flight,
range - problems
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Intermediate physics Volume- I & 2 Telugu Academy
2. Text book of physics Resnick & Halliday
3. Engineering physics Gaur and Gupta
4. Fundamental Physics Volume -1 & 2 K.L.Gomber and
K.L.Gogia
*****
44
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL
STUDIES - I
Subject Title : Engineering Chemistry and
Environmental Studies - I
TIME SCHEDULE
1. Fundamentals of
Chemistry 18 40 5 3
2. Solutions 10 18 4 1
3. Acids & Bases 10 18 4 1
4. Water Technology 14 28 4 2
5. Environmental Studies-I 08 16 3 1
Total: 60 120 20 8
OBJECTIVES
to
A. ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
1.0 Fundamentals of Chemistry
1.1 Explain the fundamental particles of an atom like electron, proton
and neutron etc.,
1.2 Explain the concept of atomic number and mass number
1.3 State the Postulates of Bohr's atomic theory and its limitations
1.4 Explain the concept of Quantum numbers with examples
1.5 Explain 1.Aufbau's principle, 2.Hund's rule and 3.Pauli's
exclusion principle with examples.
1.6 Define Orbital.
1.7 Draw the shapes of s, p and d Orbitals.
45
1.8 Distinguish between Orbit and Orbital
1.9 Write the electronic configuration of elements up to atomic
number 30
1.10 Define chemical bond.
1.11 Explain the Postulates of Electronic theory of valency
1.12 Define and explain three types of Chemical bonding viz., Ionic,
Covalent, Coordinate covalent bond with examples.
1.13 Explain bond formation in NaCl and MgO
1.14 List the Properties of Ionic compounds
1.15 Explain covalent bond formation in Hydrogen molecule, Oxygen
molecule, and Nitrogen molecule using Lewis dot method.
1.16 List the Properties of Covalent compounds
1.17 Distinguish between ionic compounds and covalent
compounds.
1.18 Define the terms 1.Oxidation, 2.Reduction 3.Oxidation number
4. Valency, with examples.
1.19 Calculate the Oxidation Number
1.20 Differentiate between Oxidation Number and Valency.
2.0 Solutions
2.1 Define the terms 1.Solution, 2.Solute and 3.Solvent
2.2 Classify solutions based on physical state.
2.3 Define solubility, unsaturated, saturated and super saturated
solutions.
2.4 Define mole.
2.5 Explain Mole concept with examples.
2.6 Define the terms 1. Atomic weight, 2. Molecular weight and 3.
Equivalent weight
2.7 Calculate Molecular weight and Equivalent weight of Acids,
Bases and Salts.
2.8 Define 1.Molarity and Normality.
2.9 Solve Numerical problems on Mole, Molarity and Normality
46
3.0 Acids and bases
3.1 Explain Arrhenius theory of Acids and Bases
3.2 State the limitations of Arrhenius theory of Acids and Bases
3.3 Explain Bronsted - Lowry theory of acids and bases.
3.4 State the limitations of Bronsted - Lowry theory of acids and
bases.
3.5 Explain Lewis theory of acids and bases
3.6 State the limitations of Lewis theory of acids and bases
3.7 Explain the Ionic product of water
3.8 Define pH and explain Sorenson scale
3.9 Solve the Numerical problems on pH (Strong Acids and Bases)
3.10 Define buffer solution and give examples.
3.11 State the applications of buffer solutions.
4. 0 Water Technology
4.1 State the various Sources of water.
4.2 Define the terms soft water and hard water with examples
4.3 Define hardness of water.
4.4 Explain temporary and permanent hardness of water.
4.5 List the usual chemical compounds causing hardness (with
Formulae)
4.6 Define Degree of hardness, units of hardness in ppm (mg/L)
and numerical problems related to hardness.
4.7 Disadvantages of using hard water in industries.
4.8 Explain the methods of softening of hard water: a) permutit
process b).Ion-Exchange process.
4.9 Essential qualities of drinking water.
4.10 Explain municipal treatment of water for drinking purpose.
4.11 Define Osmosis and Reverse Osmosis(RO).
4.12 List the advantages of RO
47
5.0. ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
5.1 Define the term environment
5.2 Explain the scope and importance of environmental studies
5.3 Define and understand the following terms 1).Lithosphere,
2).Hydrosphere, 3).Atmosphere, 4).Biosphere, 5)Pollutant,
6).Contaminant 7) Pollution 8)receptor 9)sink 10) particulates,
11)Dissolved oxygen(DO), 12).Threshold limit value(TLV),
13).BOD, and 14).COD
5.4 Explain the growing energy needs
5.5 Explain renewable (non-conventional) and non renewable
(conventional) energy sources with examples.
5.6 Define an Ecosystem. Understand biotic and abiotic
components of ecosystem.
5.7 Define the terms:
1).Producers, 2).Consumers and 3).Decomposers with
examples.
5.8 Explain biodiversity and threats to biodiversity
COURSE CONTENT
A. ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
1. Fundamentals of Chemistry
Atomic Structure: Introduction - Fundamental particles -
Bohr's theory - Quantum numbers - Aufbau principle - Hund's
rule - Pauli's exclusion Principle- Orbitals, shapes of s, p and d
orbitals - Electronic configurations of elements
Chemical Bonding: Introduction - Valency, types of chemical
bonds - Ionic, covalent and co-ordinate covalent bond with
examples - Properties of Ionic and Covalent compounds
Oxidation-Reduction: Concepts of Oxidation-Reduction,
Oxidation Number- calculations,
2. Solutions
Introduction-concentration methods - Mole concept, Molarity,
48
Normality, Equivalent weights, Numerical problems on Mole,
Molarity and Normality
3. Acids and Bases
Introduction - theories of acids and bases and limitations -
Arrhenius theory-Bronsted -Lowry theory - Lewis acid base
theory - Ionic product of water - pH and related numerical
problems - buffer solutions -Applications.
4. Water Technology
Introduction -soft and hard water - causes of hardness - types
of hardness -disadvantages of hard water - degree of hardness
(ppm) - softening methods - permutit process - ion exchange
process - numerical problems related to degree of hardness -
drinking water - municipal treatment of water for drinking
purpose - Osmosis, Reverse Osmosis - advantages of
Reverse osmosis
5. Environmental Studies
I ntroduction - environment -scope and importance of
environmental studies important terms - renewable and non
renewable energy sources - Concept of ecosystem, producers,
consumers and decomposers - Biodiversity, definition and
threats to Biodiversity.
INTERNAL ASSESSMENT
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Intermediate chemistry Vol 1&2Telugu Acedemy
2. Engineering Chemistry Jain & Jain
3. Engineering Chemistry O.P. Agarwal, Hi-Tech.
4. Engineering Chemistry Sharma
5. Engineering Chemistry A.K. De
*****
49
ELEMENTS OF MINING - I
Subject Title : Elements of Mining - I
TIME SCHEDULE
1 Introduction& stages
of Mining 15 28 4 2
2 Concepts of Mining
Methods 25 32 6 2
3 Drilling Methods 25 46 8 3
4. Prospecting 10 14 2 1
TOTAL 75 120 20 8
OBJECTIVES
Upon completion of the course, student shall be able to
1.0 Know the various Elements of Mining and stages/phases
in Mining
1.1 State the History of mining.
1.2 State Contribution of mining to civilisation and national economy
Indian mineral resources and world status.
1.3 Elaborates on contribution of Mining Activity in the cause of
human civilization
1.4 State the role of mining engineers in industry.
1.5 List the various Mining Industries in the state and in the country.
1.6 Define the terms mine, mining, mining engineering, Ore, Ore
deposits, Waste / gangue, mineral, mineral deposits.
1.7 List the various stages of Mining operations - Pre mining, Mining
and Post-mining.
50
1.8 Introduction to opencast and underground coal & metalliferous
mining - selection criteria.
1.9 List the various pre-mining Operations-Exploration, land
acquisition, prospecting licence.
And Exploration License.
1.10 State the de-vegetation, and initial ground treatment for future
(Next stage) of Mining operations - create or construct Forming
approach Roads.
1.11 List the various mining operation (Entry to deposit, development,
exploitation, Stopping / depillaring.)
1.12 List the various ancillary mining operations - (Strata control,
transportation, ventilation, drainage, lighting, reclamation, or soil
or back filling.)
1.13 List the various post mining operations (beneficiation of mineral
concentration techniques, assaying metallurgical operations.)
1.14 List different types of mode of entry to mineral deposits - (
Shaft, Incline, Adit ,Haul roads.)
1.15 List the applicability and limitations of mode of entries.
1.16 Define the mode of entries with sketches.
1.17 State the comparison of various Modes of entry into deposits
for underground mining - shafts, inclines, adits, etc.
2.0 Know the concepts of Mining Methods.
2.1 Define the following terms with sketches Out crop, Cover, over-
burden, back, vein , lode, ore shoot, coal measures, pit top,
pit-bank, pit-bottom, shaft-station, reserve station, rest station,
mineral reserves, tunnel, cross cut, level , drive, staple pit ,
inset, gallery, heading, blind heading, face, dip, closures, slice,
split, stook, barrier, sump, shaft, auxiliary shaft.
2.2 Give the classification of coal seams based on the thickness
depth, inclination, gassiness and wateriness.
2.3 Give the classification of surface mining technologies.
2.4 Give the classification of methods of working coal in respect of
underground and open cast mining.
51
2.5 Compare Underground mining vs opencast mining.
2.6 Define the following terms with suitable sketches. Horizon
Mining; Placer mining -Hydraulic king, Dredging, Solution
Mining-Borehole Extraction, Leaching.
3.0 Know the Drilling methods.
3.1 State the Principles of drilling
3.2. List the uses of boreholes.
3.2 Give the classification of drilling methods.
3.3 List the selection of Drilling methods
3.4 List the applications of Drilling methods
3.5 List the limitations of Drilling methods.
3.6 Compare percussive and rotary drilling methods.
3.7 List the various drill bits.
3.8 State the flushing methods.
3.9 List the drilling tools and accessories used in rotary drilling.
3.10 State the purposes of tools used rotary drilling methods
3.11 Explain rotary methods of drilling with sketch
3.12 List the fields of application of Drilling
3.13 State the exploration and production drilling.
3.14 List type of drilling in under ground workings,
3.15 List the variables affecting the performance of drilling
3.16 State the novel methods of drilling
3.17 Describe the feed mechanism - Screw Feed and Hydraulic
feed with sketches.
3.18 Define the term flushing.
3.19 Define the terms sludge and core.
3.20 State the purpose of core recovery
3.21 List the different methods of core recovery.
3.22 Explain single tube, double tube and wire-line tube barrels with
sketch.
52
3.23 State the reasons for deviation of bore holes.
4.00 Know the Prospecting:
4.01 Define the term Reconnaissance;
4.02 Explain the principles of Prospecting.
4.03 State the methods of prospecting
4.04 State the method of pit prospecting.
4.05 Explain the method of shaft, trench and boreholes
prospecting..
COURSE CONTENT
1. Introduction and stages of Mining
State the History of mining.-Elaborates on contribution of Mining
Activity in the cause of human civilization-State Contribution of
mining to civilisation and national economy Indian mineral
resources and world status - role of mining engineers in industry.
Define the terms mine, mining, mining engineering, Ore, Ore
deposits, Waste / gangue, mineral, mineral deposit List the
various stages of Mining operations - Pre mining, Mining and
Post-mining. Introduction to opencast and underground coal &
metalliferous mining selection criteria. -Exploration, land
acquisition, prospecting Licence -de-vegetation, and initial
ground treatment - Forming approach Roads- mining
operation- different types of mode of entry to mineral deposits
- Haul Roads. Define the mode of entries with sketches-
applicability and limitations.
2.0 Know the concepts of Mining Methods.
Out crop, Cover, over-burden, back, vein , lode, ore shoot, coal
measures, pit top, pit-bank, pit-bottom, shaft-station, reserve
station, rest station, mineral reserves, tunnel, cross cut, level ,
drive, staple pit , inset, gallery, heading, blind heading, face,
dip, closures, slice, split, stook, barrier, sump, shaft, auxiliary
shaft. Give the classification of coal seams based on the
thickness depth, inclination, gassiness and wateriness. Give
the classification of methods of working coal in respect of
underground and Open cast mining; Compare Underground
53
mining vs Opencast mining. Define the terms with suitable
sketches Horizon Mining; Placer mining-Hydraulic king Dredging
Solution Mining-Borehole Extraction, Leaching:
3.0 Drilling methods
Principles of drilling -uses of boreholes-classification of drilling
method- selection of Drilling methods-applications of Drilling
methods-limitations of Drilling methods-applicability of
percussive and rotary drilling methods-various drill bits- flushing
methods-drilling tools and accessories used in rotary drilling-
tools used rotary drilling methods -rotary methods of drilling
with sketch- fields of application of Drilling - exploration and
production drilling- drilling in underground workings-variables
affecting the performance of drilling- novel methods of drilling-
Screw Feed and Hydraulic feed with sketches-mud flushing-
sludge and core - core recover-methods of core recovery -
single tube, double tube and wire-line tube barrels with sketch-
reasons for deviation of bore holes.
4.0 Know the Prospecting
Prospecting: Reconnaissance; principles and methods of
prospecting - pit, shaft, trench and boreholes;
TEXT BOOKS
1. Elements of Mining Technology, Vol-I,Vol-II D.J Deshmukh,
2. Hartman, H.L., Introduction to Mining Engineering, John Wiley
and Sons, Second Edition, 1999
3. Chugh,C.P., Drilling Technology Hand Book, Oxford & IBH
Publications, 1994.
4. Chugh,C.P. Diamond Drilling, Oxford & IBH Publishers, 1999.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Karnam,U.M.R., Principles of Rock Drilling, 1999.
2. R.D. Singh, Principles & Practices of Modern Coal Mining Pub:-
New Age International Pvt.Ltd. New Delhi
*****
54
MINING GEOLOGY - I
Subject Title : Mining Geology - I
TIME SCHEDULE
1 Introduction 10 14 2 1
2 Physical Geology 20 34 7 2
3 Mineralogy-I 30 46 8 3
4 Geotectonics 15 26 3 2
TOTAL 75 120 20 8
OBJECTIVES
1.0 Know the scope and uses of Geology
1.1 Define Geology
1.2 Explain the scope of Geology
1.3 Mention the different branches of Geology
1.4 State the uses of geology in Mining field
1.5 Define the terms: Geochronology; Engineering Geology;
Mineralogy Gemology: Environmental Geology; Stratigraphy;
Palaeontology; Geomorphology; Structural Geology; Petrology;
Hydrogeology; Economic Geology: Exploration Geology Applied
Geology
2.0 Understand the physical Geology
2.1 Define the physical Geology
2.2 Explain the origin of the earth
2.3 Explain the Nebular hypothesis of Kant and Laplace
55
2.4 Explain the Age of the earth
2.5 Name the important methods to determine the age of the earth
2.6 Describe the internal structure of the Earth
2.7 Define the terms weathering, Erosion, Denudation, Attrition,
Abrasion.
2.8 List the different types of weathering.
2.9 Explain different factors responsible for weathering.
2.10 State the Geological work of wind, River.
2.11 Define the Earthquakes and related terms.
2.12 Explain the Earth Quake waves propagation
2.13 List the causes and effects of Earth Quakes
2.14 Define the volcanoes and related terms.
2.15 Give the classification of volcanoes.
3.0 Develop the Fundamental concepts of Mineralogy- I
3.1 Define the terms Mineral and Mineralogy
3.2 List the important Minerals of Quartz, Olivine, Amphiboles,
Pyroxenes, Feldspar and Mica group of Minerals, name the
minerals which come under each of the above group.
3.3 Explain the megascopic properties of Minerals viz., form, colour,
streak, cleavage, Lustre, fracture, specific gravity, Hardness
with suitable examples.
3.4 List the industrial uses of following Metallic Minerals.
Corundum, Chromite, Hematite, Magnetite, Bauxite, Barites
Chalcopyrite, Malachite, Kyanite.
3.5 List the industrial uses of following Non-Metallic Minerals.
Mica, Graphite, Calcite, Gypsum, Apatite, Ball clay, China clay,
Fire clay, Quartz.
3.6 List the industrial uses of following Precious and Atomic
Minerals Diamond, Topaz, Uranium, Zirconium Monazite,
Beryllium.
4.0 Understand the concepts of Geotectonics
56
4.1 State the Heterogeneity of the earth's crust.
4.2 Explain the Major tectonic features of the Oceanic and
Continental crust.
4.3 State the Continental drift.
4.4 State the Seafloor spreading and Plate Tectonics.
4.5 Define the Island arcs;Oceanic islands and volcanic arcs.
4.6 State the Seismic belts of the earth.
4.7 Define the Seismicity and plate movements.
4.8 Define the Geodynamics of the Indian plate.
COURSE CONTENT
1. Introduction: Definition, Scope, Classification & Uses of
Geology in mining field.
2. Physical Geology: Definition, Origin, Nebular hypothesis of
Kant and Laplace, Age of earth, its determination internal
structure of earth, weathering, erosion denudation, Attrition,
erosion - Geological work of wind, river and their products, Earth
quakes, volcanoes.
3. Mineralogy: Terms-Minerals-Mineralogy-Important Minerals-
Quartzite-Olivine, Amphiboles, Pyroxenes, Feldspar, Mica
Group. Megascopic Properties of minerals, Form, Colour,
Streak, Clearage, Lustre, Fracture, Specific Gravity, Hardness.
List the industrial uses of following Metallic Minerals. Corundum,
Chromite, Hematite, Magnetite, Bauxite, Barites Chalcopyrite,
Malachite, Kyanite.List the industrial uses of following Non-
Metallic Minerals. Mica, Graphite, Calcite, Gypsum, Apatite, Ball
clay, China clay, Fire clay, Quartz. List the industrial uses of
following Precious and Atomic Minerals viz.,Diamond, Topaz,
Uranium,Zirconium Monazite, and Beryllium.
4. Geotectonics: Heterogeneity of the earth's crust.Major tectonic
features of the Oceanic and Continental crust. Continental drift.
Seafloor spreading and Plate Tectonics. Island arcs;Oceanic
islands and volcanic arcs. Seismic belts of the earth. Seismicity
and plate movements. Geodynamics of the Indian plate.
57
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Parbin Singh-A Text Book of Engineering & General Geology-
S.K.Kataria & sons
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. N Chenna Kesavulu- A Text book of Engineering Geology-
Macmillan India Ltd.
2. M.T.Maruthesha Reddy- A Text book of Applied Engineering
Geology- New Age International Publisher
3. Mukerjee P.K. , A Textbook of Geology, The World Press Pvt.LtD
Calcutta.
4 Tyrell G.W.,The Principles of Petrology, B.I.Publications Pvt.
Ltd
5 H.H.Read ,Textbook of Minerology Oxford University Press.Delhi
6. Pettijohn F.J.,Sedimentary Rocks, C.B.S.Publishers&
Distributors
7. Billings M.P, Structural Geology, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd
New Delhi
*****
58
ENGINEERING DRAWING - I
Subject Title : Engineering Drawing - I
TIME SCHEDULE
S. Major Topics No. of Periods Weightage Short Essay
No Drawing of Marks Answer Type
Plates Questions Questions
1 Importance of
Engineering
Drawing -- 01 - - -
2 Engineering
Drawing
Instruments 01 05 - - -
3 Free hand
lettering &
Numbering 01 06 05 1 -
4 Dimensioning
Practice 01 09 05 1 -
5 Geometrical
constructions 03 24 25 1 02
6 Projection of
points, Lines,
Planes & Solids 03 21 25 1 02
7 Sectional views 03 24 20 - 02
Total 12 90 80 04 06
The Course is aimed at developing basic graphic skills so as
to enable them to use these skills in preparation of engineering
drawings, their reading and interpretation
OBJECTIVES
Upon completion of the subject the student shall be able to
1.0 Understand the basic concepts of Engineering Drawing
1.1 State the importance of drawing as an engineering
communication medium
59
1.2 State the necessity of B.I.S. Code of practice for Engineering
Drawing.
1.3 Explain the linkages between Engineering drawing and other
subjects of study in diploma course.
2.0 Use of Engineering Drawing Instruments
2.1 Select the correct instruments and draw lines of different
orientation.
2.2 Select the correct instruments and draw small and large Circles.
2.3 Select the correct instruments for measuring distances on the
drawing.
2.4 Use correct grade of pencil for different types of lines, thickness
and given function.
2.5 Select and use appropriate scales for a given application.
2.6 Identify different drawing sheet sizes as per I.S. and Standard
Layouts.
2.7 Prepare Title block as per B.I.S. Specifications.
2.8 Identify the steps to be taken to keep the drawing clean and
tidy.
Drawing Plate 1: (Having Four exercises)
3.0 Write Free Hand Lettering and Numbers
3.1 Write titles using sloping lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm
and 14mm height
3.2 Write titles using vertical lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm
and 14mm height
3.3 Select suitable sizes of lettering for different layouts and
applications
3.4 Practice the use of lettering stencils.
Drawing plate 2: (Having 5 to 6 exercises)
4.0 Understand Dimensioning Practice
4.1 Define "Dimensioning.
4.2 State the need of dimensioning the drawing according to
accepted standard.
60
4.3 Identify notations of Dimensioning used in dimensioned drawing.
4.4 Identify the system of placement of dimensions in the given
dimensioned drawing.
4.5 Dimension a given drawing using standard notations and
desired system of dimensioning.
4.6 Dimension standard features applying necessary rules.
4.7 Arrange dimensions in a desired method given in a drawing.
4.8 Identify the departures if any made in the given dimensioned
drawing with reference to SP-46-1988, and dimension the
same correctly.
Drawing Plate 3: (Having 8 to10 exercises)
5.0 Apply Principles of Geometric Constructions
5.1 Divide a given line into desired number of equal parts internally.
5.2 Draw tangent lines and arcs.
5.3 Use General method to construct any polygon.
5.4 Explain the importance of conics
5.5 Construct conics (ellipse, parabola and hyperbola) by general
method
5.6 Construct ellipse by concentric circles method
5.7 Construct parabola by rectangle method
5.8 Construct rectangular hyperbola from the given data.
5.9 Construct involute from the given data.
5.10 Construct cycloid and helix from the given data.
5.11 State the applications of the above constructions in engineering
practice.
Drawing Plate -4: Having problems up to construction of polygon
Drawing Plate -5: Having problems of construction of conics
Drawing Plate -6: Having problems of construction of involute,
cycloid and helix
6.0 Apply Principles of Projection of points, lines, planes &
solids
61
6.1 Visualize the objects
6.3 Explain the I-angle and III-angle projections
6.3 Practice the I-angle projections
6.4 Draw the projection of a point with respect to reference planes
(HP&VP)
6.5 Draw the projections of straight lines with respect to two
reference
Planes (up to lines parallel to one plane and inclined to other
plane)
6.6 Draw the projections of planes (up to planes perpendicular to
one plane and inclined to other plane)
6.7 Draw the projections of solids (up to axis of solids parallel to
one plane and inclined to other plane)
Drawing Plate -7: Having problems up to projection of points
and Lines (15 exercises)
Drawing Plate -8: Having problems of projection of planes (6
exercises)
7.0 Appreciate the need of Sectional Views
7.1 Explain the need to draw sectional views.
7.2 Select the section plane for a given component to reveal
maximum information.
7.3 Explain the positions of section plane with reference planes
7.4 Differentiate between true shape and apparent shape of section
7.5 Draw sectional views and true sections of regular solids
discussed in 6.0
7.6 Apply principles of hatching.
Drawing Plate- 9: Having problems of section of solids (6
exercises)
Drawing Plate-10: Having problems of section of solids (6
exercises)
62
Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the
student
S.No Major topic Key Competency
1. Importance of Engineering Explain the linkages
Drawing between Engineering drawing
and other subjects of study in
Diploma course.
2. Engineering Drawing Select the correct instruments
Instruments to draw various entities in
different orientation
3. Free hand lettering Write titles using sloping and
& Numbering vertical lettering and numerals
as per B.I.S (Bureau of Indian
standards)
4. Dimensioning Practice Dimension a given drawing
using standard notations and
desired system of
dimensioning
5. Geometrical construction Construct ellipse, parabola,
rectangular hyperbola,
involute, cycloid and helix
from the given data.
6. Projection of points, Lines, Draw the projection of a point,
Planes & Solids straight lines, planes & solids
with respect to reference
planes (HP& VP)
7. Sectional views Differentiate between true
shape and apparent shape of
section
Use conventional represen-
tation of Engineering materials
as per B.I.S. Code.
Apply principles of hatching.
Draw simple sections of
regular solids
63
COURSE CONTENT
NOTE
1. B.I.S Specification should invariably be followed in all the topics.
2. A-3 Size Drawing Sheets are to be used for all Drawing Practice
Exercises.
1.0 The importance of Engineering Drawing
Explanation of the scope and objectives of the subject of
Engineering Drawing Its importance as a graphic
communication -Need for preparing drawing as per standards
- SP-46 -1988 - Mention B.I.S - Role of drawing in -engineering
education - Link between Engineering drawing and other
subjects of study.
2.0 Engineering drawing Instruments
Classifications: Basic Tools, tools for drawing straight lines,
tools for curved lines, tools for measuring distances and special
tools like mini drafter & drafting machine - Mentioning of names
under each classification and their brief description -Scales:
Recommended scales reduced & enlarged -Lines: Types of
lines, selection of line thickness - Selection of Pencils -Sheet
Sizes: A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, Layout of drawing sheets in respect
of A0, A1, A3 sizes, Sizes of the Title block and its contents,
Care and maintenance of Drawing Sheet, Drawing plate:
Lay out of sheet - as per SP-46-1988 to a suitable scale.
Simple Exercises on the use of Drawing Instruments.
Importance of Title Block.
3.0 Free hand lettering & numbering
Importance of lettering - Types of lettering -Guide Lines for
Lettering
Practicing of letters & numbers of given sizes (7mm, 10mm
and 14mm)
Advantages of single stroke or simple style of lettering - Use of
lettering stencils
4.0 Dimensioning practice
Purpose of engineering Drawing, Need of B.I.S code in
64
dimensioning -Shape description of an Engineering object -
Definition of Dimensioning size description -Location of
features, surface finish, fully dimensioned Drawing - Notations
or tools of dimensioning, dimension line extension line, leader
line, arrows, symbols, number and notes, rules to be observed
in the use of above tools -Placing dimensions: Aligned system
and unidirectional system ( SP-46- 1988)-Arrangement of
dimensions Chain, parallel, combined progressive, and
dimensioning by co-ordinate methods-The rules for
dimensioning standard, features "Circles (holes) arcs, angles,
tapers, chamfers, and dimension of narrow spaces.
5.0 Geometric Construction
Division of a line: to divide a straight line into given number of
equal parts internally examples in engineering application.
Construction of tangent lines: to draw tangent lines touching
circles internally and externally.
Construction of tangent arcs
i) To draw tangent arc of given radius to touch two lines inclined
at given angle (acute, right and obtuse angles).
ii) Tangent arc of given radius touching a circle or an arc and a
given line.
iii) Tangent arcs of radius R, touching two given circles internally
and externally.
Construction of polygon: Construction of any regular polygon
of given side length using general method
Conical Curves: Explanation of Ellipse, Parabola, Hyperbola,
as sections of a double cone and a loci of a moving point,
Eccentricity of above curves - Their Engg.application viz.
Projectiles, reflectors, P-V Diagram of a Hyperbolic process,
Construction of any conic section of given eccentricity by
general method
Construction of ellipse by concentric circles method
Construction of parabola by rectangle method
Construction of rectangular hyperbola
65
General Curves: Involute, Cycloid and Helix, explanations as
locus of a moving point, their engineering application, viz, Gear
tooth profile, screw threads, springs etc. - their construction
6.0 Projection of points, lines and planes & solids
Projecting a point on two planes of projection -Projecting a point
on three planes of projection -Projection of straight line.
(a) Parallel to both the planes.
(b) Perpendicular to one of the planes.
(c) inclined to one plane and parallel to other planes
Projection of regular planes
(a) Plane perpendicular to HP and parallel to VP and vice versa.
(b) Plane perpendicular to HP and inclined to VP and vice versa.
Projection of regular solids
(a) Axis perpendicular to one of the planes
(b) Axis parallel to VP and inclined to HP and vice versa.
7.0 Sectional views
Need for drawing sectional views - what is a sectional view -
Location of cutting plane - Purpose of cutting plane line -
Selection of cutting plane to give maximum information (vertical
and offset planes) - Hatching - Section of regular solids inclined
to one plane and parallel to other plane
REFERENCE BOOKS
Engineering Graphics by P I Varghese - ( McGraw-hill)
Engineering Drawing by Basant Agarwal & C.M Agarwal - (
McGraw-hill)
Engineering Drawing by N.D.Bhatt.
T.S.M. & S.S.M on " Technical Drawing" prepared by T.T.T.I.,
Madras.
SP-46-1998 - Bureau of Indian Standards.
*****
66
BASIC WORKSHOP PRACTICE-I
Subject Title : Basic Workshop Practice-I
Subject Code : MNG - 108
Periods per year : 60
TIMESCHEDULE
S.No Major Title Noof Periods
1. Fitting shop 20
2. Carpentry shop 20
3. Electrical workshop 20
Total 60
OBJECTIVES
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
Practice the required operations in Fitting Shop.
Practice the required operations in Carpentry Shop
Practice the required operations in Electrical Workshop.
67
Competencies and KEY competencies to be achieved by
the student
Title of the Job Objectives Key Competencies
Fitting (20) Identify appropriate Mark the dimensions

1. Marking and measuring tool Remove the material by
Chipping on Mild Handle appropriate chipping from MS flats
steel flat of 12 marking tool
mm thick (04) Handle appropriate
chipping tool
Mark the dimensions
Remove the material
by chipping from MS
flats
2. Cutting with hack Check the raw Load and unload hack
saw of MS flats of material for size saw blade from its frame
6mm thick (06) Fix the work piece in cut the work as per
vice marked dimensions
Mark the work as per using Hack saw
given dimensions
Perform dot punching
Load and unload hack
saw blade from its
frame
Use the hack saw to
perform cutting
operation
3. Drilling, cham- Check the raw Load and unload drill bit
fering and on a material for size from the machine
MS flat of 12 mm Apply the chalk on the Identify appropriate taps
thick (06) surface and on all Tap the hole
sides of the flat
Layout the
dimensions and mark
the lines using dot
punch
Chamfer the edges
through filing
Locate the hole
centers using odd leg
calipers and centre
punching
Identify appropriate
drill bit
Load and unload drill
bit from the machine
68
4. Tapping and Check the raw material Secure the tap in the
Dieing on a MS flat for size wrench
of 12 mm thick Identify appropriate tap Tap the hole
(06) and die Fix the die in die stock
Secure the tap in the Cut external threads
wrench using a Die
Tap the hole
Hold the bar in bench
vice
Fix the die in die stock
Cut external threads
using a Die
Check the fit for
accuracy
5. Assembling of Cut the pieces to size Identify appropriate file

two pieces, using hack saw File the specimen
matching by filing File surface of flat for Assemble two pieces
(06) trueness
Mark the surfaces as per
dimensions
Dot punch the marked
lines
Cut with hack saw as
per marked lines
Smoot the surfaces
with file
Assemble the two
pieces
Carpentry Shop Identify the orientation Identify the orientation of

of grains grains
6. Cutting of wood Select appropriate saw Mark dimensions on
with hand saw for cutting in each of the work using marking
(06) directions viz. across gauge
and along the grains Perform cutting along
Select appropriate work and perpendicular the
holding device grains using appropriate
Handle appropriate saw
measuring and
marking tools(Steel
rule, Try square,
Marking gauge)
Mark dimensions on
work using Marking
gauge
Fix the work in the vice
Perform cutting along
69
the grains using Rip
saw
Change the position of
work in the vice
Perform cutting
perpendicular the
grains using cross cut
saw
7. Planning of Wood Identify the direction for Identify the direction for
(06) planning wood stock planning wood stock
Select appropriate Prepare the jack plane
jack plane for planning
Prepare the jack plane Plane the surfaces on all
for planning four sides using jack
(Load and unload the plane
blade of a jack plane
Select appropriate
work holding device
Perform marking on
work using appropriate
tool
Fix the work in the vice
Plane the surfaces on
all four sides using
jack plane
8. Chiselling of Select appropriate Select appropriate

wood (06) chisels and saw chisels and saw
Select appropriate Mark the position of
work holding device grooves on work using
Select appropriate marking gauge
measuring and Cut sides of grooves by
marking tools hand saw
Fix the work in the vice Chip the material using
Mark the position of firmer chisel by applying
grooves on work using pressure with mallet
marking gauge
Cut sides of grooves
by hand saw
Chip the material
using firmer chisel by
applying pressure with
mallet
Finish the grooves with
rasp file
9. Preparation of a Select the appropriate Trim the dovetail by
Dove tail joint cutting tools and work chisel to exact size
(09) holding devices
70
Plane the wooden Mark at an angle of 750
pieces on all sides with bevel square
Mark at an angle of 750 Cutt the dovetail groove
with bevel square on second piece
Trim the dovetail by Assemble the two
chisel to exact size pieces to prepare
Cutt the dovetail groove dovetail halving joint by
on second piece using mallet
Finish the groove
Assemble the two
pieces to prepare
dovetail halving joint by
using mallet
10. Preparation of Select the appropriate Mark the dimensions to

Mortise and cutting tools and work make Tenon and
Tenon joint (09) holding devices mortise on two pieces
Plane the two pieces to using mortise gauge
the required size using Cut tenon with tenon
jack plane saw along the marked
Mark the dimensions to lines
make Tenon using
mortise gauge
Cut tenon with tenon
saw along the marked
lines
11. Preparation of Use firmer chisel to Use mortise chisel to

Mortise and remove the excess provide recess in the
Tenon joint material to set finished second piece to
tenon accommodate tenon
Mark the dimension to Assemble the two
make mortise on the pieces by fitting the tenon
second piece with into mortise
mortise gauge
Use mortise chisel to
provide recess in the
second piece to
accommodate tenon
Assemble the two
pieces by fitting the
tenon into mortise
Electrical Shop Handle the different wiring Identify the size and
a) Tools and accessories specifications of various
12. Identify tools and b) Select swiches, and tools used for electrical
accessories MCB's wiring
c) Identify wires and Understand the usage of
cables as per the the standard wire gauge
71
requirements of the Identify the type, size and
load specifications of DP
mains,
13. Prepare a straight To prepare a straight Identify the size of the
joint / Married joint joint / Married joint cable
using a 7/20 AI. Cable Perform splicing of
Insulation properly
Perform straight joint /
Married joint
To prepare a T Joint Insert the leads of the
14. Prepare T joint
using a 7/20 AI. Cable wires properly as per the
sketches
Twist the wires properly
To prepare a Western Overlap the two wires

15. Prepare union
union joint using a properly
joint
single strand AI. Cable Twist the binding wires
properly
To prepare a pig tail Place the wires in V-

16. Prepare a Pig Tail
joint using a single shape.
joint
strand Copper Cable Twist the wires in
clockwise direction
To control one lamp by Draw wiring diagram

17. One way Lamp
one 1-way switch with Identify the size of cable,
connection
PVC surface conduit PVC pipe, type of 1-way
wiring system switch and lamp holder.
Make connections as per
Wiring diagram
To control two lamps by Handle the screw driver,

18. Controlling two
two 1-way switches electrician Knife, line
lamps by Two 1-
with PVC surface tester to fix the PVC pipe
way switch
conduit wiring system using saddles and
junction boxes
Select colour and length
of wire for phase and
neutral
Switch on the supply after
making of the
connections
Disconnect the circuit
after testing
To control one lamp Connect 2/3 pin socket

19. Control one lamp
and 2/3 pin socket by properly with respect to
2/3 pin socket by
two 1-way switches phase, neutral and earth.
two 1 way switch
with PVC surface Connect phase wire
conduit wiring system through switches.
To control Electrical Connect the bell through

20. Electric bell
Bell ceiling rose properly
Make ceiling rose
connections properly
72
COURSE CONTENT
FITTING SHOP
1. Marking and chipping on Mild - steel flat 12 mm thick.
2. Cutting with hack saw, M.S. Flats of 6 mm thick.
3. Marking, cutting, drilling, Chamfering and tapping on a M.S. Flat
12 mm thick.
4. Assembling of two pieces, Matching by filing (6 mm thick M.S.
Plate)
CARPENTRY SHOP
1. Cutting of wood with hand saw.
2. Planning of wood.
3. Planning and chiseling of wood.
4. Orientation of wood grain.
5. Preparation of dovetail joint.
6. Mortise and tenon joint.
ELECTRICAL WORKSHOP
1. Wiring tools and accessories
2. Electrical wiring joints
3. Simple lamp circuits
4. Soldering practice
5. Earthing
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Manufacturing Technology (Vol I ) by P N Rao (Mc Graw Hill)
*****
73
PHYSICS LAB PRACTICE - I
(Common for all branches)
Subject Title : Physics Lab Practice- I
TIME SCHEDULE
S.No Name of the Experiment No. of
Periods
1. Hands on practice on Vernier Calipers 03
2. Hands on practice on Screw gauge 03
3. Verification of Parallelogram law of forces
and Triangle law of forces 03
4. Boyle's law verification 03
5. Refractive index of solid using traveling
microscope 03
6. Meter bridge 03
Revision 02
Test 02
Total: 22
OBJECTIVES
1.0 Practice the Vernier caliper to determine the volume of a cylinder
and sphere
2.0 Practice the Screw gauge to determine thickness of a glass
plate and cross section of a wire
3.0 Verify the parallelogram law and Triangle law of forces.
4.0 Verify the Boyle's law employing a Quill tube
74
5.0 Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling
microscope
6.0 Determine the specific resistance of wire material using Meter
Bridge
student
Name of the Competencies Key competencies
Experiments (No. of
Periods)
1. Hands on practice Find the Least count Read the scales

on Vernier Calipers Fix the specimen in Calculate the
(03) position volume of given
Read the scales object
Calculate the volume of
given object
2. Hands on practice Find the Least count

on Screw gauge Fix the specimen in Read the scales
(03) position C a l c u l a t e
Read the scales thickness of given
Calculate thickness of glass plate
glass plate and cross Calculate cross
section of wire section of wire
3. Verification of Fix suitable weights Find the angle at

Parallelogram law Note the positions of equilibrium point
of forces and threads on drawing Constructing
Triangle law of sheet parallelogram
forces (03) Find the angle at Construct triangle
equilibrium point Compare the
C o n s t r u c t ratios of force and
parallelogram length
Compare the
measured diagonal
Construct triangle
Find the length of sides
Compare the ratios
4. Boyle's law Note the atmospheric Find the length of

verification (03) pressure
75
Fix the quill tube to retort air column
stand Find the pressure
Find the length of air of enclosed air
column Find the value P x
Find the pressure of l
enclosed air
Find and compare the
calculated value P x l
5. Refractive index of Find the least count of Read the scale

solid using trav- vernier on microscope Calculate the
eling microscope Place the graph paper refractive index of
(03) below microscope glass slab
Read the scale
Calculate the refractive
index of glass slab
6. Meter bridge (03) Make the circuit Find the balancing

connections length
Find the balancing C a l c u l a t e
length u n k n o w n
Calculate unknown resistance
resistance Calculate the
Find the radius of wire specific resistance
Calculate the specific
resistance
76
CHEMISTRY LAB PRACTICE - I
Subject Title : Chemistry Lab Practice- I
TIME SCHEDULE
Periods
1. Familiarization of methods of Volumetric
Analysis 03
2. Preparation of Std Na 2CO3 solution and
making solutions of different dilution 03
3. Estimation of HCl solution using Std.
Na2CO3 solution 03
4. Estimation of NaOH using Std. HCl solution 03
5. Estimation of H2SO4 using Std. NaOH
solution 03
6. Estimation of Mohr's Salt using Std. KmnO4 03
Revision 02
Test 02
Total: 22
Objectives:
1.0 Practice volumetric measurements (using pipetts, measuring
jars, volumetric flask, burettes) and gravimetric measurements
(using different types of balances), making dilutions, etc.
2.0 Practice making standard solutions with pre weighted salts and
to make desired dilutions using appropriate techniques.
77
3.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std.
Na2 CO3 solution for estimation of HCl
HCl solution for estimation of NaOH
NaOH solution for estimation of H2SO4
KmnO4 solution for estimation of Mohr's Salt
student
Experiments (No. of
Periods)
-- --
Familiarization of
methods for Volume-
tric analysis (03)
Preparation of Std Weighing the salt to the Weighing the salt

Na2CO3 and making accuracy of .01 mg to the accuracy of
solutions of different Measuring the water with .01 mg
dilution (03) volumetric flask, Measuring the
measuring jar, volumetric water with
pipette and graduated volumetric flask,
pipette measuring jar,
Making appropriate volumetric pipette
dilutions and graduated
pipette
Making appro-
priate dilutions
Estimation of HCl Cleaning the glassware Making standard

solution using Std. and rinsing with solutions
Na2CO3 solution (03) appropriate solutions Me as ur in g
Estimation of NaOH Making standard accurately the
using Std. HCl solution solutions standard solutions
(03) Measuring accurately the and titrants
standard solutions and Effectively
Estimation of H2SO4 titrants Controlling the flow
using Std. NaOH Filling the burette with of the titrant
solution (03) titrant
78
Estimation of Mohr's Fixing the burette to the Identifying the end
Salt using Std. stand point
KMnO4 (03) Effectively Controlling the Making accurate
flow of the titrant observations
Identifying the end point
Making accurate
observations
Calculating the results
79
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS LAB PRACTICE -1
(Common to All Branches)
Subject Title : Computer Fundamentals Lab
Practice- 1
Subject Code : MNG- 111
Periods/Week : 03
Periods/Semester : 45
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1.0 BASICS
1.1. Identify the various components of a Computer system
1.2. Differentiate between hardware and software components
1.3. State the configuration of a computer system
1.4. Exercise on creation of Text Files using Notepad, WordPad
1.5. Exercise on creation of .jpeg, .bmp Files using MS-Paint
1.6. Exercise how to use calculator
2.0 DOS Operating System
2.1. Practice on Internal and External commands.
2.2. Create and use Batch Files.
2.3. Know the usage of Editors.
3.0 WINDOWS Operating System
3.1. Exercise on creation of folders and organizing files in different
folders
3.2. Exercise on use of Recycle Bin
3.3. Exercise on use of My Computer and My Documents
3.4. Exercise on creation of shortcut to files and folders (in other
folders) on Desktop
3.5. Exercise on arranging of icons - name wise, size, type, Date
modified
80
3.6. Exercise on searching of files and folders
3.7. Exercise on using of explorer for accessing of files and folders
3.8. Exercise on organizing files / folders using copy and paste
3.9. Change resolution, colour, appearance, screen server options
of Display
3.10. Change the system date and time.
4.0 INTERNET
4.1. Importance of web browser software
4.2. Structure of URL
4.3. Create an e-mail account
4.4. Send an e-mail
4.5. Receive an e-mail
4.6. Browse the Internet using various search engines.
*****
81
S.No. Name of The Objectives Key Competencies
Experiments
1. Identify the vari- Identify various Check whether
ous components Components of a components are
of a Computer System identified correctly
system Identify all components
inside computer
Identify all Peripherals
connected
Observe the functionality
of all components like
CPU, RAM, HDD, FDD,
Motherboard
2. Differentiate bet- To Differentiate Observe differences

ween hardware between hardware between hardware and
and software and software software components
components components
3. State the con- Able to observe Use System icon in

figuration of a configuration of given control panel
c o m p u t e r system Use system information
system in Accessories
4. Practice on Inter- To use internal Check whether able to

nal and External commands use all internal
commands. To use External commands using DOS
commands Check whether able to
use all external
commands using DOS
5. Create and use Able to create Batch Check whether able to

Batch Files. files create by taking set files
Able to create in creating batch file
autoexe.bat file Check whether able to
create autoexe.bat file
properly
6. Know the usage Able to use edlin Check whether able to

of edlin Editor command to create a use edlin command in
file DOS environment
Able to edit a file using Check whether able to
edlin command edit a file using edlin
command
82
7. Exercise on Able to create folder Check whether able to
creation of folders Able to organize file in create folder using right
and organizing different folders click on desktop
files in different Check whether able to
folders create folder using
windows explorer
Observer in organizing
files in different folders
using windows explorer
Observer in organizing
files in different folders
using My Computer
8. Exercise on Able to create picture Check whether able to

creation of .jpeg, file in .jpeg format create picture file .jpeg
.bmp Files using Able to create picture format properly
MS Paint file in .bmp format Check whether able to
create picture file in .bmp
format properly
9. Exercise on using Able to Use Recycle Bin Check Recycle bin

Recycle Bin whether able to use
delete files
Observe files were
properly restored files
10. Exercise on use of Able to Access files and Check whether able to
My Computer and folders in C: Drive access files in C: Drive
My Documents Able to Access files and using My Computer
folders in other drives correctly or not
Able to use My Check whether able to
Documents so that access files in other
organize and access drives using My
files and folders in it Computer correctly or not
Able to use My Check whether able use
Documents so that CD/DVD drive using My
Organizing files in My Computer
Music, My Pictures, My Check whether able to
Videos organize files and
Able to create short cut folders in My Documents
for My Documents on Check Whether able to
desktop properly organize files in My
Music, My Pictures, My
Videos in My Documents
Check able to create
short cut for My
Documents on desktop
properly
83
11. Exercise on crea- Able to create shortcut Check whether can able
tion of shortcut to of files and folders on to create shortcut for any
files and folders desktop files created on desktop
(in other folders) Check whether can able
on Desktop to create shortcut for any
folder created on
desktop
12. Exercise on Able to arranging of Observe whether able to

arranging of icons - name wise, arrange of icons - name
icons - name size, type, Date wise, size, type, Date
wise, size, type, modified on desktop modified
Date modi-fied
13. Exercise on sear- Able to search of files Check searching of files

ching of files and and folders and folders
folders
14. Exercise on using Able to use of explorer Check use of explorer for
of explorer for for accessing of files accessing of files and
accessing of files and folder folders
and folders
15. Exercise on orga-
Able to organizing files Check organizing files /
nizing files /
/ folders using copy folders using copy and
folders Using
and paste paste
copy and paste
16. Exercise using Able to use calculator Check calculator in
Calculator from in Standard mode Standard mode
Accessories and Able to use calculator Check calculator in
through Run in Scientific mode Scientific mode
17. Exercise on shut Able to shutdown of Check shutdown of

down of computer computer system computer system
system
18. Exercise on under Able to understand the Check the use of

standing the use use of Taskbar by Taskbar by opening
of Taskbar opening some some applications
applications
19. Exercise on using Able to use of Internet Check use of Internet

of Internet Explo- Explorer Explorer
rer or any other Able to use of Mozilla Check use of Mozilla
browser Firefox Firefox
Able to use of Google Check use of Google
Chrome Chrome
Able to use of opera Check use of opera
84
20. Change resol- Able to change Check resolution,
ution, color, resolution, colour, colour, appearance,
appearance, appearance, screen screen server options of
screen server server options of Display
options of Display Display
21. Change the Able to change system Check change system

system date and date and time date and time
time
22. Create an e-mail Able to create an e-mail Check able to create an

account account e-mail account
23. Send an e-mail able to send an e-mail Check able to send an

e-mail
24. Receive an e-mail able to receive an e- Check able to receive an

mail e-mail
25. Browse the Able to search for a Check able to search for
Internet using content in the Internet a content in the Internet
various search using various search using various search
engines engines engines
85
II SEMESTER
86
II SEMESTER

/Week Semester

cal tion onal Exam
Hours Marks Marks
THEORY
MNG-201 ENGLISH-II 3 45 3 20 80 100
MNG-202 Engineering
Mathematics-II 5 75 3 20 80 100
MNG-203 Engineering
Physics-II 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-204 Engineering
chemistry & Enviro-
nmental studies-II 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-205 Elements of
Mining-II 5 75 3 20 80 100
MNG-206 Mining Geology-II 5 75 3 20 80 100
PRACTICALS
MNG-207 Engineering
Drawing-II 6 90 3 40 60 100

Practice-II 4 60 3 40 60 100
MNG-209 Physics Lab

Practice-II 3 45 3 20 30 50

Practice-II 20 30 50

mentals Lab
Practice-II 3 45 3 40 60 100
TOTAL 26 16 630 -- 280 720 1000
87
ENGLISH-II
(Common to All the Branches)
Second Semester
Subject Title : English - II
TIME SCHEDULE
Questions Questions
1. Speaking 10 26 8 1
2. Grammar (Including
L6 Adjectives, L/
Prepositions) 14 24 12 -
3. Reading 6 20 - 2
4. Writing 15 50 - 5
Total 45 120 20 8
S.No. Name of Unit Objectives Key Competencies
01 E x p r e s s i n g Express obligations Learn the words to
Obligations Express an order or a express suggestions
strong suggestion and obligations
Express suggestions
and obligations
02 Fixing and Can- Fix appointments Know the importance of

celling Appoint- Reschedule or cancel appointment
ments appointments Learn expressions used
in fixing an appointment
Know the ways of re-
scheduling and can-
celling appointments
03 Extending and Extend invitations Identify the phrases

Accepting Accept invitations used to extend and
accept invitations
Invitations Practise a few ways of
extending invitations
Learn the expressions
used for accepting
invitations
88
04 Giving Instruc- Understand instruc- Know the need to give
tions tions instructions
Give instructions Learn the steps involved
in giving instructions
Practise giving
instructions
05 Asking for and Ask for directions Know the words and
Giving Directions Give directions phrases used often in
giving directions
Learn how to ask for and
give directions
Know the common errors
in giving directions
06 Describing Words Listen for general Listen for main idea and
comprehension minute details
Listen for specific Learn several adjectives
details Know the common errors
identify adjectives and in the use of adjectives
know what an adjective
is use adjectives
accurately
07 The Here and Listen for general Listen for main idea and
Now comprehension minute details
Listen for specific Learn the prepositions of
details place
identify prepositions Learn the prepositions of
and understand what time
prepositions are Learn the common
Use prepositions errors in the use of
prepositions
08 An Environmen- Comprehend the main Learn how to identify the

tal Challenge idea central idea
Learn new words Learn some new words
09 The Will to Understand the main Know the secret of

Succeed idea success of a woman
Learn narrative style of entrepreneur
writing Know the narrative style
of writing
Learn new words
10 Waiting for Mr. Understand the main Learn to note down the
Clean idea central idea of a
Identify conversational paragraph
89
style of writing Learn new words
Learn new words
11 Reported Speech Understand what Learn two ways of

reported speech is reporting a speaker's
Report something words
spoken by others Learn how to change
from direct speech to
indirect speech
12 Error Analysis- I Identify common Know the various errors

errors in sentences in spoken and written
Correct errors in the English
usage of nouns, Identify the common
pronouns and verbs errors
Correct the errors in
nouns, pronouns and
verbs
13 Error Analysis - II Identify the errors in Correct the errors in the

usage of English usage of articles,
Correct errors in the adjectives, adverbs,
usage of articles, prepositions and
adjectives, adverbs, conjunctions
prepositions and Rewrite a paragraph
conjunctions correcting the errors
14 Error Analysis - III Correct errors in Correct the errors in the

vocabulary, questions, usage of vocabulary and
subject-verb agree- in framing questions
ment, homophones Correct the errors in
Identify errors of concord and redundancy
redundancy
15 Data Interpre- Study and understand Study the data given in

tation - I the information in flow flow charts
charts analyse the data given in
analyse/interpret flow flow charts
charts Write a paragraph using
W rite a paragraph the data given
using the data given
16 Data Interpre- Understand the Study the data given in

tation - II information in a tree tree diagrams
diagram analyse the data given in
Analyse the data tree diagrams
W rite a paragraph Write a paragraph using
using the data given the data given
90
17 Data Interpre- Understand the data in Study the data given in
tation - III the table tables
Present the data given analyse the data given in
in a table tables
W rite a paragraph Write a paragraph using
using he data given the data given
18 Resume Understand what a Learn the salient

resume is features of a resume
Preparea resume Observe a sample
resume given
Prepare a resume
19 Cover Letter Understand what a Know the importance of

cover letter is a cover letter
Write a cover letter Read the sample cover
letter
Write a cover letter
20 Note Making Identify important Know the importance of

words and ideas in a making notes
text Look for the key words
Learn how to make given in the text
notes using the cue Observe the sample
method outline using cue method
Make notes using cue
and mapping methods
21 Writing a Report Understand the format Learn the various kinds

of a report of an of reports
industrial visit Observe the format of a
Write a report using the report of an industrial
format visit
Learn the tips to write a
report
Write a report
91
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS - II
Subject title : Engineering Mathematics-II
S. Major Topic No of Periods Weightage Short Type Essay Type

No of Marks
Unit - I Theory Practice R U App R U App
Geometry
1 Straight Lines 6 2 13 2 2 0 0 1/2 0
2 Circle 6 2 13 2 2 0 0 1/2 0
Unit -II Differential
Calculus
3 Limits and Continuity 6 2 10 2 3 0 0 0 0
4 Differentiation 20 10 48 2 2 0 2 2 0
Unit -III
Applications of
Differentiation
5 Geometrical
Applications 8 3 19 2 0 0 0 1/2 1
6 Maxima and Minima 7 3 17 1 0 0 0 1/2 1
Total 53 22 120 11 9 0 2 4 2
Marks 22 18 0 30 30 20

92
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS - II
Objectives
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to:
UNIT - I
Coordinate Geometry
1.0 Solve the problems on Straight lines
1.1 Write the different forms of a straight line - point slope form,
two point form, intercept form, normal form and general form
1.2 Solve simple problems on the above forms
1.3 Find distance of a point from a line, acute angle between two
lines, intersection of two non-parallel lines and distance between
two parallel lines.
2.0 Solve the problems on Circles
2.1 Define locus of a point - circle and its equation.
2.2 Find the equation of a circle given
(i) Center and radius
(ii) Two ends of a diameter
(iii) Centre and a point on the circumference
(iv) Three non-collinear points
(v) Centre and tangent
2.3 Write the general equation of a circle and find the Centre and
radius.
2.4 Write the equation of tangent and normal at a point on the circle.
2.5 Solve the problems to find the equations of tangent and normal.
UNIT - II
Differential Calculus
3.0 Use the concepts of Limit and Continuity for solving the
problems
93
3.1 Explain the concept of limit and meaning of xlim f ( x)  l and
a
state the properties of limits.
3.2 Mention the Standard limits
xn  an sin x tan x a x 1 ex 1
lim , lim , lim , lim , lim ,
xa x  a x 0 x x 0 x x 0 x x 0 x
1 x
 1
lim (1  x) x , lim 1   (All without proof).
x0 x  x
3.3 Solve the problems using the above standard limits
a x2  b x  c
3.4 Evaluate the limits of the type lim and
x l  x2   x  
f ( x)
lim
x  g ( x)
3.5 Explain the concept of continuity of a function at a point and on
an interval with some examples whether a given function is
continuous or not.
4.0 Appreciate Differentiation and its meaning in engineering
situations
4.1 State the concept of derivative of a function y = f(x) - definition,
f ( x  h)  f ( x )
first principle as lim and also provide
h 0 h
standard notations to denote the derivative of a function.
4.2 State the significance of derivative in scientific and engineering
applications.
4.3 Find the derivatives of elementary functions like xn , ax, ex, log
x, sin x, cos x, tanx, Secx, Cosecx and Cot x using the first
principles.
4.4 Find the derivatives of simple functions from the first principle.
4.5 State the rules of differentiation of sum, difference, scalar
94
multiplication, product and quotient of functions with illustrative
and simple examples.
4.6 Explain the method of differentiation of a function of a function
(Chain rule) with illustrative examples such as
2 x
(i) t2  (ii) x 2 sin 2 x (iii) (iv) log  sin(cos x )
t x2  1
4.7 Find the derivatives of Inverse Trigonometric functions and
examples using the Trigonometric transformations.
4.8 Explain the method of differentiation of a function with respect
to another function and also differentiation of parametric
functions with examples.
4.9 Find the derivatives of hyperbolic functions.
4.10 Explain the procedures for finding the derivatives of implicit
function with examples.
4.11 Explain the need of taking logarithms for differentiating some
functions with examples like [f(x)]g(x).
4.12 Explain the concept of finding the higher order derivatives of
second and third order with examples.
4.13 Explain the concept of functions of several variables, partial
derivatives and difference between the ordinary and partial
derivatives with simple examples.
4.14 Explain the definition of Homogenous function of degree n
4.15 Explain Euler's theorem for homogeneous functions with
applications to simple problems.
UNIT - III
Applications of the Differentiation
5.0 Understand the Geometrical Applications of Derivatives
5.1 State the geometrical meaning of the derivative as the slope of
the tangent to the curve y=f(x) at any point on the curve.
5.2 Explain the concept of derivative to find the slope of tangent
and to find the equation of tangent and normal to the curve
y=f(x) at any point on it.
95
5.3 Find the lengths of tangent, normal, sub-tangent and sub normal
at any point on the curve y=f(x).
5.4 Explain the concept of angle between two curves and
procedure for finding the angle between two given curves with
illustrative examples.
6.0 Use Derivatives to find extreme values of functions
6.1 Define the concept of increasing and decreasing functions.
6.2 Explain the conditions to find points where the given function is
increasing or decreasing with illustrative examples.
6.3 Explain the procedure to find the extreme values (maxima or
minima) of a function of single variable - simple problems
yielding maxima and minima.
6.4 Solve problems on maxima and minima in applications like
finding areas, volumes, etc.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT-I
Coordinate geometry
1. Straight lines: various forms of straight lines, angle between
lines, perpendicular distance from a point, distance between
parallel lines-examples.
2. Circle: locus of a point, Circle definition-Circle equation given
(i) center and radius, (ii) two ends of a diameter (iii) Centre and
a point on the circumference (iv) three non collinear points and
(v) Centre and tangent equation - general equation of a circle
- finding center, radius: tangent, normal to circle at a point on it.
UNIT-II
Differential Calculus
3. Concept of Limit- Definition- Properties of Limits and Standard
Limits -Simple Problems-Continuity of a function at a point-
Simple Examples only.
4. Concept of derivative- definition (first principle)- different
notations-derivatives of elementary functions - problems.
96
Derivatives of sum, product, quotient, scalar multiplication of
functions - problems. Chain rule, derivatives of inverse
trigonometric functions, derivative of a function with respect to
another function, derivative of parametric functions, derivative
of hyperbolic, implicit functions, logarithmic differentiation -
problems in each case. Higher order derivatives - examples -
functions of several variables - partial differentiation, Euler's
theorem-simple problems.
UNIT-III
Applications of Derivatives:
5. Geometrical meaning of the derivative, equations of Tangent
and normal to a curve at any point. Lengths of tangent, normal,
sub tangent and subnormal to the curve at any point. Angle
between the curves - problems.
6. Applications of the derivative to find the extreme values -
Increasing and decreasing functions, finding the maxima and
minima of simple functions - problems leading to applications
of maxima and minima.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Co-ordinate Geometry, by S.L Loney.
2. Thomas Calculus, Pearson Addison-Wesley publishers.
3. Calculus - I, by Shanti Narayan and ManicavachgamPillai, S.V
Publications.
*****
97
ENGINEERING PHYSICS-II
Subject Title : Engineering Physics - II
Total periods per semester: 60
TIME SCHEDULE
1. Friction 08 14 2 1
2. Work, Power and Energy 10 18 4 1
3. Simple Harmonic Motion 12 28 4 2
4. Sound 12 26 3 2
5. Properties of matter 06 06 3 -
6. Electricity & magnetism 12 28 4 2
Total: 60 120 20 8
INTERNAL ASSESSMENT
OBJECTIVES
to
1.0 Understand the concept of Friction
1.1 Define friction and state its causes
1.2 Classify the types of friction
1.3 Explain the concept of Normal reaction
1.4 State the laws of friction
1.5 Define coefficients of friction
1.6 Explain the Angle of friction
1.7 Derive an expression for acceleration of a body on a
rough horizontal surface
98
1.8 Derive an expression for the displacement and time taken
to come to rest over a rough horizontal surface
1.9 List the Advantages and Disadvantages of friction
1.10 Mention the methods of minimizing friction
2.0 Understand the concept of Work, Power, and Energy
2.1 Define the terms Work, Power and Energy.
2.2 State SI units and dimensional formula for Work, Power,
and Energy
2.3 Define potential energy
2.4 Derive an expression for Potential energy with examples
2.5 Define kinetic energy
2.6 Derive an expression for kinetic energy with examples
2.7 State and prove Work- Energy theorem
2.8 Explain the relation between Kinetic energy and
momentum
2.9 State the law of conservation of energy
2.10 Verify the law of conservation of energy in the case of a
freely falling body
3.0 Understand the concept of Simple harmonic motion
3.1 Define Simple harmonic motion
3.2 State the conditions of Simple harmonic motion
3.3 Give examples for Simple harmonic motion
3.4 Show that the tip of the projection of a body moving in
circular path with uniform speed is SHM
3.5 Derive an expression for displacement of a body
executing SHM
3.6 Derive an expression for velocity of a body executing SHM
3.7 Derive an expression for acceleration of a body executing
SHM
99
3.8 Derive expressions for Time period and frequency of S
HM
3.9 Define phase of S H M
3.10 Derive expression for Time period of a simple pendulum
3.11 State the laws of simple pendulum
3.12 Explain seconds pendulum
4.0 Understand the concept of Sound
4.1 Define the term sound
4.2 Explain longitudinal and transverse wave motion
4.3 Distinguish between musical sound and noise
4.4 Explain noise pollution and state SI unit for noise
4.5 Explain causes of noise pollution
4.6 Explain effects of noise pollution
4.7 Explain methods of minimizing noise pollution
4.8 Explain the phenomenon of beats
4.9 List the applications of beats
4.10 Define Doppler effect
4.11 List the Applications of Doppler effect
4.12 Explain reverberation and reverberation time
4.13 Write Sabine's formula
4.14 Explain echoes
4.15 State conditions of a good auditorium
5.0 Understand the properties of matter
5.1 Define terms Elasticity and plasticity
5.2 Define the terms stress and strain
5.3 State the units and dimensional formulae for stress and
strain
100
5.4 State the Hooke's law
5.5 Define the surface tension
5.6 Explain Surface tension with reference to molecular theory
5.7 Define angle of contact
5.8 Define capillarity and state examples
5.9 Write the formula for surface tension based on lgebraic t
5.10 Explain the concept of Viscosity
5.11 Provide examples for surface tension and Viscosity
5.12 State Newton's formula for viscous force
5.13 Define co-efficient of viscosity
5.14 Explain the effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids
and gases
5.15 State Poiseulle's equation for Co-efficient of viscosity
6.0 Understand the concept of Electricity and Magnetism
6.1 Explain the concept of Electricity
6.2 State the Ohm's law
6.3 Explain the Ohm's law
6.4 Define specific resistance, conductance and their units
6.5 State Kichoff's laws
6.6 Explain Kichoff's laws
6.7 Describe Wheatstone's bridge with legible sketch
6.8 Derive an expression for balancing condition of
Wheatstone's bridge
6.9 Explain the basic concept of Meter Bridge with legible
sketch
6.10 Explain the concept of magnetism
6.11 State the Coulomb's inverse square law of magnetism
6.12 Define magnetic field and magnetic lines of force
101
6.13 State the Magnetic induction field strength-units and
dimensions
6.14 Describe the moment of couple on a bar magnet placed
in a uniform magnetic field
COURSE CONTENT
1. Friction:
Introduction to friction- Causes- Types of friction- Laws of
friction -Angle of friction- Motion of a body over a horizontal
surface- Advantages and disadvantages of friction- Methods
of reducing friction - Problems
2. Work, Power and Energy:
Work, Power and Energy- Definitions and explanation- potential
energy- kinetic energy-Derivations of Potential and Kinetic
energies-K.E and Momentum relation - Work-Energy theorem-
Law of Conservation of energy- Problems
3. Simple Harmonic Motion:
Introduction- Conditions of SHM- Definition- Examples-
Expressions for displacement, velocity, acceleration, Time
period, frequency and phase in SHM- Time period of a simple
pendulum- Laws of simple pendulum-seconds pendulum-
Problems
4. Sound:
Sound- Nature of sound- Types of wave motion - Musical sound
and noise- Noise pollution - Causes & effects- Methods of
reducing noise pollution- Beats- Doppler effect- Echo-
Reverberation-Reverberation time-Sabine's formula-Condition
of good auditorium- Problems
5. Properties of matter
Definition of Elasticity -Definition of stress and strain -the units
and dimensional formulae for stress and strain-The Hooke's
law- Definition of surface tension-Explanation of Surface tension
with reference to molecular theory - Definition of angle of
102
contact - Definition of capillarity -The formula for surface tension
based on capillarity - Explanation of concept of Viscosity -
Examples for surface tension and Viscosity - Newton's formula
for viscous force- Definition of co-efficient of viscosity- The effect
of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases - Poiseulle's
equation for Co-efficient of viscosity- The related numerical
problems
6. Electricity & Magnetism:
Ohm's law and explanation- Specific resistance- Kirchoff's
laws- Wheatstone's bridge - Meter bridge- Coulomb's inverse
square law- magnetic field- magnetic lines of force-Magnetic
induction field strength-moment of couple-problems.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Intermediate physics Volume- I & 2 Telugu Academy
2. Text book of physics Resnick & Halliday
3. Engineering physics Gaur and Gupta
4. Fundamental Physics Volume -1 & 2 K.L.Gomber
and K.L.Gogia
*****
103
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL
STUDIES - II
Subject Title : Engineering Chemistry and
Environmental Studies-II
TIME SCHEDULE
1. Principles of Metallurgy 10 16 3 1
2. Electro Chemistry 14 30 5 2
3. Corrosion 08 16 3 1
4. Polymers 12 28 4 2
5. Fuels 06 12 1 1
6. Environmental Studies-II 10 18 4 1
Total: 60 120 20 8
OBJECTIVES
to
1. 0 Principles of Metallurgy
1.1 List the Characteristics of Metals.
1.2 Distinguish between Metals and Non Metals
1.3 Define the terms 1.Mineral, 2.Ore, 3. Gangue, 4. Flux and 5.
Slag
1.4 Describe Froth Floatation method of concentration of ore.
1.5 Describe the methods involved in extraction of crude metal-
Roasting, Calcination and Smelting.
1.6 Explain the purification of Metals by Electrolytic Refining
1.7 Define an Alloy
1.8 Write the Composition of the following alloys:1.Brass, 2.German
silver, and Nichrome
104
1.9 List the uses of following Alloys: Brass, German silver, Nichrome
2.0 Electrochemistry
2.1 Define the terms1. Conductor, 2. Insulator, 3.Electrolyte and
4.Non - electrolyte
2.2 Types of electrolytes.- strong and weak with examples.
2.3 Distinguish between metallic conductors and Electrolytic
conductors.
2.4 Explain Arrhenius theory of electrolytic dissociation
2.5 Explain electrolysis of fused NaCl.
2.6 Explain Faraday's laws of electrolysis
2.7 Define Chemical equivalent, Electrochemical equivalent.
2.8 Solve the Numerical problems based on Faraday's laws of
electrolysis
2.9 Define Galvanic cell
2.10 Explain the construction and working of Galvanic cell
2.11 Distinguish between electrolytic cell and galvanic cell
2.12 Explain the standard electrode potentials
2.13 Define electrochemical series and explain its significance.
2.14 Define and explain emf of a cell.
2.15 Solve the numerical problems on emf of cell
3.0 Corrosion
3.1 Define the term corrosion
3.2 Explain the Factors influencing the rate of corrosion
3.3 Explain the concept of electrochemical theory of corrosion
3.4 Describe the formation of a) composition cell, b) stress cell c)
concentration cell
3.5 Define rust and explain the mechanism of rusting of iron with
chemical reactions.
3.6 Explain the methods of prevention of corrosion: a) Protective
coatings b) Cathodic protection (Sacrificial anode process and
Impressed - voltage process)
4.0 Polymers
4.1 Explain the concept of lgebraic tion
4.2 Describe the methods of lgebraic tion a) addition lgebraic
tion b) condensation polymerization with examples.
105
4.3 Define the term plastic
4.4 Types of plastics with examples.
4.5 Distinguish between thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics
4.6 List the Characteristics of plastics.
4.7 State the advantages of plastics over traditional materials
4.8 State the disadvantages of using plastics.
4.9 Explain the methods of preparation and uses of the following
plastics:
1. Polythene, 2. PVC, 3.Teflon, 4. Polystyrene 5. Urea
formaldehyde 6. Bakelite (only flow chart i.e. without chemical
equations).
4.10 Define the term natural rubber
4.11 State the structural formula of Natural rubber
4.12 Explain the processing of Natural rubber from latex
4.13 List the Characteristics of natural rubber
4.14 Explain the process of Vulcanization
4.15 List the Characteristics of Vulcanized rubber
4.16 Define the term Elastomer
4.17 Describe the preparation and uses of the following synthetic
rubbers a) Butyl rubber, b) Buna-s and c) Neoprene rubber
5.0 Fuels
5.1 Define the term fuel
5.2 Classify the fuels based on physical state - solid, liquid and
gaseous fuels with examples.
5.3 Classify the fuels based on occurrence- primary and secondary
fuels with examples.
5.4 List the characteristics of a good fuel.
5.5 State the composition and uses of the following gaseous fuels:
a) water gas, b) producer gas, c) natural gas, d) coal gas,
e) Bio gas and f) acetylene
6.0. ENVIRONMENTALSTUDIES
6.1 Define air pollution
6.2 Classify the air pollutants- based on origin and states of matter
6.3 Explain the causes of air pollution
106
6.4 Explain the use and over exploitation of forest resources and
deforestation
6.5 Explain the effects of air pollution on human beings, plants and
animals
6.6 Explain the green house effect - ozone layer depletion and acid
rain
6.7 Explain the methods of control of air pollution
6.8 Define water pollution
6.9 Explain the causes of water pollution
6.10 Explain the effects of water pollution on living and non living
things
6.11 Understand the methods of control of water pollution.
CONTENTS
1. Principles of Metallurgy
Characteristics of Metals and distinction between Metals and
Non Metals, Metallurgy, ore, Gangue, Flux, Slag - Concentration
of Ore -Froth floatation - Methods of Extraction of crude Metal -
Roasting, Calcination, Smelting - Alloys - Composition and uses
of Brass, German silver and Nichrome
2. Electrochemistry
Conductors, insulators, electrolytes - Arrhenius theory of
electrolytic dissociation - electrolysis - Faraday's laws of
electrolysis- numerical problems - Galvanic cell - standard
electrode potential - electro chemical series -emf and numerical
problems on emf of a cell
3. Corrosion
Introduction - factors influencing the rate of corrosion -
electrochemical theory of corrosion - composition, stress and
concentration cells- rusting of iron and its mechanism -
prevention of corrosion by coating methods, cathodic protection
4. Polymers
Introduction - polymerization - types of polymerization - addition,
condensation with examples - plastics - types of plastics -
107
advantages of plastics over traditional materials -
Disadvantages of using plastics - preparation and uses of the
following plastics: 1. Polytehene 2. PVC 3. Teflon 4.
Polystyrene 5. Urea formaldehyde 6. Bakelite - Rubber -
Natural rubber - processing from latex -Vulcanization -
Elastomers - Butyl rubber, Buna-s, Neoprene rubber and their
uses.
5. Fuels
Definition and classification of fuels - characteristics of good
fuel - composition and uses of gaseous fuels- a) water gas,b)
producer gas, c) natural gas, d) coal gas, e) Bio gas and f)
acetylene
6. ENVIRONMENTALSTUDIES
Air pollution - causes-Effects - forest resources : uses and
over exploitation, deforestation, acid rain, green house effect -
ozone depletion - control of air pollution - Water pollution -
causes - effects - control measures.
INTERNAL ASSESSMENT
REFERENCEBOOKS
1. Intermediate chemistry Vol 1&2Telugu Acedemy
2. Engineering Chemistry Jain & Jain
3. Engineering Chemistry O.P. Agarwal, Hi-Tech.
4. Engineering Chemistry Sharma
5. Engineering Chemistry A.K. De
*****
108
ELEMENTS OF MINING - II
Subject Title : Elements of Mining - II
Periods / Week : 05
Periods / Semester : 75
TIME SCHEDULE
1 Explosives 20 30 7 2
2 Mine Gases 20 40 5 3
3 Shaft Sinking 20 40 5 2
4 Drifting 15 10 3 1
Total: 75 120 20 08
OBJECTIVES
1.0 Understand the explosives
1.1 Define the term explosive.
1.2 State the uses of explosives for mining industry.
1.3 List the characteristics of explosives
1.4 Explain the characteristics of explosives.
1.5 Classifies the explosives based on strength, density
1.6 Define 'low explosive'.
1.7 State the composition of low explosive.
1.8 List the properties of low explosive.
1.9 Define 'high explosive'.
1.10 State the composition of high explosives used in underground
and in opencast mines ( coal and non coal mines)
1.11 List the properties of high explosives.
109
1.12 Define the terms boosters and primers.
1.13 State their composition and list their properties.
1.14 State their field application.
1.15 Compare the Low explosive vs High explosive.
1.16 Define the term 'Permitted explosive'.
1.17 Classifies the Permitted explosives
1.18 List the test that a permitted explosive should pass through.
1.19 List the applicability of permitted explosives.
1.20 Give the composition of permitted explosives with the examples
un-sheathed, sheathed, ultra safe, and off-the solid blasting
explosives.
1.21 List the types of initiation of explosives.
1.22 Describe the safety fuse
1.23 Mentions the field application of safety fuse and cordtex
1.24 Define the term 'detonator'
1.25 Classify the detonators.
1.26 State the composition of different detonators.
1.27 Describe the construction of
a) Ordinary b) electric c) delay and d) nonel detonators.
1.28 Mentions the field of application of each kind of detonators.
2.0 Knows different Mine gases.
2.1 State the composition of surface air and mine air.
2.2 Compares the composition of surface air and mine air.
2.3 List the reasons for changes in the composition of air while
passing through mine workings.
2.4 Give the classification of mine gases.+
2.5 List the poisonous , noxious and inflammable gases.
2.6 State the occurrence and mention the chemical, physical and
physiological effects of poisonous, noxious and inflammable
gases.
110
2.7 Explain the purpose of flame safety lamp.
2.8 Explain the principle of safety lamp-wire gauge principle.
2.9 Describe the constructional details of flame safety lamp bottom
and top feed types.
2.10 Explain the method of transfer of heat in the flame safety lamp.
2.11 Explain the accumulation and percentage tests conducted
with flame safety lamp.
2.12 List different detectors used for detecting poisonous, noxious
and inflammable gases
3.0 Know the Method of shaft sinking.
3.1 List the factors to be considered for the selection of a shaft as
a mode of entry.
3.2 State the factors consider for selection of a site for shaft sinking.
3.3 List the necessary equipment required for sinking a shaft.
3.4 List the different stages of shaft sinking.
3.5 Explain the different stages of sinking through normal strata.
3.6 Explain the permanent supporting of the shaft sides by brick
walling concrete Curbing Monolithic concrete lining.
3.7 Classify the special methods of shaft sinking and their
applicability's.
3.8 Explain the specials methods of shaft sinking a) Pilling Methods
b) Caisson Methods c) Freezing Method d) Cementation
Methods.
3.9 List the modern techniques used in shaft sinking ( shaft reaming,
PMP bore holes ) , Its importance and shaft borers.
3.10 Explain shaft widening and deepening of the shaft.
4.0 Drifting:
4.1 List the Conventional methods of Drifting.
4.2 State the different types of drilling patterns.
4.3 Explain the Procedure for blasting, loading, transport of Drifting
4.4 Explain the Procedure for muck, support, ventilation, drainage
and lighting of Drifting.
111
4.5 State the Drifting through loose, fractured, flowing and water
bearing ground;
4.6 Explain the Drifting by road headers.
4.7 Discus about tunnel boring machines
COURSE CONTENT
1. Explosives
Uses of explosives in mining industry, characteristics
classification basing on strength, speed and application, low
and high explosives, their composition, properties - explosives
used in underground in opencast workings including LOX,
slurries boosters, primer - their composition application
permitted explosives - tools, applicability, examples with their
composition. Selection of explosives - factors Initiation of
explosives - fuses - safety fuse, cortex fuse. Detonators - types,
composition, constructional details application.
2. Mine Gases
Atmospheric and mine air - composition, changes, reasons
Classification of mine -poisonous, inflammable and noxious,
their physical and chemical properties physiological effects,
occurrence.Testing for the presence of mine gases, flames
safety lamp-Principle- constructional details, transfer of heat
in the lamp, Accumulation and percentage tests- Listing of
detectors.
3. Shaft Sinking
Uses, factors for selection of site, different stages of sinking
through subsoil, temporary, permanent supporting, special
methods of shaft sinking-widening of shaft
4. Drifting: Conventional methods, different types of drilling
patterns, blasting, loading, transport of muck, support,
ventilation, drainage and lighting; Drifting through loose,
fractured, flowing and water bearing ground; Drifting by road
headers and tunnel boring machines
112
TEXT BOOKS
1. Elements of Mining Technology, Vol-I,Vol-II D.J Deshmukh,
and Sons, Second Edition, 1999
Publications, 1994.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Karnam,U.M.R., Principles of Rock Drilling, 1999.
*****
113
MINING GEOLOGY-II
Subject Title : Mining Geology-II
Periods / Week : 05
TIME SCHEDULE
1 Mineralogy-II 20 26 3 2
2 Petrology 20 34 7 2
3 Structural Geology 20 34 7 2
4. Geotechnical
Engineering and
Geomorphology 15 26 3 2
Total: 75 120 20 08
OBJECTIVES
1.0 Develop the Fundamental concepts of Mineralogy-II
1.1 Optical Mineralogy : Define the terms Refractive Index,
Birefringence, Pleochroism, Extinction and Twinning.
1.2 Explain the Simple Polarising Microscope
1.3 State the occurrence and distribution of important minerals in
Telangana
1.4 State the occurrence and distribution of important minerals in
India.
1.5 List the various mineral based industries in Telangana.
1.6 List the various mineral based industries in India.
2.0 Develop the fundamental concepts of Petrology
2.1 Define the terms Lava, Magma, Petrology
114
2.2 Give border classification of Rocks; explain the terms Igneous,
Sedimentary and Metamorphic rocks.
2.3 Explain the origin of Igneous Rocks.
2.4 Explain Forms, Textures and structures of Igneous Rocks.
2.5 Explain the classification of Igneous Rocks
2.6 Describe the following rocks i) Granite ii) Rhyolite iii) Gabbros
iv) Basalt v) Dolerite vi) Pegmatite
2.7 Explain the formation of sedimentary rocks.
2.8 Explain the structures of sedimentary rocks.
2.9 Give the classification of sedimentary rocks.
2.10 Describe the following Sedimentary rocks
i) Breccias ii) Conglomerate iii) Sand stone iv) Shale v) Lime
stone vi) Dolomite
2.11 Define the terms metamorphism and metamorphic rocks.
2.12 Explain different metamorphic Agents.
2.13 Name the different kinds of Metamorphism
2.14 Describe important textures and structures of metamorphic
rocks.
2.15 Describe the following Metamorphic rocks
i) Gneisses ii) Schist iii) Phyllite iv) Slate v) Quartzite vi)
Charnockite
3.0 Develop the Fundamental concepts of structural Geology
3.1 Explain the primary and secondary structures of Rock
formations.
3.2 Explain the terms Bedding, Dip, True Dip, Apparent Dip, Strike,
Overlap, In linear,
Out liear.
3.3 Explain the Fold and it's components with sketches.
3.4 Describe different kinds of Folds
3.5 Describe the Fault and it's components with sketches.
115
3.6 Describe different kinds of faults with sketches.
3.7 Define the term joints.
3.8 Define unconformities.
3.9 Describe different kinds of unconformities.
3.10 Explain the significance of unconformities in Geology
4.0 Geotechnical Engineering and Geomorphology
4.1 Define the terms Grouting, Backfilling, Rock Bolting.
4.2 Explain the Soil Stabilization and Slope Stabilization.
4.3 Define the terms Lapies, Natural bridges, Swallow holes, Uvala,
Polje,Kanker, Karst topography.
4.4 Explain the Land forms made by the action of Underground
water
4.5 Explain the Origin of Lakes
COURSE CONTENT
1. Mineralogy II: Refractive Index, Birefringence, Pleochroism,

Extinction and Twinning. Simple Polarising Microscope.
Occurrence and Distributions of Minerals in Telangana. Minerals
based industries in Telangana. Occurrence and Distributions
of Minerals India. Minerals based industries in India.
2. Petrology: Lava, Magma, Petrology. Classification of Rocks-
Igneous, Sedimentary and Metamorphic .Forms, textures and
structures of Igneous Rocks-Granite, Rhyolite, Gabbros, Basalt,
Dolomite, Pegmatite. Formation of Sedimentary Rocks -
Classification - Breccias, Conglomeration, Sandstone, Shale,
Limestone, Dolomite- Metamorphosis - Metamorphic Rocks -
Gneiss, Schist, Phyllite, Slate, Quartzite, Charnockite
3. Structural Geology: Primary and secondary structure of rock
formation, terms-bedding, Dip, True Dip, Apparent Dip, Strike,
Overlap, In liear, and Outlier. Fold and its components. Types
of Folds. Different Kinds of faults, joints, Unconformities and
their types.
116
4. Geotechnical Engineering and Geomorphology
Grouting, Backfilling, Rock Bolting. Soil Stabilization and Slope
Stabilization.
Lapies, Natural bridges, Swallow holes, Uvala, Polje,Kanker,
Karst topography. Land forms made by the action of
Underground water.O rigin of Lakes.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Parbin Singh-A Text Book of Engineering & General Geology-
S.K.Kataria & sons
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. N Chenna Kesavulu- A Text book of Engineering Geology-
Macmillan India Ltd.
2. M.T.Maruthesha Reddy- A Text book of Applied Engineering
Geology- New Age International Publisher
3. Mukerjee P.K. , A Textbook of Geology, The World Press Pvt.LtD
Calcutta.
4 Tyrell G.W.,The Principles of Petrology, B.I.Publications Pvt.
Ltd
5 H.H.Read ,Textbook of Minerology Oxford University Press.Delhi
6. Pettijohn F.J.,Sedimentary Rocks, C.B.S.Publishers&
Distributors
7. Billings M.P, Structural Geology, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd
New Delhi
8. Optical Mineralogy- E.E. Wahlstrom, John Wiley and Sons.
9. A Text book of Geology- G.B. Mahapatra- CBS Publishers.
10. Morphology and Optical Geology- S.Ray.
*****
117
ENGINEERING DRAWING - II
Subject Title : Engineering Drawing - II
TIME SCHEDULE
S. Major Topics No. of Periods Weightage Short Essay
No Drawing of Marks Answer Type
Plates Questions Questions
1 Auxiliary views 01 06 10 1 ½
2 Orthographic
Projection 03 33 25 1 2
3 Pictorial drawing 03 30 25 1 2
4 Development of
surfaces 03 21 20 1 1½
Total 10 90 80 04 06
The Course is aimed at developing basic graphic skills so as

to enable them to use these skills in preparation of engineering
drawings, their reading and interpretation
Pre-Requisite: Clear visualization and sound pictorial intelligence
OBJECTIVES
1.0 Understand the need of auxiliary views
1.1 State the need of Auxiliary views for a given engineering
drawing.
1.2 Draw the auxiliary views of a given engineering component
1.3 Differentiate between auxiliary view and apparent view
Drawing plate No.1: (Having 4 exercises)
2.0 Apply principles of orthographic projection
2.1 Explain the principles of orthographic projection with simple
sketches.
118
2.2 Draw the orthographic view of an object from its pictorial
drawing.
2.3 Draw the minimum number of views needed to represent a
given object fully.
Drawing Plate No. 2 : (Having 8 to 10 exercises)
3.0 Prepare pictorial drawings
3.1 State the need of pictorial drawings.
3.2 Differentiate between isometric scale and true scale.
3.3 Prepare Isometric views for the given orthographic drawings.
Drawing plate No 5: (Having 10 to 12 exercises)
Drawing plate No. 6: (Having 10 to 12 exercises)
Drawing plate No. 7: (Having 10 to 12 exercises)
4.0 Interpret Development of surfaces of different solids
4.1 State the need for preparing development drawing.
4.2 Prepare development of simple engineering objects (cubes,
prisms, cylinders, cones, pyramid) using parallel line and radial
line method.
4.3 Prepare development of surface of engineering components
like trays, funnel, 900 elbow & rectangular duct.
Drawing plate No. 8: (Having 05 exercises)
119
student
S.No Major topic Key Competency
1. Auxiliary views Draw the auxiliary views of a
given Engineering component
Differentiate between Auxiliary
view and apparent view
2. Orthographic Projection Draw the minimum number of
views needed to represent a
given object fully.
3. Pictorial drawing Differentiate between
isometric scale and true
scale.
Draw the isometric views of
given objects,.
4. Development of surfaces Prepare development of
Surface of Engineering
components like trays, funnel,
900 elbow & rectangular duct.
COURSE CONTENT
NOTE
1. B.I.S Specification should invariably be followed in all the topics.
2. A-3 Size Drawing Sheets are to be used for all Drawing Practice
Exercises.
1.0 Auxiliary views
Need for drawing auxiliary views -Explanation of the basic
principles of drawing an auxiliary views explanation of reference
plane and auxiliary plane - Partial auxiliary view.
2.0 Orthographic Projections
Meaning of orthographic projection -Using a viewing box and a
model - Number of views obtained on the six faces of the box,
- Legible sketches of only 3 views for describing object -Concept
of front view, top view, and side view sketching these views for
a number of engg objects - Explanation of first angle projection.
120
- Positioning of three views in First angle projection -
Projection of points as a means of locating the corners of the
surfaces of an object - Use of miter line in drawing a third view
when other two views are given -Method of representing hidden
lines -Selection of minimum number of views to describe an
object fully.
3.0 Pictorial Drawings
Brief description of different types of pictorial drawing viz.,
Isometric, oblique, and perspective and their use - Isometric
drawings: Iso axis, angle between them, meaning of visual
distortion in dimensions - Need for an isometric scale, difference
between Isometric scale, and ordinary scale difference
between Isometric view and Isometric projection - Isometric
and non-Isometric lines -Isometric drawing of common features
like rectangles, circular - shapes, non-isometric lines - Use of
box and offset methods
4.0 Development of Surfaces
Need for preparing development of surface with reference to
sheet metal work -Concept of true length of a line with reference
to its orthographic projection when the line is (i) parallel to the
plane of projection (ii) inclined to one principal and parallel to
the other -Development of simple solids like cubes, prisms,
cylinders, cones, pyramid (sketches only) -Types of
development: Parallel line and radial line development -
Procedure of drawing development, drawings of trays, funnels,
900 elbow pipes and rectangular ducts.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Engineering Graphics by P I Varghese - ( McGraw-hill)
Engineering Drawing by Basant Agarwal & C.M Agarwal -
(McGraw-hill)
Engineering Drawing by N.D.Bhatt.
T.S.M. & S.S.M on " Technical Drawing" prepared by T.T.T.I.,
Madras.
SP-46-1998 - Bureau of Indian Standards.
*****
121
BASIC WORKSHOP PRACTICE-II
Subject Title : Basic Workshop Practice-II
Periods / Week : 04
TIME SCHEDULE
S.No. List of Experiments No. of Periods
1. Machine shop 24
2. Forging shop 20
3. Welding shop 16
TOTAL 60
OBJECTIVES
Practice the required operations in Machine Shop
Practice the required operations in Forging Shop
Practice the required operations in Welding Shop
122
student
S.No. Name of the Objectives Key Competences
Experiment
Machine shop Choose the rod Perform various

whose diameter is to operations using lathe
1. Turn the given rod be reduced and its operation
Mark the Centers of
to get three diff- the work on either Placing the job between
erent diameters side the heads of the Lathe
using Lathe Mount thework Measuring the diameter
between head stock & of the rod using Vernier
tail stock centers calliper before and after
Fix the tool in the tool cutting using lathe
post & position it in
appropriate height
Start the lathe to make
the workpiece to
revolve at desired
speed
Feed the bevel gauge
against the rotating
work to get the
required size and
shape
Use outside callipers
to nchech the
diameter of the pin
Use parting off tool to
reduce the diameter
on either ends of the
pin
Removing the rolling
pin between centres
and cut off excess
material on either
sides
2. Thread cutting Identify the tools Perform thread cutting

using Lathe required to perform operation
thread cutting
Draw the diagram of
external threading
Fix the thread cutting
tool to the lathe
machine
Perform the external
threading using tool
123
3. Make a square Draw the diagram of Prepare square plate of
plate using power required square plate required dimensions
grinder, mark along with its Mark the triangle of given
dimensions
triangular and drill side along with its
Identify the tools
three holes of required vertices
different diaI Mark the triangle of given Perform drilling of holes
meters of the side along with is of required diameter at
vertices vertices its vertices
Forging shop Perform drilling of holes Heat the specimen to the

of required diameter at
its vertices appropriate temperature
4. Conversion of Identify the holding and Hammer the specimen
Round to Square striking tools to the required shape
(09) Heat the specimen to
the appropriate
temperature
Remove the specimen
and hold it on the anvil
Hammer the specimen
to the required shape
5. Conversion of Identify the holding and Heat the specimen to the

Round to striking tools appropriate temperature
Hexagon (09) Heat the specimen to Hammer the specimen
the appropriate to the required shape
temperature
Remove the specimen
Hammer the specimen
6. Preparation of a Identify the holding and Heat the specimen to the

Chisel from round striking tools appropriate temperature
rod (09) Heat the specimen to Hammer the specimen
the appropriate
temperature to the required shape
Remove the specimen
Hammer the specimen
Competencies
Welding Shop Identify the various tools Perform welding

7. Perform various required to perform operation
joints such as T- Welding operation Finishing of the job by
Joint, Butt Joint, Prepare various joints grinding operation
Lap Joint Smoothening of joint by
grinding.
124
COURSE CONTENT
MACHINE SHOP
1. Turn the given rod to get three different diameters using Lathe.
2. Thread cutting on Lathe.
3. Thread cutting on GI pipe on Lathe
4. Make a square plate using power grinder, mark triangular and
drill three holes of different diameters of the vertices
FORGING SHOP
1. Conversion of round to square.
2. Conversion of round to Hexagon.
3. Preparation of chisel from round rod.
WELDING SHOP
1. Beading of Practice.
2. Prepare a job and make a Lap joint and finish it using grinder.
3. Prepare a job and make a Butt joint and finish it using grinder.
4. Prepare the job and make T- joint
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Manufacturing Technology (Vol-I) by P N Rao (Mc Graw Hill)
125
PHYSICS LAB PRACTICE - II
Subject Title : PHYSICS LAB PRACTICE- II

Subject Code : MNG -209
TIME SCHEDULE
Periods
1. Focal length and Focal power
of convex lens (Separate & Combination) 03
2. Simple pendulum 03
3. Velocity of sound in air -
(Resonance method) 03
4. Surface tension of liquid using traveling
microscope 03
5. Coefficient of Viscosity by capillary method 03
6. Mapping of magnet lines of force 03
Revision 03
Test 02
Total: 23
OBJECTIVES
1.0 Determine the Focal length and focal power of convex lenses
using U-V and graphical method
2.0 Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity using Simple
Pendulum and verify with L-T2 graph.
3.0 Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature
126
4.0 Determine the surface tension of a liquid using travelling
microscope
5.0 Determine the viscosity of a liquid using capillary method
6.0 Practice the mapping of magnetic lines of force.

student
Experiments (No. of
Periods)
1. Focal length and Fix the object distance Calculate the focal
Focal power of Find the Image distance length and power
convex lens (Sepa- Calculate the focal length of convex lens
rate & Combina- and power of convex lens Draw u-v and 1/u -
tion) (03) and combination of 1/v graph
convex lenses
Draw u-v and 1/u - 1/v
curves
2. Simple pendulum Fix the simple pendulum Find the time for
(03) to the stand number of
Adjust the length of oscillations
pendulum Find the time
Find the time for number period
of oscillations Calculate the
Find the time period acceleration due
Calculate the to gravity
acceleration due to Draw l-T and l-T2
gravity graph
Draw l-T and l-T2 graph
3. Velocity of sound in Arrange the resonance Adjust the

air -Resonance apparatus reservoir level
method (03) Adjust the reservoir level Find the first and
for booming sound second reso-
Find the first and second nanting lengths
resonanting lengths Calculate velocity
Calculate velocity of of sound
sound Calculate velocity
of sound at 00 C
127
4. Surface tension of Find the least count of Read the scale
liquid using trave- vernier on microscope Calculate height of
ling microscope Focus the microscope to liquid rise
(03) the lower meniscus & Calculate the
bent pin surface tension of
Read the scale water
Calculate height of liquid
rise
Calculate the surface
tension of water
5. Coefficient of Find the least count of Find the pressure

viscosity by vernier head
capillary method Fix the capillary tube to Calculate rate of
(03) aspiratory bottle volume of liquid
Find the mass of collected
collected water Find the radius of
capillary tube
Calculate the
viscosity of water
6. Mapping of magnet Find the pressure head Draw magnetic

lines of force(03) Calculate rate of volume lines of
of liquid collected force
Find the radius of capillary Locate the neutral
tube points
Calculate the viscosity of along equatorial
water using capillary and
method axial lines
Draw magnetic meridian
Placed the bar magnet in
NN and NS directions
Draw magnetic lines of
force
Locate the neutral points
along equatorial and axial
lines
128
CHEMISTRY LAB PRACTICE - II
Subject Title : CHEMISTRY LAB

PRACTICE- II
Subject Code : MNG -210
TIME SCHEDULE
Periods
1. Determination of acidity of water sample 03
2. Determination of alkalinity of water sample 03
3. Determination of total hardness of water
using Std. EDTA solution 03
4. Estimation of Chlorides present in water
sample 03
5. Estimation of Dissolved Oxygen (D.O) in
water sample 03
6. Determination of pH using pH meter 03
Revision 03
Test 02
Total: 23
OBJECTIVES
1.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine
the acidity of given samples of water (One ground water and
one surface / tap water, and rain water if available)
129
the alkalinity of given samples of water (One ground water and
one surface / tap water)
the total hardness of given samples of water (One ground water
and one surface / tap water) using Std. EDTA solution
the chlorides present in the given samples of water and
wastewater (One ground water and one surface / tap water)
5.0 Conduct the test using titrometric / electrometric method to
determine Dissolved Oxygen (D.O) in given water samples
(One sample from closed container and one from open
container / tap water)
6.0 Conduct the test on given samples of water / solutions (like
soft drinks, sewage, etc.) to determine their pH using standard
pH meter.

student
Experiments (No. of
Periods)
Determination of Cleaning the glassware Making standard
acidity of water and rinsing with solutions
sample (03) appropriate solutions Me as ur in g
Making standard accurately the
Determination of solutions standard solutions
alkalinity of water Measuring accurately the and titrants
sample (03) standard solutions and Effectively
titrants Controlling the flow
Determination of total Filling the burette with of the titrant
hardness of water titrant Identifying the end
using Std. EDTA Fixing the burette to the point
solution (03) stand Making accurate
Effectively Controlling the observations
Estimation of flow of the titrant
Chlorides present in Identifying the end point
water sample (03) Making accurate
observations
Calculating the results
130
Estimation of
Dissolved Oxygen
(D.O) in water sample
(By titration method)
(03)
Estimation of
Dissolved Oxygen
(D.O) in water sample
(By electrometric
method) (03)
Determination of pH Familiarize with Prepare standard

using pH meter (03) instrument solutions / buffers,
Choose appropriate etc.
'Mode' / 'Unit' Standardize the
Prepare standard instrument with
solutions / buffers, etc. appropriate
Standardize the standard solutions
instrument with Plot the standard
appropriate standard curve
solutions Make measure-
Plot the standard curve ments accurately
Follow Safety
precautions
131
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS LAB PRACTICE-II
(Common to All Braches other than CME & IT)
Subject Title : Computer Fundamentals Lab

Practice-II
Periods/Week : 03
Periods/Semester : 45
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1.0 MS-WORD
1.1. Open MS-word and Identify the components on the screen
1.2. Create a document using MS-word and save it.
1.3. Create a table using MS-Word and save it.
1.4. Apply formulas in table & sort the table
1.5. Convert text into table & table into text.
1.6. Insertion of new rows and columns in the existing table and
changing background colour in table
1.7. Merge and split cells in a table
1.8. Change the font format
1.9. Exercise with Headers and Footers, paragraph tool bar.
1.10. Insert objects into the document like pictures, shapes, charts,
word-art.
1.11. Create mailing letters using mail merge tool of MS-word
1.12. Exercise on printing a document , page setting, different views
of a document
1.13. Import & export files to & from MS-Word.
2.0 MS-EXCEL
2.1. Open MS-Excel and identify the components on the screen
2.2. Create a Worksheet in MS-Excel and save it in .xls or .xlsx
format
132
2.3. Insert a column and row in Excel
2.4. Exercise on creation of new worksheet in the existing Excel
Book file
2.5. Generate a Chart using the data in Excel-worksheet
2.6. Automate calculations in a worksheet using formulae
2.7. Sort and filter data in a worksheet
2.8. Protect a worksheet, working with multiple sheets
3.0 MS-POWERPOINT
3.1. Create a simple Power point presentation for a small topic and
saving in .ppt or pptx format
3.2. Insert a new slide in the existing PowerPoint file
3.3. Insert chart or image in a PowerPoint slide
3.4. Exercise with animation and sound features in PowerPoint
3.5. Exercise with Rehearse Timings feature in PowerPoint
3.6. Exercise in printing the PowerPoint file in (a) Slides (b) Handouts
S.No. Name of the Objectives Key Competencies
Experiments
Able to Open MS-word Check whether able to
1. Open MS-W ord
and Identify the Identify the components
from (i) Programs
components on the on the screen
(ii) Run and
screen Check whether able to
Identify the
Identify all components
components on
on the screen of
the screen
MSWORD are identified
and learnt thoroughly
2. Insertion of new Able to Insert new Check whether able to
rows and rows and columns in Insert new rows and
columns in the the existing table columns in the existing
existing table and Able to Change the table
changing the background colour of Check whether able to
background the table Insert new rows and
colour of the table columns as per
requirement
Check whether able to
Change the background
colour of the table
133
3. Merge and Split Able to Merge and split Check whether able to
cells in a Table cells in a Table using Merge and split cells in
right click method a Table using right click
method
4. Change the font Able to Change the Check whether able to

format formatting of font using Change the formatting of
right click menu font using right click
Able to Change the menu
formatting of font using Check whether able to
menu options Change the formatting of
font using menu options
5. Exercise with Able to change Check whether Able to

Headers and Headers and Footers change Headers and
Footers using menu option Footers using menu
Able to change option
Headers and Footers Check whether able to
by clicking top and change Headers and
bottom document Footers by clicking top
and bottom document
6. Create mailing Able to use mail Check whether Able to

letters using mail merge tool of MS-word use mail merge tool of
merge tool of MS- using start mail MS-word in creating letter
word merge option in mail using mail merge option
menu in mail menu
7. Open MS-Excel Able to Open MS-Excel Check whether Able to

and identify the and identify the Open MS-Excel and
components on components on the identify the components
the screen screen on the screen
Check whether all
components are known
on screen
8. Create a Able to Create a Check whether Able to

Worksheet in MS- W orksheet in MS- Create a Worksheet in
Excel and save it Excel MS-Excel
in .xls or .xlsx Able to save it in .xls or Check whether Able to
format .xlsx format save it in .xls or .xlsx
format
9. Insert column and Able to Insert column Check whether able to

row in Excel and row in Excel using Insert column and row in
menu options Excel using menu option
Able to Insert column Check proper addition
and row in Excel by rows and columns in
right clicking rows or given sheet
134
columns appropriately Check whether able to
Insert column and row in
Excel by right clicking
rows or columns
appropriately
10. Creation of new Able to create Verify whether able to

worksheet in the worksheet in the create worksheet in the
existing Excel existing Excel Book file existing Excel Book file
Book file by using Insert by using Insert
worksheet option worksheet option
besides existing
sheets
11. Generate a Chart Able to Generate a Check whether able to

using the data in Chart using the data in Generate a Chart using
Excel-worksheet Excel-worksheet the data in Excel-
worksheet
Verify whether chart
prepared is as per the
data given
12. Automate calcula- Able to Automate Check whether Able to

tions in a work- calculations in a Automate calculations in
sheet using worksheet using fx a worksheet using fx
formula formula formula
Able to use sigma Verify whether Able to
function use sigma function
Able to use function Check whether Able to
library option in formula use function library
menu option in formula menu
13. Sort and filter data Able to Sort data in a Verify whether Able to
in a worksheet worksheet using sort Sort data in a worksheet
option in Data menu using sort option in Data
Able to Sort data in a menu
worksheet using sort Verify whether Able to
option in right click Sort data in a worksheet
Able to filter data in a using sort option in right
worksheet in data click
menu Check whether Able to
Able to filter data in a filter data in a worksheet
worksheet in right click in data menu
Check whether Able to
filter data in a worksheet
in right click
135
14. Insert a new slide Able to Insert a new Check whether Able to
in the existing slide in the existing Insert a new slide in the
powerpoint file powerpoint file using existing powerpoint file
newslide option in using newslide option in
home menu home menu
Able to Insert a new Check whether Able to
slide in the existing Insert a new slide in the
powerpoint file using existing powerpoint file
slide layout option in using slide layout option
home menu in home menu
15. Create a simple Able to create a simple Check Able to create a

Power point Power point simple Power point
presentation for a presentation for a given presentation for a given
small topic and topic topic
saving in .ppt or Able to Save the Check Able to Save the
pptx format presentation in both presentation in both .ppt
.ppt or pptx format or pptx format
16. Insert chart or Able to Insert chart in a Check Able to Insert chart
image in a power point slide using in a power point slide
powerpoint slide Insert menu option Check Able to Insert
Able to Insert image in
image in a power point
a power point slide
slide
using insert menu
option
Able to work with

17. Exercise with Check Able to work with
animation and sound
animation and animation and sound
features in power point
sound features in using custom features in power point
powerpoint animation option in using custom animation
Animations menu option in Animations
Able to work with Media menu
clip options in insert Check Able to work with
menu Media clip options in
insert menu
Able to work with
18. Exercise with Rehearse Timings Check able to work with
R e h e a r s e feature in powerpoint rehearse timings
Timings feature in using slide show features
powerpoint menu rehearse option
19. Exercise in Able to print the Check to print the

printing the powerpoint file in powerpoint file in Slides
powerpoint file in Slides using File menu using File menu Print
(a) Slides (b) Print option option
Handout Able to print the Check to print the
powerpoint file in powerpoint file in
Handout using file Handout using file menu
menu print option print option
136
III SEMESTER
137
III SEMESTER

/Week Semester

cal tion onal Exam
Hours
THEORY
MNG-301 Engineering
Mathematics-III 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-302 Basic Electrical

and Electronics
Engineering 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-303 Methods of working

Coal-I 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-304 Mining Machinery-I 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-305 Mine Surveying-I 5 75 3 20 80 100
MNG-306 Mining Geology-III 4 60 3 20 80 100
PRACTICAL
MNG-307 Electrical and

Electronics Engi-
MNG-308 Communication
skills and life Skills
Lab Practice 4 60 3 40 60 100
MNG-309 Mine Surveying

Lab Practice-I 6 90 3 40 60 100
MNG-310 Mining Geology

Lab Practice 3 45 3 20 30 50
MNG-311 Practical Training

Assessment 3 20 30 50
TOTAL 25 17 630 280 720 1000
138
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS - III
Subject title : Engineering Mathematics-III
S. Major Topic No of Weightage Short Type Essay Type

No Periods of Marks
Unit - I R U App R U App
1. Indefinite Integration 18 32 2 2 0 1 1 0
Unit - II
2. Definite Integration
and its applications 17 31 0 1 1 1/2 1 1
Unit - III
3. Numerical
Integration 05 10 0 0 0 0 0 1
Unit - IV
4. Differential
Equations of first
order 20 37 2 2 0 1/2 1 1
Total 60 110 4 5 1 2 3 3
Marks: 12 15 3 20 30 30

139
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-III
OBJECTIVES
Unit-I
1.0 Use Indefinite Integration to solve engineering problems
1.1 Explain the concept of Indefinite integral as an anti-derivative.
1.2 State the indefinite integral of standard functions and properties
of Integrals  (u + v) dx and ku dx where k is constant and u,
v are functions of x.
1.3 Solve integration problems involving standard functions using
the above rules.
1.4 Evaluate integrals involving simple functions of the following
type by the method of substitution.
i)  f(ax + b) dx where f(x) dx is in standard form.
ii)  [f(x)]n f (x) dx
iii)  f (x)/[f(x)] dx
iv)  f {g(x)} g (x) dx

1.5 Find the Integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x and cosec x using the
above.
1.6 Evaluate the integrals of the form Sinm Cosn . d where m and
n are positive integers.
1.7 Evaluate integrals of powers of tan x and sec x.
1.8 Evaluate the Standard Integrals of the functions of the type
1 1 1
i) , 2 , 2
a  x a  x x  a2
2 2 2
1 1 1
ii) , ,
a2  x2 a2  x2 x2  a2
140
iii) x2  a2 , x2  a2 , a2  x2
1.9 Evaluate the integrals of the type
1 1 1
 a  bSin d ,  a  b cos  d and  a cos   b sin   cd
1.10 Evaluate integrals using decomposition method.
1.11 Evaluate integrals using integration by parts with examples.
1.12 State the Bernoulli's rule for evaluating the integrals of the form
 u.vdx .
1.13 Evaluate the integrals of the form ex [f(x) + f (x)] dx.
Unit-II
2.0 Understand definite integral and use it in engineering
applications
2.1 State the fundamental theorem of integral calculus
2.2 Explain the concept of definite integral.
2.3 Calculate the definite integral over an interval.
2.4 State various properties of definite integrals.
2.5 Evaluate simple problems on definite integrals using the above
properties.
2.6 Explain definite integral as a limit of sum by considering an
area.
2.7 Find the areas under plane curves and area enclosed between
two curves using integration.
2.8 Obtain the volumes of solids of revolution.
2.9 Obtain the mean value and root mean square value of the
functions in any given interval.
Unit -III
3.0 Understand Numerical Methods
3.1 Explain the Trapezoidal rule, Simpson's 1/3 rules for
approximation of integrals and provide some examples.
141
Unit -IV
4.0 Solve Differential Equations in engineering problems.
4.1 Define a Differential equation, its order, degree
4.2 Form a differential equation by eliminating arbitrary constants.
4.3 Solve the first order first degree differential equations by the
following methods:
i. Variables Separable.
ii. Homogeneous Equations.
iii. Exact Differential Equations
iv. Linear differential equation of the form dy/dx + Py = Q,
where P and Q are functions of x or constants.
iv. Bernoulli's Equation (Reducible to linear form.)
4.4 Solve simple problems leading to engineering applications
COURSE CONTENT
Unit-I
Indefinite Integration:
1. Integration regarded as anti-derivative - Indefinite integral of
standard functions. Properties of indefinite integral. Integration by
substitution or change of variable. Integrals of the form sinm. cosn.
where m and n are positive integers. Integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x,
cosec x and powers of tan x, sec x by substitution.
Evaluation of integrals which are reducible to the following forms
1 1 1
i) , 2 , 2
a  x a  x x  a2
2 2 2
1 1 1
ii) , ,
a2  x2 a2  x2 x2  a2
iii) x2  a2 , x2  a2 , a2  x2
142
Integration by decomposition of the integrand into simple
rational, lgebraic functions. Integration by parts , Bernoulli's rule.
Unit-II
Definite Integral and its applications:
2. Definite integral-fundamental theorem of integral calculus,
properties of definite integrals, evaluation of simple definite integrals.
Definite integral as the limit of a sum. Area under plane curves - Area
enclosed between two curves. Volumes of solids of revolution.Mean
and RMS values of a function on a given interval.
Unit-III
Numerical Integration :
3 Trapezoidal rule, Simpson's 1/3 rule to evaluate an approximate
value of a definite integral.
Unit -IV
Differential Equations:
4. Definition of a differential equation-order and degree of a
differential equation- formation of differential equations-solution of
differential equation of first order, first degree: variable-separable,
homogeneous, exact, linear differential equation, Bernoulli's equation.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Integral Calculus Vol.I, by M.Pillai and Shanti Narayan
2. Thomas' Calculus, Pearson Addison -Wesley Publishers.
*****
143
BASIC ELECTRICAL& ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
Subject Title : Basic Electrical& Electronics
Engineering
TIME SCHEDULE
No Periods of Marks Answer Answer
Type Type
1 DC Machines 12 26 2 2
2 A.C. Fundamentals 12 16 2 1
3 Transformer 10 16 2 1
4 Induction Motor
Alternator 10 16 2 1
5 Electrical measuring
instruments 6 10 - 1
6 Introduction to
Electronics 10 26 2 2
Total 60 110 10 8
OBJECTIVES
1.0 Understand DC Machines
1.1 Explain working principle of DC generator
1.2 Constructional features of DC generators
1.3 List out types of generators based on excitation.
1.4 Write the formula for E.M.F. equation of a DC generator.
1.5 State the relation between currents and voltages for different
types of D.C. Generators
1.6 State the losses incurred in the DC. machines
1.7 Simple problems on calculation of EMF of D.C. Generators
1.8 Explain the principle of operation of D.C motor
144
1.9 List the types of DC motors and relation between voltage and
currents
1.10 Explain the significance of back E.M.F and write its formula
1.11 Applications of DC motors
1.12 Explain necessity of starter
1.13 Describe with connection diagram of D.C 3 point starter
1.14 Explain speed control of D.C motors by
a) Field control b) Armature control
1.15 Simple problems on calculation of Back EMF of D.C. Motors
2.0 Comprehend A.C Fundamentals
2.0 Define alternating quantity ,frequency , time period ,amplitude
2.1 Define form factor and peak factor.
2.2 Calculate current, impedance, inductive reactance, capacitive
reactance in a single phase circuits. of pure resistance, pure
inductance ,pure capacitance,
2.3 Calculate impedance, current, active and reactive of power,
Power factor in a single phase RL, RC, RLC Series circuits
3.0 Working of a Transformer
3.1 Describe the constructional details of transformer
3.2 Types of transformers
3.3 State the working principle of transformer
3.4 State the features of transformer on no-load, and on load.
3.5 State the Voltage regulation, losses and efficiency of
transformer.
3.6 State the maintenance aspects of transformer.
4.0 Working of Induction motor & Alternator
4.1 Describe the constructional details of induction motors.
4.2 Explain the principle of operation of induction motor.
4.3 Define Torque, Slip
4.4 Explain the methods of starting of induction motors.
145
4.5 Classify the Three Phase and Single Phase induction motors.
4.6 State the applicability of induction motor.
4.7 Describe constructional details of alternator.
4.8 Explain the principle of operation of alternator
5.0 Understand the electrical measuring instruments
5.1 Explain construction and working of moving coil ammeter and
voltmeter
5.2 Explain construction and working of moving iron ammeter and
voltmeter
5.3 Explain construction and working principle of Dynamometer
type wattmeter
5.4 Explain construction and working principle of A.C single phase
induction type energy meter
6.0 Introduction to Electronics
6.1 State the electrical properties of solid Semiconductor materials.
6.2 Sketch the energy level diagrams for conductors,
Semiconductors, Insulators.
6.3 istinguish between Intrinsic and extrinsic Semiconductors.
6.4 Describe the formation of P- type and N-type materials and
sketch the energy band diagrams.
6.5 Identify Majority and Minority carriers in P and N Type materials.
6.6 Explain the formation of PN junction diode.
6.7 Describe the working of PN junction Diode with various biasing
voltages.
6.8 Sketch the forward/Reverse Bias Voltage characteristics of
diode.
6.9 List the applications of Diodes.
6.10 Describe the formation and working of Zener diode.
6.11 Sketch the characteristics of Zener breakdown and Avalanche
breakdown.
6.12 Explain the working and applications of LED
146
6.13 Know the formation of transistor.
6.14 Draw the symbols and explain the working of PNP and NPN
Transistors.
6.15 Know the different transistor configurations and its applications.
COURSE CONTENTS
1) D.C Machines: Principle of operation of D.C generators-
functions of each part of generator-types of generators-E.M.F
equation-relation between voltage and Currents-losses-simple
problems D.C motors-principle of operation of D.C motor-types
of D.C motors-back EMF-relation Between voltages and
currents-applications-necessity of starters-3-point starter-
speed Control of D.C motors by field and armature control
2) A.C Fundamentals: Definitions of alternating Quantity,
frequency, time period, amplitude. peak factor, form factor and
power factor - A.C quantity-Resistance, inductive reactance,
Capacitive reactance, current in pure R,L,& C circuits.
Impedance, Current, Power Factor, Power and Reactive power
in RL , RC and RLC series, currents
3) Transformer: Construction and types - working principle of
transformer - No load and load operations - losses and
efficiency-Voltage regulation - Maintenance of Transformers.
4) Induction motor and Alternator : Induction Motors,
Classification - constructional details Principles of operation -
Torque, slip -starters, Types of three phase ,Single phase
motors- Applications with respect to Mining Industry-
Constructional details of alternators and Principle of Operation
Alternator.
5) Electrical Measuring Instruments: Construction and working
principle of moving coil permanent magnet type ammeter and
voltmeter and moving iron ammeter and voltmeter, construction
and working principle of Dynamometer type wattmeter and A.C
single phase induction type energy meter.
6) Introduction to Electronics: Electrical properties of
semiconductor materials, energy level diagrams of conductor,
semi conductor and Insulator. Formation of P-Type and N-Type
147
materials and their properties. Formation and behaviour of PN
junction diode. Zener diode and applications. LED and
applications. Transistor and its configurations, applications.
Essential Text Books:

1. Electrical Technology : B.L.TherajaVol 1& 2.
2. Electrical technology : by V.K. Mehta.
3. Electrical and Electronic : J.B.Guptha
Measuring Instruments
4. Principles of Electronics V.K.Mehtha
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Advanced Electrical Technology by H. Cotton
2. Electrical Technology by Huges
3. Electrical Engineering by M.S.Naidu& S.Kamakshiah
4. Non-conventional energy guidelines by NEDCAP
5. Solar energy utilisation by G.D.Rai
6. Electrical Power Systems by Soni,Guptha,Bhatnagar
7. Electrical power plants by J B Guptha.
8. Electrical Machines : J.B.Guptha
9. Electrical Machinery : Dr.P.S.Bimbhra
*****
148
METHODS OF WORKING COAL -I
Subject Title : Methods of Working Coal -I
TIME SCHEDULE
Type Type
1 Bord & Pillar Method -

Development, 15 26 2 2
2 Bord & Pillar Method -
depillaring 12 29 3 2
3 Longwall advancing- 12 26 2 2
4 Longwall- retreating 10 16 2 1
5 Thin seam Mining 11 13 1 1
Total 60 110 10 08
OBJECTIVES
1.0 Understand Development stage in Bord & Pillar methods
of working
1.1 Define the term Bord and Pillar
1.2 State the applicability, merits, demerits and limitations of Bord
and Pillar
1.3 Explain the development stages of Bord & Pillar Method.
1.4 Explain the terms panel indicating the types and applicability
1.5 List the general considerations for layout of panel.
1.6 List the factors influencing the size of the panel.
1.7 List the factors influencing the number openings to a panel.
1.8 State the merits and demerits of panel system
149
1.9 List the different factors governing the selection of development
method
1.10 Explain the factors to be considered while opening out a district/
panel
1.11 Explain the method of development of panel with three headings
1.12 Explain the method of development along the dip.
1.13 Explain the method of development along the strike
1.14 Explain the method of development by the help of cross cuts in
steeply dipping seams.
1.15 Explain the method of development in Bord and Pillar system
with side discharge loaders, belt conveyor and Chain conveyer.
1.16 Explain the method of development in Bord and Pillar system
with load haul dumper, belt conveyor and Chain conveyor
systems.
2.0 Understand Depillaring stage in Bord and pillar methods
of working
2.1 Classifies the methods of depillaring
2.2 Explain the depillaring stages of Bord & Pillar mining
2.3 Define the terms caving and stowing.
2.4 State the conditions under which caving method as adopted.
2.5 List the preparatory arrangements during planning for depillaring
operation.
2.6 List the preparatory arrangements immediately before the
commencement of depillaring.
2.7 Explain the sequence of operations involved in depillaring
2.8 Define the terms split, rib, Chowkidar pillar, Goaf edge line of
extraction, Diagonal Line, Stepped Diagonal Line, Knife Edge-
formation, and straight line of extraction.
2.9 Explain the method of extraction of pillar by caving under Weak
roof conditions.
2.10 State the mechanisation methods for pillar extraction.
150
2.11 Explain the design of mechanised pillar extraction by LHD, SDL
scraper chain/belt conveyor systems.
2.12 Define the terms Local Falls and Main Fall.
2.13 List the methods of inducing Local Falls
2.14 Explain the term Air Blast
2.15 List the dangers due to air Blast.
2.16 List the precautions against the Air Blast.
2.17 Explain stowing method
2.18 State the condition under which stowing method is adopted
2.19 Explain the preparatory arrangements for depillaring by
stowing.
2.20 List the precautions against the dangers of water while working
below goaved areas.
2.21 List the precautions against the dangers the points to be borne
in mind while working below goaved areas.
2.22 Describe the method of extraction of contiguous seams.
2.23 List the precautions taken against fire during and after
depillaring.
3.0 Knows the Longwall advancing method
3.1 Define the terms long wall Mining ,Gate roads, Main gate, tail
gate,stable, pack wall.
3.2 State the applicability, merits, demerits and limitations of long
wall method Classifies the methods of long wall mining
3.3 Explain the long wall advancing indicating its applicabilities
3.4 State comparison between Long wall advancing and Long wall
retreating.
3.5 Explain the development of gate roads.
3.6 List the machinery employed on a mechanised Long wall face
3.7 Explain the continuous mining method
3.8 List the different factors governing the length of Long wall face.
151
3.9 Explain the development of gate roads by Cut and load -by
Road header/Dint header
3.10 Explain the development of gate roads by Cut and load- by
continuous miner
3.11 Explain the layouts of mechanised long wall face advancing
with caving.
3.12 Explain the layout of mechanised long wall face advancing with
stowing.
4.0 Knows the Long wall retreating method
4.1 Define the terms long wall retreating and its applicability's
4.2 Explain the layout of mechanised long wall face retreating with
stowing.
4.3 Explain the layout of mechanised long wall face retreating with
caving.
4.4 Explain the layout of long wall face equipped with shearer.
4.5 Distinguishes between single unit and double unit layouts
4.6 List the cutting methods of the Shearer in longwall mining
4.7 Explain the methods of sumping in long wall face extraction.
4.8 Explain the method of push- sumping in longwall face extraction
4.9 List applicabilities, mertis, demerits of Longwall Top Coal Caving
(LTCC).
4.10 Explain Longwall Top Coal Caving (LTCC) method
5.0 Knows the Thin seam Mining
5.1 List the applicable conditions of coal ploughing
5.2 List the merits and demerits of coal ploughing
5.3 List the limitations of coal ploughing
5.4 Briefly describe different coal ploughs
5.5 Define the term over passing
5.6 Explain the method of working by plough
5.7 Explain the method of unidirectional, over passing ploughing
152
5.8 Explain the method of bidirectional, over passing ploughing
5.9 List the explain the cutting operations of unidirectional and
bidirectional ploughing.
COURSE CONTENTS
1.0 Bord and pillar method - Development
Bord & pillar system - Applicabilities - Merits - Demerits -
Different terms - stages of development - depillaring stages -
Applicability of panel system - types of panels - factors
influencing the size of panel system - general considerations -
factors influencing the No. of openings of panel - merits and
demerits of panel system - factors governing the selection of
development method - factors governed while opening of a
district - Panel development with three headings and - Different
methods of development systems along dip, along strike,
crosscuts, steeply dipping seams, loaders, belt conveyer load
haul dumpers, belt conveyers chain conveyors. Road headers
- arrangements for ventilation.
2.0 Bord and Pillar method- Depillaring
Important terms - classification - planning preparation
arrangements - sequence of operations - Pillar extraction under
weak roof condition - mechanised method of Pillar extraction
by LHDS, SDL, scraper chain, conveyor systems - size, shape
of pillars, ribs - local fall main fall - air blast, dangers, precautions
- method of stowing conditions required for adopting stowing -
preparation arrangement for stowing - lay out of panel with
stowing - danger and precautions while working below goaved
areas - contiguous seams extraction - precautions against fire
during and after depillaring.
3.0 Long Wall Advancing Method
Long wall - Related Terms -Applicabilities,merits, demerits,
limitations, classification long wall advancing indicating its
applicabilities- comparison between Long wall advancing and
Long wall retreating- development of gate roads- machinery
employed on a mechanised Long wall face- continuous mining
method- different factors governing the length of Long wall face-
153
lay outs of mechanised long wall face advancing with caving-
layout of mechanised long wall face advancing with stowing.
4.0 Long Wall Retreating Method
Long wall retreating and its applicabilities- layout of mechanised
long wall face retreating with stowing- layout of mechanised
long wall face retreating with caving- lay out of long wall face
equipped with shearer- single unit and double unit layouts-
cutting methods of the Shearer in longwall mining- methods of
sumping in long wall face extraction- method of push- sumping
in longwall face extraction.
5.0 Thin seam Mining
Applicable condition of a plough, method of working by plough,
unidirectional ploughing method, bi-directional ploughing
method, over passing ,different types of coal ploughs, cutting
operations of ploughing
TEXT BOOKS:
2 T.N. Singh, Underground winning of coal. Pub: Oxford & IBH,
New-Delhi
3 Singh & Dhar, Thick Seam Mining, Pub: : Oxford & IBH, New-
Delhi
4 Samir Kumar Das, Modern coal mining. Geeta book store,
Dhanbad
5 Prof. J. G. Singh; "Underground Coal Mining Method"Braj-Kalp
Publisher, Varansi
6 William A. Hustrulid, Rechard Bullock; "UndergroundMining
Methods" SME Publication
7 MSHA; "Underground Coal Mine Blasting" ISEE Publication
Cleveland, Ohio
154
REFERENCES BOOKS:
1. Mathur, S.P., Coal Mining in India, M.S. Enterprises, Bilaspur,
1999
2. Das S.K., Modern Coal Mining technology, Lovely Prakashan,
Dhanbad 1994.
3. Singh T.N., Dhar, B.B. Thick Seam Mining, Problems and
Issues, Oxford & IBH Publishers, 1992.
4. Mathur, S.P., Mining Planning for Coal., M.G. Consultants,
Bilaspur, 1993.
5. Peng S.S., and Chiang, H.S., Longwall Mining, John Willey and
Sons, New York, 1992.
6. Szwilski and Richards M.J., Underground Mining Methods and
Technology, 1987.
Internet: www.miningindia.com
******
155
MINING MACHINERY - I
Subject Title : Mining Machinery - I
TIME SCHEDULE
Type Type
1 Wire ropes 10 16 2 1
2 Rope Capping 10 13 1 1
3 Transportation in Mines
-Rope Haulages 15 26 2 2
4 Transportation in Mines -
Conveyors , Locomotives
and aerial rope ways 15 29 3 2
5 Mine Pumps 10 26 2 2
Total 60 110 10 08
OBJECTIVES
After the completion of these topics the student should be able
to
1.0 Understand the manufacture of mine ropes used in mines
1.1 State the uses of wire ropes in mines
1.2 Classifies wire ropes based on place of application and
construction.
1.3 State the composition of material of wire ropes.
1.4 List the field tests to be conducted on wire rope.
1.5 List stages of manufacturing of wires of ropes
1.6 Explain the stages of manufacturing of wires of ropes
1.7 Describe the constructional details of different types of ropes
156
1.8 Explain space factor, factor of safety, capacity factor, bending
factor
1.9 State the applicability of different types of wire ropes in Mining.
1.10 List the causes of deterioration of wire ropes
1.11 List the preventive measures against deterioration of ropes
1.12 State the formulate for finding the size, weight and strength of
wire ropes
1.13 Solves numerical problems related to the above formulae.
2.0 Know Rope Capping
2.1 Define the terms capping and recapping
2.2 List the different methods of capping the wire ropes
2.3 State the applicability of different recapping.
2.4 Describe the method of white metal capping
2.5 Describe the method of interlocking wedge capping
2.6 State the purpose of splicing of wire ropes
2.7 Describe the methods of splicing of wire ropes.
3.0 Understand methods of rope haulage in underground
mines
3.1 State the purpose of transportation in mines
3.2 Give comprehensive classification of transportation systems
in mines
3.3 Explain different methods of transportation by rope haulage in
underground and open cast mines
3.4 List the types of rope haulage
3.5 State the applicability of each type of rope haulage
3.6 Describe the direct rope haulage system
3.7 List advantages and disadvantages of Direct rope haulage.
3.8 List various safety devices required in direct rope haulage
3.9 Describe the endless rope haulage system .
3.10 List advantage and disadvantage of endless rope haulage
157
3.11 Describe rope clips commonly used for under rope haulage
and over rope haulage
3.12 State the necessity of tensioning arrangements
3.13 Describe tensioning arrangement for endless rope haulage
3.14 Describe the main and tail rope haulage system including safety
devices used
3.15 List the advantages and disadvantages of main and tail rope
haulage
3.16 List the factors influencing the size of the rope haulage engine,
H.P.
3.17 List the factors governing the selection of system of rope
haulage.
3.18 Simple problems in calculation of drawbar pull, number of tubs
required for a given output and calculation of H.P of motor.
4.0 Understand transportation in mines by conveyors,
Locomotives & Aerial ropeways
4.1 Give the comprehensive classification of conveyors based on
their applicability
4.2 Explain the component parts of belt conveyors
4.3 List the safety devices on belt conveyors
4.4 State limitations of belt conveyor system
4.5 State the Merits of Belt Conveyor
4.6 State the Demerits of Belt Conveyors
4.7 Explain scraper chain conveyor system
4.8 State the merits, demerits of scraper chain conveyor
4.9 Simple problems to calculate the size of belt conveyor
4.10 Classifies Locomotive haulage systems
4.11 State merits, demerits, applicability and limitations of diesel
locomotives system
4.12 Explain exhaust conditioner and flame trap fitted to diesel
locomotive
158
4.13 State merits, demerits, applicability and limitations of battery
locomotives system
4.14 Simple numerical problems in calculation of tractive effort of
locomotive
4.15 Classify aerial rope ways
4.16 List the applicability of mono cable aerial rope
4.17 State the applicability of BI-Cable aerial rope ways.
4.18 Describe the construction and working of Mono-cable aerial
rope way.
4.19 State the purpose of track and traction rope in Bi-cable aerial
rope way.
4.20 Solve numerical problems on calculation of
a) Number. of carriers b) carrier capacity c) length of haul
5.0 Understand various Pumps used in Mines
5.1 Define various terms with regards to pumps.
5.2 Give the comprehensive classification of mine pumps with their
applicability
5.3 Explain the principle of working of reciprocating pump
5.4 Describe the methods of starting and stopping of reciprocating
pump
5.5 State the purpose of air vessel
5.6 Define the terms a) Water hammer b) End thrust
5.7 Explain the constructional details and fittings of centrifugal
pumps
5.8 Describe the working of centrifugal pumps
5.9 Describe the methods of starting and stopping of centrifugal
pump
5.10 Explain the constructional details of turbine pump
5.11 Explain the working principles of turbine pump
5.12 Describe the method of balancing end thrust - hydraulic balance
disc
159
5.13 Explain the constructional details/fittings of submersible pump
5.14 List out the considerations for the selection of pumps.
5.15 List differences between reciprocating pump and centrifugal
pump
5.16 Simple numerical problems on calculation of head, capacity
and H.P of mine pumps
COURSE CONTENTS
1.0 Wire Ropes
Usage, chemical composition, infield tests of wire, classification
of wire ropes, applicability of different ropes - causes of
deterioration, precautions, selection parameters - computation
of numerical problems on size - Weight and strength of wire
ropes
2.0 Rope Capping
Capping and recapping of wire ropes, classification - description
of capping methods - splicing methods, description of splicing
3.0 Transportation in Mines -Rope Haulages
Purpose of transportation, comprehensive classification of
transportation - rope haulage - direct Rope Haulage System,
merits, demerits and applications - safety Devices in Direct
Rope Haulage system-Endless Rope Haulage System, merits,
demerits and applicability's safety devices-Rope clips,
tensioning arrangements in endless haulage-Main and tail
haulage system-factors of selection for rope haulage -
computation problems for determination of H.P., Tub capacity,
number of tubs..
4.0 Transportation in Mines -Conveyors , Locomotives & Areal
Rope ways
Conveyor usage, classification - belt conveyor system, different
types of belt constructions, safety devices merits, demerits
and limitations of conveying system - Scraper chain convey
or system, protective devices-merits, demerits and limitation,
computation of numerical problems on size of the conveyor
for a given output and computation of motor HP.
160
Classify locomotive haulage systems, merits, demerits,
applicability of different system - classify aerial rope ways, the
applicable conditions of aerial ropeways- Computation of
numerical problems on no .of carriers and length of haul.
5.0 Mine Pumps
Pumping - Various terms of pumping, classification of pumps -
centrifugal pump fittings - Turbine pump, fittings - End thrust -
submersible pump - fittings merits limitation - Selection of
pumps - computation of numerical problems on Head, Quantity,
H.P of mine pumps.
TEXT BOOKS:
1.0 Elements of Mining Technology, Vol-III D.J Deshmukh,
2.0 Mine pumps :Rakesh & Lee
3.0 Mine Pumps :S.Ghattak
4.0 Introduction to Mining Engineering :Hartman
5.0 Winding and Transportation :S.C.Walker
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Dr. G.B. Mishra, Surface Mining Pub:GeoMinetech Publisher,
Bhubneshwar
2 Amitosh Dey, Heavy Earth Moving Machinery. Available at Geeta
book store, Dhanbad
3 M.A. Ramlu, Mine Hoisting. Pub: Oxford & IBH Publishing Co.
Pvt.Ltd. New Delhi
4 Karelin, Mine Transport. Pub:- Orient Longmans Ltd.New Delhi
5 M. A. Ramlu; "Mine Hoisting" Oxford & IBH Publishing Co. Pvt.
Ltd. New Delhi
6 C. P. Chug; "High Technology in Drilling and Exploration"
Oxford & IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
7 Cummins & Givens; "SME Mining Engineering Handbook,Vol. I
& II" A.I.M.M.New-York
8 R..D. Singh, Principles & Practices of Modern Coal Mining Pub:-
*****
161
MINE SURVEYING - I
Subject Title : Mine Surveying - I
Periods per semester : 75
TIME SCHEDULE
Type Type
1 Introduction 08 13 1 1
2 Linear Measurements 15 19 3 1
3 Compass Surveying 10 13 1 1
4 Levelling 19 26 2 2
5 Contouring and
Subsidence 08 16 2 1
6 Theodolite Surveying
part-I 15 23 1 2
Total 75 110 10 08
OBJECTIVES
to
1.0 Know the preliminaries of Surveying
1.1 Define the term Surveying.
1.2 List the objectives of surveying.
1.3 State the principles of surveying.
1.4 List the primary divisions of surveying.
1.5 Give the broad classification of surveying.
1.6 Define the term (a) Plan (b) Map (c) Scale of a Plan
1.7 List the Plans and Sections required for Mining
1.8 Explain the maintenance of Plans and Sections as per CMR
162
2.0 Know the Linear Measurements
2.1 Classify the methods of measuring distances.
2.2 List the instruments for direct measurement of distances.
2.3 Describe the constructional details of chain and tape.
2.4 Define the term ranging.
2.5 Classify the ranging methods.
2.6 Describe the method of direct ranging.
2.7 Describe the method of indirect ranging.
2.8 Define the term Offset
2.9 List the types of Offsets and applicability of each.
2.10 Name the instruments for setting offsets.
2.11 Explain the method of measuring distances on level ground.
2.12 Explain the method of measuring distance on sloping ground
(Stepping method).
2.13 State the purpose of chain surveying.
2.14 State the principle of chain surveying.
2.15 List the steps in chain surveying.
2.16 Define the term Reconnaissance.
2.17 Explain the term Reference sketch.
2.18 State the term well-conditioned triangle
2.19 List the types of survey stations.
2.20 In Chain triangulation define the terms (a) Base line (b) Check
line(c) Tie line
2.21 List the factors governing the selection of station.
2.22 Describe the chain triangulation to find the area of a field
2.23 Calculate the area of an irregular figure by Simpson's rule
2.24 List the sources of errors in measuring distances.
2.25 List the reasons for incorrect length of chain.
2.26 State the corrections to be applied to the measured length for
obtaining true length.
163
2.27 Solve the problems to obtain true length, true areaand true
volumes.
2.28 List the common mistakes in surveying.
2.29 State the permissible limits of error in measurement of distances
with chain and tape.
3.0 Know the Compass Surveying
3.1 State the uses of compass.
3.2 List the types of compasses.
3.3 State the parts of Prismatic compass with sketch.
3.4 Define the terms (a) TrueMeridian (b) Magnetic Meridian (c)
Arbitrary meridian
3.5 State the termbearing
3.6 Classify the types of bearings (Whole circle bearing,Quadrantal
bearing, Fore bearing, Back bearing).
3.7 Explain the method of measuring the magnetic bearing of line,
with prismatic compass.
3.8 Describe the traversing with compass and chain.
3.9 Convert the whole circle bearings to quadrantal bearing and
vice versa.
3.10 Explain the terms (a) included angle (b) interior angle (c) exterior
angle.
3.11 Define the terms (a) Traverse (b) Closed traverse (c) 'Open
Traverse
3.12 Compute the included angles from the bearings of the lines.
3.13 Define the term local attraction.
3.14 List the reasons for local attraction.
3.15 Solve the simple problems on local attraction.
3.16 Define the terms (a) Magnetic Declination (b) Dip.
3.17 Solve the problems on Magnetic Declination.
3.18 State the permissible limit of the error in (Prismatic) Compass
survey.
164
4.0 Understand the Levelling
4.1 Define the term Levelling.
4.2 List the objectives of Levelling.
4.3 Explain the principle of levelling.
4.4 Define of terms (a) level surface (b) level line (c) horizontal
plane (d) Horizontal line (e) Vertical plane ( f) Vertical line (g)
Datum surfaceor datum line (h) elevation (i) bench mark (j)
Line of collimation (k) Axis of telescope (l) Axis of bubble tube
(m) Vertical axis (n) Back sight (o) Foresight (p) intermediate
sight (q)change point (r) Station (s) Height of instrument (t)
Reduce level.
4.5 List different types of levelling instruments.
4.6 Describe the Dumpy level.
4.7 List the temporary adjustments of dumpy level.
4.8 List the fundamental lines of dumpy level.
4.9 State the relations between the fundamental lines of dumpy
level.
4.10 List the types of levelling staves.
4.11 List the methods of Levelling
4.12 Explain the terms (a)Simple levelling (b) Compound levelling.
4.13 Explain the methods of reducing Levels from the observed staff
readings.
4.14 Calculate the reduced levels by Rise and Fall methods.
4.15 Calculates the reduced levels by Height of Instruments.
4.16 Describe the profile levelling method.
4.17 State the applicability of profile levelling.
4.18 Explain the effects of (a) Curvature (b) Refraction in levelling.
4.19 State the correction for (a) curvature (b) Refraction (c)combined
effect of both of them in Levelling
4.20 Describe the method of Reciprocal levelling.
4.21 State its applicability and merits of Reciprocal levelling
165
4.22 Solve related problems on reciprocal levelling.
4.23 State the permissible limits of error in (a) Ordinary levelling (b)
Rough levelling (c) Precise levelling (d) Underground levelling
in establishing bench marks of important nature.
5.0 Contouring and Subsidence
5.1 State the purpose of subsidence levelling.
5.2 State the purpose of highest flood level.
5.3 Define the terms (a) contour (b) contour interval (c) Horizontal
equivalent of contour (d) stratum contours (e) Isopachyte (f)
Grade contour.
5.4 List the methods of contouring.
5.5 Describe the direct method of contouring.
5.6 Describe the square method of contouring.
5.7 List the uses of contour for mining engineer.
5.8 List the Characteristics of contours.
6.0 Understand theodolite survey.
6.1 Describe transit Vernier theodolite.
6.2 List the uses of theodolite
6.3 List the fundamental lines of a transit theodolite
6.4 List the relations between the fundamental lines.
6.5 List the permanent adjustments of a transit theodolite.
6.6 Define the terms(a) transiting (b) Swinging (c) Face left (d)
Face right (e) changing face (f) Index error as used in theodolite,
6.7 List the methods of measuring horizontal angle.
6.8 Describe the Repetition method of measurement of horizontal
angle.
6.9 Describe the Reiteration method of measurement of Horizontal
angle.
6.10 State the applicabilities of Repetition and Reiteration methods
6.11 Describe the method of measuring Vertical angle.
166
6.12 Describe the method of measuring the Magnetic Bearing of
line with theodolite
6.13 List the method of traversing with theodolite
6.14 Describe the continuous Azimuth method of traverse.
6.15 Describe the double foresight method of traverse
6.16 State the checks on the accuracy of angular measurements in
closed figures
6.17 Explain the term 'Permissible error of Closure'
6.18 State the permissible error of closure for (a) Surface traverse
(b) Underground traverse
COURSE CONTENTS
1.0 Introduction: - Definition - Objectives - Classification - Principle
-Primary Divisions of Surveying-Plan - Map - Scale of a Plan -
Plans and Sections for Mining - maintenance of Plans and
Sections as per CMR
2.0 Linear Measurements:-Classification - Instruments -
Constructional details -- Ranging - Direct - Indirect -Offsets-
Measuring Distances on level Ground - Sloping Ground -
Purpose - Principle - Steps - Reconnaissance - Reference
sketch-Survey stations- Baseline - Tie line- Chain triangulation-
Finding the area by Simpson's rule -Reasons for incorrect
length of Chain - Sources of Errors - Corrections - Problems -
Mistakes - Permissible Limits.
3.0 Compass Surveying:- Uses - Types - Purpose of parts -
Terms - Turemeridian - Magnetic Meridian - Arbitrary Meridian -
Bearing Whole Circle - Quadrantal - F. B - B. B - Methods of
Measuring Bearings- conversion W.C.B to Q.B, Q.B to W.C.B,
Computes Included Angle - Local Attraction - Reasons - solves
Problems on Local Attraction - Magnetic Declination & Dip -
Open & Closed Traverse - Traversing with Compass and chain
- Permissible errors.
4.0 Levelling:- Definitions - Type of Instruments - Adjustments -
Fundamental Lines - Relations - Principles of levelling -
167
Methods - Curvature and Refraction Reciprocal Levelling -
Merits - Applicability - Problems - Permissible Errors
5.0 Contouring and Subsidence: Purpose of Subsidence
Levelling - Purpose of H.F.L - contour - contour interval -
Horizontal equivalent of contour - stratum contours - Isopachyte
- Grade contour - Method of contouring - Direct - Square-Uses
- Characteristics
6.0 Theodolite: Description of Vernier Theodolite - fundamental
lines relation between fundamental lines - Temporary and
permanent adjustments - Definition of Various terms -
Measurement of horizontal angles - repetition, reiteration
methods measurement of vertical angle- magnetic bearing of
lines.Traversing - continuous Azimuth, double fore sight
methods - computation of bearings of traverses check of
accuracy in angular measurements - permissible error for
surface and underground
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ghatak., Mining Surveying, Lovely Prakashan,Dhanbad,1990.
2. Punmia, B.C., Surveying Vol I and II, Laxmi Publication, New
Delhi, 1991
3. Kenetkar, T.P., Surveying and Levelling, Vol I and Vol II, United
Book Corporation, Poona, 1991.
REFERENCES BOOKS
1. Mason,E., Coal Mining Series, Surveying ,Vol I And Vol II, Virtue
And Company Limited, London.
2. Clark, D., Plane And Geodetic Surveying,Vol I And Vol II, CBS
Publishing Co., 1986.
3. Assur,V.L.And Pilatov,A.M., Pratical Guide To Surveying MIR
Publishers, Moscow 1988.
4. Borshch,V., Komponiets,A., Navitny, G.And Knysh., Mine
Surveying MIR Publishers Moscow,1989.
5. Sahni, Advanced Surveying, Lovely Prakashan, Dhanbad, 1992.
6. Alam Chand., Modern Concept Of Mine Survey, Lovely
Prakashan, Dhanbad,1992.
7. Surveying by arora Vol 1,2,3.
*****
168
MINING GEOLOGY-III
Subject Title : Mining Geology-III
Periods / Week : 04
TIME SCHEDULE
1 Stratigraphy 15 26 2 2
2 Economic Geology 15 29 3 2
3 Prospecting Techniques 15 29 3 2
4 Coal and Petroleum
Geology 10 13 1 1
5 Modern Concepts in
Geology 05 13 1 1
Total: 60 110 10 08
OBJECTIVES
1.0 Understand Basic concepts of Stratigraphy
1.1 Define Stratigraphy
1.2 State the objectives of Stratigraphy
1.3 Explain Geological Time Scale
1.4 State the Physiographic Divisions of India.
1.5 Describe each of the following systems with their distribution
and economic importance Archeans - Cuddapah - Vindhyan -
Gondwana- Pakhal systems
1.6 Explain the stratigraphy Telangana State
2.0 Understand the Basic concepts of Economic Geology
2.1 Define Economic Geology
169
2.2 Define the terms Ore- Gangue - Tenor, Associated Minerals
2.3 Define the terms: Resource - Reserves
2.4 Define the terms. Proved, Probable, Possible reserves
2.5 List and explain the following processes of mineralization with
examples
1) Magmatic Concentration method 2) Metasomatism 3)
Metamorphism 4) Hydrothermal process 5) Residual and
Mechanical concentration 6) Oxidation and supergene sulphide
enrichment 7) Sedimentation 8) Sublimation 9) Evaporation
3.0 Know about Prospecting Techniques
3.1 State the objectives of Geological prospecting
3.2 List the equipment required for prospecting
3.3 List the Guides for location of mineral Deposits in the Field
3.4 Explain the following geophysical methods of Prospecting while
limiting to applicability of each of them.
i. Electrical a) Self Potential method b) Equi-Potential method
c)Electromagnetic method d) Resistivity method
ii.Gravity method
iii. Seismic method a) Seismic reflection method b) Seismic
refraction method
iv. Radiometric
4.0 Know about the Coal and Petroleum Geology
4.1 State the Periods of coal Formation
4.2 Mention the different Stages of Coal formation
4.3 Explain the Origin of Coal Seams
4.4 Explain the In situ Theory of coal seams formation
4.5 Explain the Drift Theory of coal seams formation
4.6 Describe the Structural Features of Coal Seams
4.7 Give the Classification of Coal based on formation
4.8 Describe the coalfields of India
170
4.9 Know the importance of Petroleum as a Fuel
4.10 State the Origin of Petroleum
4.11 State the Migration and Accumulation of Petroleum
4.12 State the distribution of Oil fields in India.
5.0 Know about the Modern Concepts in Geology
5.1 Explain the theory of Continental Drift
5.2 Explain the theory of Plate Tectonics
5.3 State the applications of Remote sensing applicable to Mining
industry
5.4 List the Applications of Geographical Information System in
Mining
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Stratigraphy: Definition -objectives of stratigraphy - Geological
time scale - Physiographic divisions of India - Major
Stratigraphical divisions of India - Arechean- Cuddapah -
Vindhyan - Gondwana - Pakhal systems - Stratigraphy of
Telangana state
2. Economic Geology: Definition of terms - ore - gauge, tenor,
associated mineral, resources, proved - probable, possible
reserves - different process of Mineralisation - important
Economic minerals.
3. Prospecting Techniques: Objectives - Guides for location of
mineral deposits -Geophysical methods-Electrical, Gravity,
Seismic, and Radiometric.
4. Coal and Petroleum Geology: State the Periods of coal
Formation, Mention the different Stages of Coal formation,
Explain the Origin of Coal Seams, Explain the In situ Theory
and Drift Theory. Describe the Structural Features of Coal
Seams. Give the Classification of Coal. Describe the coalfields
of India. Importance of Petroleum as Fuel. State the Origin of
Petroleum. State the Migration and Accumulation of Petroleum.
State the distribution of Oil fields in India.
171
5. Modern Concepts in Geology: Theories of Continental drift-
Plate tectonics- Remote Sensing and GIS applications in Mining
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Parbin Singh. Geology for Engineers, IBH Publications, N. Delhi.
1991.
2. Arthur Holemess, Principles of Physical Geology, Thomas
Nelson and Sons, USA, 1964.
3. Ford, W.E. Dana's Textbook of Minerology (4th edition), Wiley
Eastern Ltd., N. Delhi, 1989.
4. Winter, J.D. An Introduction to Igneous and Metamorphic
Petrology, Prentice Hall, N. Delhi, 2001.
5. Billings, M.P. Structural Geology, Prentice Hall Ino., N. Jersey,
USA, 1972.
6. Krishnan M.S. Geology of India and Burma, 3rd Edition, IBH
Publishers, N. Delhi, 1984.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Blyth F.G.H. and de Freitas M.H. Geology for Engineers, 7th
edition, Elsevier Publications, 2006.
2. Bell F.G. Engineering Geology, Elsevier Publications, 2007
3. Text book of Geology : PK MUKARJEE
4. Economic Geology : Batmen.
5. Coal Geology : RS Sharma
6. Principles of engg. Geology : KM Bangar
*****
172
ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING LAB
PRACTICE
Subject Title : Electrical and Electronics
Engineering Lab Practice
Periods / Week : 03
TIME SCHEDULE
S.No. Major Topics No. of
Periods
1 Electrical Measuring Instruments 12
2 D.C Motors 16
3 Single phase Transformer 08
4 Load test on three phase squirrel cage
induction motor 04
5 Load test on single phase Induction motor 04
6 PN Junction Diode, Zener Diode& LED
characteristics 12
7 Transistor Characteristics 04
TOTAL 60
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1.0 Electrical measuring instruments
1.1 Understand the electrical circuit diagram and get familiarised
with the use of electrical instruments and equipment
1.2 Identifies the electrical measuring instruments (Ammeter,
Voltmeter, Wattmeter , Energy meter)
1.3 Calibrate the given dynamometer type wattmeter
1.4 Calibrate the given A.C single phase energy meter
173
2.0 D.C Motors
2.1 Identify the DC motors terminals
2.2 Vary the speed of D.C shunt motor by field control method
2.3 Vary the speed of D,C shunt motor by armature control method
2.4 Obtain performance characteristics by conducting Load test
on D.C shunt motor
3.0 Transformer
3.1 Conduct open circuit and short circuit tests on transformer
3.2 Obtain the efficiency of a transformer+
4 .0 Three phase induction motor
4.1 Conduct load test on three phase squirrel cageinduction motor
5.0 Single-phase Induction motor.
5.1 Conduct load test on single phase capacitor type induction
motor
6.0 PN Junction Diode &Zener Diode
6.1 Characteristics of PN junction Diode.
6.2 Characteristics of Zener Diode.
6.3 Characteristics of LED.
7.0 Transistors
7.1 Characteristics of Transistor.
174
KEY Competencies to be achieved by the student
S.No. Experiment Title Key Competency
1 Electrical measuring Understand the electrical circuit
instruments diagram and get
familiarised with the use of
electrical instruments
and equipment
Study of electrical measuring
instruments (Ammeter,
Voltmeter, Wattmeter,
Energy meter)
Calibrate the given
dynamometer type wattmeter
Calibrate the given A.C single
phase energy meter
2 D.C Motors Identify the DC motors
terminals
Vary the speed of D.C shunt
motor by field control method
Vary the speed of D,C shunt
motor by armature control
method
Obtain performance
characteristics by conducting
Load test on D.C shunt motor
3 Transformer Conduct open circuit and short
circuit tests on transformer
Obtain the efficiency of a
transformer
4 Three phase induction Conduct load test on three
motor phase squirrel cage induction
motor
5 Single-phase Induction Conduct load test on single
motor. phase capacitor type induction
motor
6 PN Junction Diode, Characteristics of PN junction
Zener Diode & LED Diode.
characteristics Characteristics of Zener Diode.
Characteristics of LED.
7 Transistors Characteristics of Transistor
175
COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS LAB
PRACTICE
(Common to all the branches)
Subject Title : Communication Skills and Life
Skills Lab Practice
TIME SCHEDULE
S. Major Topics No. of Weightage No. of
No Periods of Marks Questions
I Communications Skills
1. Listening (Unit-1 & 2) 10 10 1
2. Speaking (Unit- 3 to 6) 10 10 1
3. Group Discussion (Unit-7) 5 10 1
4. Interview Skills (Unit-8) 5 10 1
II Life Skills
5 Unit-1 to 4 15 30 1
6 Unit-5 to 8 15 30 1
Total 60 100 6
176
Communication Skills
Sl. Unit Objectives Key Competencies
No
1 Listening-  Listen for the main idea  Learn to listen for main idea
I  Listen for specific details  Listen for specific details
 Listen and understand varied
material
 Make inferences
 Know appropriate vocabulary
2 Listening-  Listen for and identify the  Learn to listen for main idea
II main idea  Listen for specific details
 Listen for and identify  Listen and understand varied
specific details material
 Make inferences
 Know appropriate vocabulary
3 Introducin  Introduce oneself  Use formal and informal
g |Oneself  Learn vocabulary introduction appropriately
relevant to making  Know relevant vocabulary to
introductions talk about skills, hobbies,
 Learn the difference strengths and weaknesses
between an informal and
formal introduction
4 Describing  Learn vocabulary and  Learn to describe an object
Objects expressions useful for  Use relevant vocabulary
describing objects
 Describe objects
5 Reporting  Report past incidents  Use appropriate tense
Past  Use appropriate grammar  Learn appropriate vocabulary
Incidents and vocabulary for  Know how to express past
reporting incidents
6 Just A  Speaking fluently and  Learn to speak on any given
Minute accurately for a minute topic
 Sequencing ideas organizing
thoughts
 Know how to introduce a given
topic
 Learn how to give a good
closure
 Know and avoid common
mistakes
7 Group  Understand the concept  Participate in a group
Discussio of a group discussion discussion
n  Participate in a group  Learn appropriate vocabulary
discussion and expressions
 Learn the do’s and don’ts  Use good body language
of group discussion  Know group dynamics
 Be aware of do’s and don’ts in a
group discussion
 Know appropriate etiquette
8 Interview  Prepare for an interview  Get the confidence to face an
Skills  Face an interview interview
 Learn good body language
 Know frequently asked
questions and answer them
appropriately
 Learn to dress properly for an
interview
 Know the do’s and don’ts
177
Life Skills
Sl. Unit Objectives Key Competencies

No
1 Positive Concept of positive  Learn to think positively
Attitude attitude  Become confident
2 Goal Setting Importance of  Learn to set goals
setting goals  Know how to achieve goals
 Know about personal and
professional goals
3 Time To manage time in  Know about time wasters
Management an efficient manner  Learn to plan, prioritize,
schedule
 Learn to become productive
 Learn to manage time
productively
4 Problem Learn to solve  Learn the steps in problem
Solving and problems and take solving
Decision appropriate  To think out of the box
Making decisions  Learn to solve the problems
rationally
5 Creativity To become creative  Think innovatively
 Learn to think out of the box
 Learn to look at old things in
a new way
 Think differently
6 Managing Understand  Learn to manage stress
Emotions different emotions  Know about anger
management
 Understand and manage
emotions
7 Teamwork Importance of  Learn to be a team player
teamwork  Know the importance of
teamwork
 Learn the traits of a good
team
 Know the stages in a team
formation
8 Leadership Concept of  Learn leadership traits
Skills leadership  Know leadership styles
 Be a future leader
Total Marks: 100

Internal: 40 marks
External: 60 marks
178
End Examination:
Listening skill: 10 marks
Speaking Skill: 10 marks
(Describing Objects, Reporting past incidents, JAM)
Interview Skills or Group Discussion: 10 marks
Life Skills: 30 marks
Internal Assessment:
Attendance, Discipline: 5 marks
Lab manual Submission: 15 marks
Classroom presentations: 20 marks
*****
179
Mine Surveying Lab Practice-I
Subject Title : Mine Surveying Lab Practice-I
TIME SCHEDULE
S.No. Major Topic No. of Periods
1 Identification of Survey Equipment 03
2 Chain Surveying 21
3 Compass Surveying 18
4 Levelling and contouring 24
5 Theodolite traversing 24
TOTAL 90
OBJECTIVES
to
1.0 Identifies the equipment in survey Laboratory
1.1 Identifies the field book used.
1.2 Ranges the line-direct method (by eye) and indirect method.
1.3 Measures the distance by judgement, pacing, chaining, taping
on a fairly level ground.
2.0 Know the Chain surveying
2.1 Identifies the equipment required for chain survey
2.2 Sets the perpendicular offsets to various objects from chain
line with chain and tape, cross-staff.
2.3 Carries out chain triangulation in a given area of Institute
campus.
2.4 Prepares the plan of chain triangulation.
2.5 Carries out cross-staff survey
180
2.6 Plots the cross-staff survey
2.7 determines the area from cross-staff survey plotting
2.8 Draws the conventional sings used in surveying and mine
surveying.
2.9 Determines width of a river when obstructed the chain line.
2.10 Determines length across a building when obstructed the chain
line.
3.0 Know the compass survey
3.1 Identifies the parts of the prismatic compass
3.2 Measures the magnetic bearing of a line.
3.3 Measures the bearing of the line of closed figures and records
the observations.
3.4 Calculates the included angles of the traverse.
3.5 Plots the traverse.
4.0 Know the levelling and Contouring
4.1 Identifies the parts of a Dumpy level.
4.2 Practices taking reading on levelling staff with Dumpy level.
4.3 Conducts simple levelling.
4.4 Conducts compound levelling.
4.5 Runs Fly levelling and determines R.L of a given point from a
known B.M
4.6 Carries out profile levelling.
4.7 Plots the profile levelling and finds the gradient of the line.
4.8 Conducts cross-section levelling.
4.9 Plots the cross-section from the observations.
4.10 Contouring and Interpolation
4.11 Contouring by Direct method with plotting.
4.12 Contouring by square method.
5.0 Know the theodolite traversing
5.1 Study of various other types of theodolites
181
5.2 Practices the centering, levelling the theodolite over a station
and reads the Vernier.
5.3 Practices the measurement of horizontal angle over a station
and reads the Vernier.
5.4 Practices the prolongation of straight line with theodolite.
5.5 Measures the horizontal angle by repetition.
5.6 Measures the horizontal angle by reiteration.
5.7 Practices the measurement of vertical angle.
5.8 Determines the height of pole when its base is inaccessible.
5.9 Conducts traverse survey by direct bearing method.
5.10 Conducts traverse survey by double foresight method
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Identifies the equipment in survey Laboratory
Identifies the field book used.Ranges the line-direct method
(by eye) and indirect method.Measures the distance by
judgement, spacing, changing, taping on a fairly level ground.
2. Chain surveying
Identifies the equipment required for chain survey
Sets the perpendicular offsets to various objects from chain
line with tape cross-staff, optical square. Carries out chain
triangulation in a given area of Institute campus. Prepares the
plan of chain triangulation. Carries out cross-staff survey. Plots
the cross-staff survey. Determines the area from cross-staff
survey plotting. Draws the conventional sings used in surveying
and mine surveying. Determines width of a river and of a building
when obstructed the chain line.
3. Compass survey
Identifies the parts of the prismatic compass Measures the
magnetic bearing of a line- Measures the bearing of the line of
closed figures and records the observations-Calculates the
included angles of the traverse- Plots the traverse.
182
4. Levelling and contouring
Identifies the parts of a Dumpy level- Practices taking reading
on levelling staff with Dumpy level- Conducts simple levelling-
Conducts compound levelling. Runs Fly levelling and
determines R.L of a given point from a known B.M- Carries out
profile levelling-Plots the profile levelling and finds the gradient
of the line- Conducts cross-section levelling- Plots the cross-
section from the observations. -Contouring by Direct method
with plotting.- Contouring by square method.
5. Know the theodolite traversing
Temporary adjustments of the theodolite over a station- reads
the Vernier-Measurement of horizontal angle repetition and re-
iteration - prolongation of straight line-measurement of vertical
angle- Determines the height of pole- traverse survey by direct
bearing method- traverse survey by double foresight method
*****
S.No Experiment title Key competency
1 Identifies Field book Enter the readings at the field
while doing experiment in the
printed tabular form
2 Ranging a survey line by

a) Fixing of ranging rods at
direct ranging
first and last station.
b) Hold the third ranging rod
in between.
c) Ranging by eye
3 Ranging a survey line by a a) Observing the images of

line ranger the ranging rods A and B
in upper and lower prisms
at the same time.
b) Moving the instrument
backward and forward at
183
right angles to the line until
two images appear one
above the other exactly in
the same vertical line.
4 Ranging a survey line by a) ranging rods at end
indirect Ranging stations not visible to each
other
b) Ensure that the ranging
rods at end stations are
visible from the selected
intermediate positions
5 Judgment Directly estimate the distance

without measuring
6 Pacing Estimate the distance by
counting no. of steps
7 Chaining and taping Measure the distance by Chain

or Tape
8 Equipment required for Chain, tape, arrows, pegs,
chain survey ranging rods, cross staff, ranging
poles, plumb bob etc.
9 Setting of perpendicular To know the lateral distance.

offset
a) Chain and tape b) cross
staff
10 chain triangulation Measure the base line, maine
lines, subsidiary lines and check
lines.
Calculate the area by dividing the
field into triangles.
11 Plan of chain triangulation Prepares the plan to Show the

interior details with dimensions
12 Calculation of area of a Run the chain line through the

given boundary by Cross center of the field
staff survey
184
13 Perform triangulation a) Measuring the length of
survey of a given area with base line accurately
chain and cross staff. b) Measuring the offsets
correctly
c) Recording the field work
observations correctly
14 Conventional signs used in Draws the conventional signs

surveying and mine used in surveying and mine
surveying. surveying.
By using Similar triangle

15 Determination of width of a Principle
river when obstructed the
chain line.
16 Determination of length By using cross-staff.
across a building when Setting parallel line to the main
obstructed the chain line chain line
Identifies the parts of the

17 Prismatic compass
prismatic compass
18 Set up the compass at a a) Fixing the compass with

station and carry out tripod stand
temporary adjustments b) Centering the compass
c) Leveling the compass
19 Measurement of the Measure F.B. and B.B.

magnetic bearing of a line.
20 Measures the bearing of the Measure F.B. and B.B.

line of closed figures Record the observations.
21 Calculation of included a) Observing the bearings

angles from a given correctly
bearings b) Detection of local
attraction if any
C) Calculates the included
angles of the traverse.
185
22 Plotting the traverse. By F.B. of the Lines.
By Interior angles of the closed
traverse.
23 Parts of Dumpy level. Identifies the parts of a Dumpy

level.
24 Taking reading on levelling Temporary adjustments of

staff with Dumpy level. Dumpy level.
Practices taking reading on
levelling staff with Dumpy level.
25 Conduct simple levelling. All readings taken with Single

setting of the instrument.
26 Conduct compound Readings taken with at least two

levelling. setting of the instrument.
27 Fly levelling Taken only F.S. and B.S

determines R.L of a given point
from a known B.M
28 Profile levelling. Sights taken in particular

intervals. Determine the gradient
of roadway
29 Cross-sectioning
Conduct cross-sectional level-
ling lateral to the main roadway.
Plot the cross-section from the
observations
30 Contouring and Inter- Marking the Pegs at the required

polation places.
31 Contouring by Direct Fix the Pegs at the staff stations.

method with plotting
32 Contouring by square Fix the Pegs at the given interval.

method.
33 Centering, leveling the Temporary adjustments to be
theodolite done.Practices the centering,
leveling the theodolite over a
station and reads the Vernier.
186
34 Measurement of horizontal Practices the measurement of
angle over a station horizontal angle over a station
and reads theVernier by ordinary
method.
35 Prolongation of straight line Practices the prolongation of

with theodolite. straight line with theodolite and
range the given line
36 Measure the horizontal Angle between two lines

angle by repetition. measured repeatedly and the
average reading to be taken.
(The vernier should not set to
000 during repetition
37 Measure the horizontal Angle among more than two

angle by reiteration. lines measured clockwise from
a single instrument station and
closed to the first station. Check
should be applied by sum of
angles=3600
38 Measurement of vertical Practices the measurement of

angle. vertical angle. use the vertical
circle .use verniers C and D.
note the index error if any.
Measure the vertical angle by

39 Determine the height of pole theodolite.
when its base is Use Trigonometrical formulas.
inaccessible.
Conduct traverse survey by

40 Traverse survey by direct direct bearing method
bearing method (continuous Azimuth method).
Measure the bearings of all the
lines of traverse.
41 Traverse survey by double Conduct traverse survey by

foresight method double foresight method.
Measure the included angles of
the traverse.
187
Mining Geology Lab Practice
Course Title : Mining Geology Lab
Practice
Course Code : MNG -310
TIME SCHEDULE
S. No. List of Experiments No. of Periods
1 Identification of megascopic
properties of minerals 08
2 Identification of megascopic
properties of rocks 08
3 Identification of microscopic
properties Minerals 08
4 Identification of microscopic
properties Rocks 06
5 Mapping 06
6 Field Activities 09
TOTAL 45
OBJECTIVES
Upon the completion of the course, the student shall be able to
1.0 Identify the Megascopic properties of Minerals
1.1 Identify the tools and equipment required for identification
megascopic properties of Minerals and to know how to use
them.
1. Streak plate 5. Magnifying glass
2. Penknife 6. Compass
3. Moh's Hardness scale 7. Magnet
4. Jolly's spring Balance
188
1.2 Identifying the Form of minerals with examples
1.3 Identifying the Colour of minerals with examples
1.4 Identifying the Streak of minerals with examples
1.5 Identifying the Lustre and Transparency of minerals with
examples
1.6 Identifying the Cleavage of minerals with examples
1.7 Identifying the Fracture of minerals with examples
1.8 Identifying the Hardness of minerals with examples
1.9 Identifying the Specific gravity and Magnetism of minerals with
examples
2.0 Identify the Megascopic properties of Rocks
2.1. Identifying the Forms of Igneous Rocks with examples
2.2. Identifying the minerals of Igneous Rocks with examples.
2.3. Identifying the textures of Igneous Rocks with examples
2.4. Identifying the Structures of Igneous Rocks with examples
2.5. Identifying the Forms of Sedimentary Rocks with examples
2.6. Identifying the Texture of Sedimentary Rocks with examples
2.7. Identifying the Structures of Sedimentary Rocks with examples
2.8. Identifying the Forms of Metamorphic Rocks with examples
2.9. Identifying the Texture of Metamorphic Rocks with examples
2.10. Identifying the Structures of Metamorphic Rocks with examples
3.0 Identifying the Microscopic properties of Minerals
3.1 Identify the different parts of Mineralogical microscope and
develop the skills to use.
3.2 Identifying of thin section of Minerals.
3.3 Identifying the Form, Cleavage, Colour and Inclusions of
minerals with examples
3.4 Identifying the Pleochroism, Pleochroic Halos of minerals with
examples
3.5 Identifying the Twinkling and Twinning of minerals with examples
4.0 Identifying the Microscopic properties of Rocks
4.1. Identifies the different parts of Petrological microscope and
develop skills to use.
4.2. Identifying of thin section of Rocks.
189
4.3 Identifying the Essential and Accessory Minerals of Rocks
4.4 Identifying the structures of Rocks
4.5 Identifying the Textures of Rocks
5.0 Mapping
5.1 Preparation of topography and contours maps.
5.2 Find out strike and Dip of the structures.
5.3 Drawing of profiles.
5.4 Preparation of Maps showing different Geological features such
as a) Folds b) Faults c) Unconformities d) Dykes e) Sills
5.5 Understanding the Geological History of the area based on
maps.
6.0 Undertaking of field activities
6.1 Identifies the tools equipment used in field.
6.2 Identify and collect the important minerals and rocks in the field.
6.3 Determine Strike and Dip of Formation with the help of
Brunton's compass
6.4 Identify the following features in field
a) Fold and its parts b) Fault and its parts
c) Joint and its parts d) Unconformities
6.5 Identifies the following structures.
a) Current bedding b) Inliers
c) Outliners d) Exfoliation
e) Ripple marks f) Out crops
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Identifying the Megascopic properties of Minerals
Identify the tools and equipment required for identification of
megascopic properties of Minerals and knows how to use them.
Streak plate, Glass Knife - Moh's Hardness scale
Jolly's spring Balance - Magnifying glass.
2.0 Identifying the Megascopic properties of Rocks
Identify the Forms of Igneous Rocks with examples. Identify
the minerals of Igneous Rocks with examples. Identify the
190
textures of Igneous Rocks with examples. Identify the Structures
of Igneous Rocks with examples. Identify the Forms of
Sedimentary Rocks with examples. Identify the Texture of
Sedimentary Rocks with examples. Identify the Structures of
Sedimentary Rocks with examples. Identify the Forms of
Metamorphic Rocks with examples. Identifying the Texture of
Metamorphic Rocks with examples identifying the Structures
of Metamorphic Rocks with examples
3.0 Identify the Microscopic properties of Minerals
Identify the different parts of Mineralogical microscope and
develop skills to use. Identify the thin section of Minerals. Identify
Form, Cleavage, Colour and Inclusions of minerals with
examples. Identifying the Pleochroism, Pleochroic Halos of
minerals with examples Identifying the Twinkling and Twinning
of minerals with examples
4.0 Identify the Microscopic properties of Rocks
Identifies the different parts of Petrological microscope and
develop skills to use. Identify of thin section of Rocks. Identify
the Essential and Accessory Minerals of Rocks. Identify the
structures of Rocks. Identifying the Textures of Rocks
5.0 Mapping
Drawing of profiles-Preparation of Maps showing different
geological features such as Folds, Faults, Unconformities,
Dykes and Sills-Understanding the Geological-History of the
area based on maps.
6.0 Undertaking field activities
Identifies the tools equipment used in field activities- makes
search for and identifies and collects the important minerals or
rocks in the field study of a given area-Determines strike and
dip of given bedding with the help of Brunton compass-Identifies
in the field- Fold and its parts, Fault and its parts, Joint and its
parts, Unconformities, Identifies different structures-Current
bedding, Inliers, Outliners, Exfoliation, Ripple marks.
*****
191
PRACTICAL TRAINING AND ASSESSMENT
Subject Title : Practical Training and
Assessment
Periods per Week : -
Periods per Semester : -
OBJECTIVES
to
1 Study of History of Mine
2 Study of Mine geological information/ bore hole data
3 Study of Mine Plans and Sections of lamp room, mine, winding,
lighting, sub stations , Haulage, Surveying, Ventilation, method
of working and supports.
4 Study of Surface features related to Mine
5 Study of method of working/ Production calculations
6 Study of method of blasting in underground and opencast coal
or Metal mines
7 Study of Transportation system and layouts
8 Study of Ventilation systems and layouts
9 Study of Drainage system
10 Study of Pit top and Pit bottom layouts.
11 Study of man Power plan
12 Develop the Lamp room layout and Magazine Layout
13 Draw the charts depicting instructional items related to Mining
subjects
14 Collect all related mining information's and statistics
Note: Students will be sent for practical training to Coal/ Metal
mines at the end of I year i.e. during summer vacation to
different Mining industries. The training reports/records
submitted by the students will be assessed at the end of III
semester for award of marks.
*****
192
IV SEMESTER
193
IV SEMESTER

/Week Semester
cal tion onal Exam
Hours
THEORY
MNG-401 Engineering
Mathematics-IV 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-402 Basic Mechanical
Engineering 3 45 3 20 80 100
MNG-403 Methods of
working Coal-II 3 45 3 20 80 100
MNG-404 Methods of
working Metal 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-405 Mine Machinery-II 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-406 Mine Surveying-II 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-407 Mine Ventilation 4 60 3 20 80 100
PRACTICAL
MNG-408 Mechanical Engi-
MNG-409 Mine Planning and
Design Lab Practice 3 45 3 20 30 50
MNG-410 Programming in C
Lab Practice 4 60 3 40 60 100
MNG-411 Mine Surveying-II
Lab Practice 3 45 3 40 60 100
MNG-412 Mining Machinery
Lab Practice 3 45 3 40 60 100
TOTAL 26 16 630 36 300 800 1100
194
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS - IV
Subject title : Engineering Mathematics-IV
TIME SCHEDULE with BLUE PRINT
S. Major Topic No of Weightage Short Essay

No Periods of Marks Questions Questions
R U A R U A
Unit -I
1. Homogenous Linear
Differential equations
with constant c
oefficients 05 09 1 2 0 0 0 0
Unit - II
2. Non-homogenous
Linear Differential
equations with
constant coefficients 15 26 1 1 0 1 1 0
Unit - III
3. Laplace Transforms 25 49 2 1 0 2 1 1
Unit - IV
4. Fourier Series 15 26 1 1 0 1/2 1/2 1
Total 60 110 5 5 0 3 2 2
1/2 1/2
Marks 15 15 0 35 25 20
R: Remembering type 50 marks

U: Understanding type 40 marks
App: Application type 20 marks
195
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS- IV
COMMON TO ALL BRNACHES
OBJECTIVES
Unit-I
Differential Equations
1.0 Solve Homogeneous linear differential equations with
constant coefficients in engineering situations
1.1 Solve Differential equations of the type (aD2 +bD + c)y = 0
when the roots of the auxiliary equation are real and different,
real and repeated, complex.
1.2 Solve the higher order homogeneous differential equations with
constant coefficients.
Unit-II
2.0 Solve Non Homogeneous linear differential equations
with constant coefficients in engineering situations
2.1 Explain the concept of complementary function, particular
Integral and general solution of a differential equation.
2.2 Solve nth order differential equation of the type f(D) y = X where
f(D) is a polynomial of nth order and X is a function of the form
k, eax , Sinax, Cosax, xn.
Unit-III
3.0 Use Laplace transforms to solve differential equation in
engineering problems
3.1 Write the definition of Laplace Transform and Laplace transform
of standard functions.
3.2 Explain the sufficient conditions of existence of Laplace
Transform.
3.3 Write the properties of Laplace Transform - Linear property,
First shifting property, Change of Scale.
3.4 Solve simple problems using the above properties
196
f (t )
3.5 Write formulae for Laplace transform of t n f (t ) , ,
t
t
f (n)
(t ) ,  f (u ) du interms of Laplace transform of f (t ) .
0
3.6 Solve simple problems using the above formulae.

3.7 Define unit step function and write the Laplace Transform of
unit step function.
3.8 Write second shifting property.
3.9 Define inverse Laplace Transform and write inverse Laplace
Transform of standard functions.
3.10 Solve simple problems on 3.9
3.11 Write first shifting property of inverse Laplace Transfrom.
3.12 Solve simple problems on 3.11
3.13 Write inverse Laplace Transforms corresponding to Laplace
Transform of the functions mentioned in section 3.5
3.14 Solve simple problems on 3.13.
3.15 Define convolution of two functions and state convolution
theorem.
3.16 Solve simple problems on 3.15.
3.17 Use Laplace and inverse Laplace Transforms to solve simple
differential equations of second order.
Unit-IV
4.0 Understand the Fourier series expansion of functions
4.1 Define the orthogonality of functions in an interval.
4.2 Define Fourier series of a function on the interval (c, c  2 )

and write the Euler's formulae for determining the Fourier
coefficients.
4.3 Write sufficient conditions for the existence of Fourier series
for a function.
197
4.4 Find Fourier series of simple functions in the range (0, 2 )
and (  ,  ) .
4.5 Write Fourier series for even and odd functions in the interval
(  ,  ) .
COURSE CONTENT
Differential Equations
1. Homogenous linear differential equations with constant
coefficients of order two and higher with emphasis on second
order.
2. Non-homogenous linear differential equations with constant
coefficients of the form f(D)y = X, where X is in the form k, eax,
sin ax, cosax, xn, (n= 1,2) - complimentary function, particular
integral and general solution.
Laplace Transforms (LT)
3. Definition, sufficient conditions for existence of LT, LT of
elementary functions, linearity property, scale change property,
first shifting property, multiplication by tn, division by t, LT of
derivatives and integrals, unit step function, LT of unit step
function, second shifting theorem, inverse Laplace transforms-
shifting theorems and change of scale property, multiplication
by sn and division by s - examples of inverse LT using partial
fractions - convolution theorem (no proof) - applications of LT
to solve ordinary differential equations with initial conditions (2nd
order only)
Fourier series
4. Orthogonality of trigonometric functions, Representation of a
function in Fourier series over the interval  c , c  2  , Euler's
formulae, sufficient conditions for existence of Fourier series
for a function, even, odd functions and their Fourier series over
the interval  0, 2  .
REFERENCE BOOKS
Higher Engineering Mathematics, B.V.Ramana, Tata McGraw-
Hill.
*****
198
BASIC MECHANICAL ENGINEEREING
Subject Title : Basic Mechanical Engineering
TIME SCHEDULE
Type Type
1 Friction 5 13 1 1
2 Simple Machines 6 13 1 1
3 Transmission of the
power 8 26 2 2
4 Simple stress and
strain 8 16 2 1
5 Basics of Fluid
Mechanics 8 13 1 1
6 IC Engines &
Compressors 10 29 3 2
Total 45 110 10 08
OBJECTIVES
1.0 Know the Phenomenon of friction
1.1 Explain the Phenomenon of friction
1.2 Identify the types of friction
1.3 State the laws of friction
1.4 Explain the effect of friction as applied to an inclined plane
1.5 Solve the problems on Horizontal and Vertical Plane.
1.6 Calculation of Tractive effort.
2.0 Understand function and working of simple machine
2.1 Define mechanical advantage, velocity ratio and efficiency
199
2.2 Identify the different types of levers and examples
2.3 Describe the simple machines like simple wheel and axle,
differential wheel and axle, Differential pulley block, single
purchase crab winch, double purchase winch crab, 1st system
of pulleys,2nd system of pulleys and 3rd system of pulleys and
screw jack.
2.4 Define ideal machine, self-locking machine
2.5 Distinguish between ideal machine and practical machine
2.6 State the linear law of machine
2.7 Calculate the simple problems involving mechanical advantage,
velocity ratio,law of machine and efficiency
3.0 Comprehend the types of transmission of power in engine
3.1 Identify various powers transmitting media like belt, rope, chain
and gears
3.2 Define the expression for velocity ratio for a belt drive
3.3 Explain the term Slip-in-belt and its effect on velocity ratio.
3.4 Explain the combined effect of belt thickness and slip and
velocity ratio
3.5 Distinguish between open belt drive and Cross belt drive
3.6 Explain the formula to find the length of open belt and cross
belt drive
3.7 Calculate the length of open belt and cross belt drive
3.8 Explain the tensions in tight and slack sides of a belt and also
the initial tension
3.9 Explain the centrifugal tension and maximum tension in a belt
drive
3.10 Explain the formula of ratio of tight side tension and slack side
tension
3.11 Calculate the velocity ratio of tight side tension and slack side
tension
3.12 Explain the rope drive
3.13 Select suitable materials for belt and rope
200
3.14 Explain the chain drive and its merits over belt drive
3.15 Categorises the gears
3.16 Discuss the simple and compound gear trains
3.17 Explain the nomenclature of spur gear and tooth
3.18 Explain the applications of the above drives in engineering
3.19 Explain the function of a coupling
3.20 List the types of coupling and their uses
3.21 Explain chain drive
3.22 Advantages of chain drive over other drives
3.23 Simple problems on Gear drive
4.0 Know the behaviour of materials subjected to simple
stresses and strains
4.1 Explain the meaning and significance of simple stresses and
strain, shear stress and strain, lateral strain and volumetric
strain
4.2 State the need for working stresses and factor of safety
4.3 State and explain the Hooke's law
4.4 Explain the terms Poisson's ratio Young's modulus shear
modulus and Bulk Modulus and relationship between them
4.5 Simple problems on above
4.6 Discuss the mechanical properties of materials
4.7 List the types of beams
4.8 List the types of loading
4.9 Explain the terms shear force and Bending Moment (Without
problems)
5.0 Basics of Fluid Mechanics.
5.1 Definition of fluid.
5.2 Types of fluids.
5.3 Incompressible and Compressible fluids.
5.4 Properties of fluids.
201
5.5 Definition of liquid pressure, Pascal's law.
5.6 Pressure head.
5.6.1 Absolute, Atmospheric, Gauge and Vacuum Pressures
5.7 State and explain working principle of various pressure
measuring devices such as:
5.7.1 Simple and Differential Manometers.
5.8 State and explain continuity equation.
5.9 State and explain Bernoulli's theorem.
5.10 Explain working of venturimeter.
5.11 Solve numerical problems on above.
6.0 Understand the construction and working of IC engines
and Compressor
6.1 Distinguish diesel and petrol engine
6.2 Explain the construction and the working of two stroke and four
stroke diesel engines.
6.3 Compare the two stroke and four stroke engines.
6.4 List the various types of solid, liquid and gaseous fuels and
their calorific values
6.5 Define Higher calorific value and Lower calorific value
6.6 Explain the different systems in I.C Engines such as fuel
system, Lubrication system.
6.7 Explain the working of diesel pump and atomiser.
6.8 Explain the uses of radiator and water pump.
6.9 Explain the method of governing adopted in Diesel Engine.
6.10 State the specification of Diesel engine.
6.11 State the uses of compressed air.
6.12 State the types of air compressors and their application.
6.13 Explain the construction and working of single stage
reciprocating air compressors and multistage reciprocating air
compressor
6.14 State the uses and advantages of multistage air compressor.
202
COURSE CONTENTS
1.0 Friction:
Definition of static friction limiting friction and sliding friction Co-
efficient of friction - Angle of friction, Laws of friction conditions
of equilibrium on the -horizontal plane, up the plane, down the
plane, angle of repose-calculation of problems on the above
simple problem on screw jack
2.0 Simple Machines:
Introduction - Explanation of the terms-Mechanical advantage,
Velocity ratio and efficiency, Derive an expression giving the
equations for the above Ideal machine self locking machine,
Reversibility of the machine practical machine, maximum
efficiency of the machine-Linear Law of the machine-Study of
different types of levers-Wheel and Axle, differential wheel and
axle, work and work wheel, differential pulley block, single
purchasewinch crab, double purchase winch crab, 1st system
of pulleys and 2nd system of pulleys 3rd system of pulleys-
simple problems on the above.
3.0 Transmission of the power:
Introduction-Belt Drive - Velocity ratio- percentage slip and its
effect on velocity ratio, thickness of belt, length of open and
cross belt drive (without proof)-Chain drive-Introduction, Types
of chain drives in power transmission-Gear drive-Introduction-
Nomenclature-Types of gear drives-simple problems on drives.
4.0 Simple stresses and strains
Definition and explanation of Tensile stress, Compressive
stress, Shear stress and Linear strain-Definition of elastic limit-
Statement of Hooks law-stress-strain diagram- percentage of
contraction and elongation, Working stress, ultimate or
maximum stress, factor of safety,Elastic modulus and
explanation of Young's Modulus-Modulus of rigidity-Bulk
modulus,, Mechanical properties of materials-Definition and
explanation of Lateral strain, Poisson's ratio, Relation between
Young`s modulus,rigidity modulus, bulk modulus and Poisson's
ration (W/o proof) and volumetric strain- problems on the
above-Types of Beams - Types of Loading-Definition of Shear
force and Bending moment-Maximum bending moment
203
formula in the case of cantilever and simply supported beams
for standard cases(without proofs)
5.0 Basics of Fluid Mechanics
Definition of fluid, Types of fluids, Incompressible and
Compressible fluids , Properties of fluids , Definition of liquid
pressure, Pascal's law, Pressure head- Absolute, Atmospheric,
Gauge and Vacuum Pressures, State and explain working
principle of various pressure measuring devices- Simple and
Differential Manometers, State and explain-continuity equation,
Bernoulli's theorem, Explain working of venturimeter, Solve
numerical problems on above
6.0 IC Engines & Air Compressors
Construction and working principle of two stroke and four stroke
petrol and diesel engines - comparison of two stroke with four
strokes -Types of fuels and their calorific values -HCV-LCV-
fuel injection system and lubrication system - Working of diesel
pump and atomizer - radiator and water pump - methods of
governing in diesel engine - IHP, BHP and mechanical efficiency
of an engine - care and maintenance - specification of diesel
engine-simple problems on above-Types of Air Compressors
and their applications - Uses of compressed air, Working
principle of single stage reciprocating air compressor -
multistage air compressor-Applications and advantages.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Thermal Engineering : R.S.Khurmi
2. Hydraulics : R.S.Khurmi
3. Strength of Materials : I.B.Prasad
4. Engg. Mechanics : Ramamrutham
5. Thermal Engineering : ZakriaBaig
6. Strength to Materials : T.Venkateswarlu
7. Engineering Mechanics : Pakirappa
8. Fluid Mechanics : R.K Bansal
*****
204
METHODS OF WORKING COAL-II
Subject Title : Methods of Working Coal-II
TIME SCHEDULE
Type Type
1 Thick seam Mining 15 39 3 3

2 Hydraulic Mining 10 16 2 1
3 Underground gasification
of coal 10 26 2 2
4 Blasting Gallery method 10 29 3 2
Total 45 110 10 08
OBJECTIVES
Upon completion of the course student shall be able to
1.0 Knows the Thick seam Mining
1.1 List the difficulties in working thick seams
1.2 List the situations, necessitating the adoption of thick seam
working
1.3 List the different thick seam workings and state its applicability
1.4 State the principles of working thick seams
1.5 List the methods of slicing and define slicing method
1.6 State the applicability of inclined slicing
1.7 Explain the method of inclined slicing with caving
1.8 Explain the method of inclined slicing with stowing
1.9 State the applicability of horizontal slicing
1.10 Explain the horizontal slicing with caving and stowing
205
1.11 Explain the method of sub-level caving, list applicable conditions
of sub-level caving
1.12 List merits, demerits of sub-level caving.
1.13 Explain the Room and Pillar method
1.14 List applicable conditions, merits, demerits of room and pillar
method.
1.15 Explain the principle of horizon mining, state merits, demerits,
applicability's with sketch
2.0 Know the Hydraulic Mining of Coal.
2.1 List the applicability conditions for Hydraulic mining of Coal
2.2 List the merits and demerits of Hydraulic mining of coal
2.3 Explain hydraulic breaking of coal
2.4 Explain Hydraulic transport in Hydraulic mining of coal
2.5 Explain layout of Hydraulic Mining in moderately thick seams
2.6 Explain layout of hydraulic mining in steep seams
3.0 Underground gasification of coal
3.1 List the applicable conditions for underground gasification of
coal
3.2 List the merits and demerits of underground gasification
3.3 Explain the principle and process of underground gasification
of coal
3.4 Explain opening up of coal seams for underground gasification
3.5 Explain linkages between bore holes
4.0 Blasting Gallery method
4.1 List the applicable conditions of Blasting Gallery method
4.2 List the merits and demerits of Blasting Gallery method
4.3 List the limitations of Blasting Gallery method
4.4 Compare Bord and Pillar Method with Blasting Gallery method
4.5 Explain Drilling and Blasting Pattern in the Blasting Gallery
method
206
4.6 Explain Supporting and Loading operations in Blasting Gallery
method
4.7 Explain Development work of BG panel
4.8 Explain the mechanised layout of Blasting Gallery panel
4.9 List the machinery used in Blasting Gallery panel
4.10 State the Importance of spacers used in Blasting Gallery method
4.11 State the precautionary measures taken at Goaf Edge line in
Blasting Gallery method
4.12 Calculate the production in 0.5 million tonne per annum
producing BG mine
COURSE CONTENTS
1.0 Thick seam Mining by slicing
Thick seam Working and associated difficulties different
methods and applicabilities - inclined slicing with caving/stowing
- Horizontal slicing with caving / stowing - Blasting gallery
method- sub level caving with mechanised long wall - Horizon
mining - merits - demerits - Applicabilities limitation of demerit
2.0 Hydraulic Mining of Coal
Applicabilities merits and demerits of hydraulic mining of coal,
hydraulic breaking of coal, hydraulic transport, layout of hydraulic
mining in moderately thick seams and in steep seams
3.0 Underground gasification of coal
Applicable conditions of underground gasification of coal.merits
,demerits of gasification of coal, principle and process
underground gasification, opening up of coal seams for
underground gasification , establishing linkages between bore
holes
4.0 Blasting gallery method
Applicability's-Merits and Demerits-Limitations-Drilling -Blasting
pattern-Loading operations-Supporting-Spacers-Precautionary
207
measures atGoaf edge line- Development of BG Panels-
Mechanised layout of BG Panel-Production calculations.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Deshmukh,D.J., Elements of Mining Technology, Vol.I,
Vidyaseva Prakashan, Nagpur, 1994.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
and Sons, Second Edition, 1999.
Publications, 1994.
4. Karnam,U.M.R., Principles of Rock Drilling, 1999. 38
5. Bhandari S., Engineering rock blasting operations, A. A.
Balkema, 1997.
6. Cummings,A.B. and Given, I.A., SME Mining Engineers'
Handbook, Vol.I and II, Society of Mining Engineers, New York,
1993.
7. Universal Mining School - Lecture notes, cardiff, U.K
*****
208
METHODS OF WORKING METAL
Subject Title : Methods of Working Metal
TIME SCHEDULE
Type Type
1 Basic concepts of
Metal Mining 15 32 4 2
2 Development of Metal
Mining Method 25 42 4 3
3 Stoping of Metal Mining
Method 20 36 2 3
Total 60 110 10 08
OBJECTIVES
Upon completion of the course student shall be able to
1.0 BASIC CONCEPTS OF METAL MINING
1.1 State the significance of metal mines in India.
1.2 List the different metal mines in India and World.
1.3 Explain occurrence and distribution of different metals in India.
1.4 List different metal mining based industries in India.
1.5 Definitions of the following terms
a) Mineral b) Ore c) Ore body d) Gangue
e) Ore forming minerals f) Rock forming minerals
1.6 Define the terms with sketch a) Foot wall b) Hanging wall c)
Back
1.7 Define the terms with sketch a) Cross-cut b) Vein d) Load
209
1.8 Define the terms with sketch a) Ore pass b) Ore bin c) Ore
chute d) Ore shoot
1.9 Define the terms with sketch a) Foot wall b) Hanging wall c)
Raise d) Winze e) Level f) Level interval g) Sub level
1.10 Define the terms with sketch a) Crown pillar b) sill pillar d)
finger raise
1.11 Compare Coal Mining and Metal Mining.
1.12 Explain the factors considered for selection of level intervals.
1.13 Define the term shaft station.
1.14 State the purposes of shaft stations.
1.15 List the factors for determining the size of the shaft station.
1.16 Illustrates the shaft station through sketch.
1.17 State the purposes of ore pass
1.18 Sketch and explain the ore pass
1.19 State the purposes of ore bin.
1.20 Sketch and explain the ore bins.
2.0 DEVELOPMENT OF METAL MINING METHOD
2.1 Define the term drivage
2.2 State the purpose of drivages
2.3 Explain the method of drivage of winze with sketch
2.4 Mentions the application of tunnel boring method
2.5 Explain the method of drivage with tunnel boring machine (TBM)
2. 6 Lists the merits of tunnel boring method
2. 7 Lists the demerits of tunnel boring method
2. 8 Classify the Raising method.
2. 9 Classification of raising methods.
2. 10 List the applicability of Jora raise method
2. 11 Sketch and explain Jora raise method.
2. 12 List the merits of Jora raise method
210
2. 13 List the demerits of Jora raise method
2. 14 List the applicability of Alimak raise climber
2. 15 Sketch and explain the method of alimak raising method
2. 16 State the merits of Alimak raise climber
2. 17 State the demerits of Alimak raise Climber
2. 18 List the applicability of Long hole raising method
2. 19 Sketch and explain the long hole raising
2. 20 List the merits of long hole raising
2. 21 List the demerits of long hole raising
2. 22 List the applicability of (reaming ) raise boring
2. 23 Define the term down reaming with sketch
2. 24 Define the term up reaming with sketch.
2. 25 List the merits of bored raises
2. 26 Define the term drop raising.
3.00 STOPING OF METAL MINING METHOD
3. 1 Define the following terms a) stope b) stoping
3.2 State the preparatory arrangements for commencement of
stope development
3.3 Give the classification of Stoping methods.
3.4 List factors governing selection of stopping methods
3.5 Explain the methods of open stopes.
3.6 Explain the method of Breast stoping with a sketch.
3.7 Mentions applicability of Breast stoping.
3.8 List the merits and demerits of Breast stoping
3.9 Explain the method underhand stopping systems with a sketch.
3.10 Mentions the applicability of underhand stoping.
3.11 List the merits and demerits of Underhand stoping
3.12 Explain the method of overhand stoping with sketch.
3.13 Mentions the applicability of overhand stoping.
211
3.14 List the merits and demerits of Overhand stoping
3.15 Compare Under hand stoping with Overhand stoping method.
3.16 Sketch and explain Cut and fill stoping
3.17 List the applicability of Cut and fill method of stoping
3.18 List the merits and demerits of Cut and fill stoping method
3.19 Explain the method of Shrinkage stoping with a sketch
3.20 List the applicability of Shrinkage stoping.
3.21 List the merits and demerits of Shrinkage stoping
3.22 List the limitations of Shrinkages stoping.
3.23 Explain the method of Sub-level stoping with a sketch.
3.24 List the applicability of Sub-level stoping.
3.25 State the merits and demerits of Sublevel stoping
3.26 Explain the method of Vertical crater retreating method with
sketch.
3.27 List the applicability of Vertical crater retreating method.
3.28 List the merits and demerits of Vertical crater mining
3.29 Sketch and explain Square- set timbered stoping
3.30 List the merits and demerits of Square-set timbered stoping
3.31 List the applicability of Square-set timbered stoping
COURSE CONTENTS
1. BASIC CONCEPTS OF METAL MINING: Mineral - Ore -
Ore body - Gangue -Ore forming minerals - Rock forming
minerals-Foot wall - Hanging wall -Raise - Winze - Level-
Level interval - Back-terms with sketch - Crown pillar - sill
pillar- Ore pass- Ore bin - Ore chute - Ore shoot Cross-cut
- Vein - Sub level - Load-comparison between coal Mining and
Metal Mining. Classification of the Non coal deposits-
Classification of mineral deposits basing on depth, inclination,
regularity, geometry, Comprehensive explanation Mine
212
Development- method of dividing the mineable ore body along
the dip by levels or horizons.- factors considered for selection
of level intervals.- term shaft station.- purposes- factors for
determining the size of the shaft station.- Illustrates the shaft
station- sub-levels +- division of ore body along the strike by
raises and winzes- purposes of driving ore drives, winzes and
Raises within the ore body i.e along with the foot wall.- factors
to be considered for ore drives, winzes and Raises within the
ore body i.e along with the foot wall Illustrates position of ore
drives, Raises and winzes along the foot wall and through the
centre of the ore body with sketches-circumstances under
which drives within the foot wall are preferred-- factors to be
considered for locating the position of the winzes and raises -
purposes of ore passes - location - explain the ore pass .
purposes of ore bin.- location of orebin. explain the ore bins -
purpose of ore chutes
2. DEVELOPMENT OF METAL MINING METHOD:
Drivage- purpose - methods of drivages ( conventional and
mechanised)- conventional methods - method of drivage of
winze - application of tunnel boring -method tunnel boring -
merits - demerits - conventional methods of raising(open and
compartmental)- applicabilities - open raising - merits-demerits
- compartmental methods of raising (two and three
compartment)- applicability Sketch and explain two
compartmental raising method- merits - demerits - applicability
of three compartmental raising- explain - merits demerits -
mechanised methods of raising- ( Swedish ladder, Jora raising,
Alimak climber, long hole drilling, raise boring.)-Joraraising-
applicabilities - explain - merits - demerits -List the applicabilities
- explain - Alimak raise climber- explanation - merits - demerits-
applicabilities of Long hole raising method-reaming -methods
-merits of bored raises-drop raising.
3. STOPING OF METAL MINING METHOD
Classification of Stoping Methods by mode of attack, supported/
Un supported and other methods Stoping- preparatory
arrangements stope development - classifications of Stoping
methods- factors governing the selection of stoping methods.
Classification of stoping methods with respect to its attack -
Breast stoping with a sketch- applicability- merits - demerits -
method underhand stopping with a sketch- applicabilities -
merits -demerits - limitations - method of Overhand stoping
with sketch- applicabilities - limitations -merits-demerits-
213
Comparison, Classification of stoping methods basing on the
method of support used.- method Open stopes.- applicabilities-
limitations - the method of Filled stoping method.- applicabilities
- limitations- Sketch and explain Cut and fill stoping -
applicabilities - merits -demerits-limitations-hydraulic fill
stoping-applicabilities-merits-demerits-limitations.
Method of Shrinkage stoping with a sketch- applicabilities -
merits -demerits-limitations- method of Sub-level stoping with
a sketch-applicabilities-merits-demerits-limitations-vertical
crater method-applicabilities-merits-demerits-limitations-
ringholedrilling-applicabilities-merits-demerits-limitations-
Squareset method-applicabilities-merirt-demerits-limitations.
TEXT BOOKS
1) Elements of mining Vol 2B : D.J.DESHMUKH
2) Rock Mechanics : VARMA.
3) Explosives and Blasting Practice : Samir Kumar Das
4) Study of metal mining methods :CHACHARKAR
5) Introductory mining engineering: L.HARTMAN
6) Mine Ventilation : G.B.MISHRA
7) Mining Engineers Hand Book : Peele. Vol 1, 2
8) Mining Geology : AROGYA SWAMI
9) S.M.E hand book : VOLUME 1& 2
REFERENCE TEXT BOOKS

1. Cummings, A.B. and Given, I, V., SME Mining Engg. Handbook
Vol. I And II, Society Of Mining Engineers Of American Institute
Of Mining, Metallurgical, Petroleum Engineers Inc., New York
1992.
2. Hartman, H.L., Introductory Mining Engineering, John Wiley and
3. Hustrulid, W.A. Ed., Underground Mining Methods Handbook
Society of Mining Engineering, AMIE, New York, 1990
*****
214
MINING MACHINERY-II
Subject Title : Mining Machinery-II
TIME SCHEDULE
Type Type
1 Coal face machinery

a) Drilling Machines.
b) Power Loaders 16 29 3 2
2 Long wall Face machinery 10 16 2 1
3 Flame proof , intrinsically
safe apparatus and
Signalling in Mines 10 13 1 1
4 Winding 18 39 3 3
5 Mine Cables 06 13 1 1
Total 60 110 10 08
OBJECTIVES
to
1.0 Knows the types of drilling machines & Power loaders
1.1 State the field of use of each of them.
1.2 Draws the sketch of electric rotary drill
1.3 Names the parts of the electric rotary drill
1.4 Describe the working of electric rotary drill
1.5 Draw the sketch of hammer Rock drill operated by compressed
air.
1.6 Name the parts of the hammer Rock Drill
1.7 State the function of each part of Hammer Rock Drill.
1.8 Describe the working of hammer rock drill.
215
1.9 State the purposes of air-leg.
1.10 State the function of each part of air-leg
1.11 State the working of air-leg
1.12 Give the classification of the coal cutting machines.
1.13 State the applications of the coal cutting machines.
1.14 State the types of power loaders used underground with their
applicabilities.
1.15 Explain the principle of working of SDL
1.16 Explain the principles of working of LHD
1.17 Explain the principles of working of Rocker shovel
1.18 Explain the principles of working of AM-50 Road header.
1.19 Explain the principles of working of Joy continuous Miner Ripper
Type.
2.0 Know the Long wall face Machinery
2.1 Describe the SERDS and DERDS
2.2 State the application of SERDS and DERDS
2.3 Explain the principle of working of Armoured Face Conveyor
(AFC)
2.4 State the names the constituent parts of Armoured Face
Conveyor
2.5 State Application of Twin bord AFC & bottom closed AFC
2.6 Explain the principle of lump breaker
2.7 State purpose of power pack.
2.8 List the factors governing the selection of power supports.
2.9 List the various types of power supports used in Longwall
mining.
2.10 State the purpose of the following in Power supports
a) Canopy, b) Caving Shield, c) Lemniscates Links, d) Extension
Canopy, e) Face Guard, f) Double acting Advancing Ram
2.11 Sate the composition of Hydraulic fluid.
2.12 List the types of Hydraulic control system used in power
supports
216
3.0 Know Flame proof, intrinsically safe apparatus and
Signalling system used in mines
3.1 State the necessity of flame proofing and the intrinsically safety
apparatus used in mines
3.2 Define the terms flame proof apparatus and intrinsically safe
apparatus.
3.3 State the field of use of FLP & intrinsically safe apparatus
3.4 Describe the constructional features of flame proofing.
3.5 List the methods of intrinsic safety
3.6 Describe the gate-end switch gear used for coal drills.
3.7 State various methods of signalling in mines.
3.8 Describe electrical signalling system used in underground
haulage roadway with a neat sketch
3.9 Describe the signalling system in winding shafts.
3.10 State the operation of mining telephones
4.0 Know the Winding system.
4.1 State the purpose of winding in shafts.
4.2 List the equipment required in a winding scheme.
4.3 State the purpose of a Head gear.
4.4 List the shaft fittings.
4.5 State the purpose of the shaft fitting
4.6 Draw the comparison between cage winding and skip winding.
4.7 State the necessity of guides for cage/skip
4.8 Explain the suspension and weighting of flexible guides.
4.9 Explain rigid guides and attachment to the cage/skip
4.10 State the applicability of rigid and flexible guides.
4.11 List the merits and de-merits of rigid and flexible guides
4.12 Describe the working of keps
4.13 Describe the working of safety catches.
4.14 List the types of safety hooks
4.15 Explain the working of kings detaching safety hook.
4.16 List the types of winding systems-Drum and koepe / friction
winding
4.17 Explain the Drum winding.
217
4.18 List the types of drums and their application.
4.19 List the safety devices/equipment used on winding system,
4.20 Explain the principles of koepe/friction winding.
4.21 State the merits and demerits of multi rope friction winding over
single rope friction winding.
4.22 List the merits and demerits of koepe/friction winding.
4.23 Draw the comparison between drum winding and friction
winding.
4.24 List the safety equipment used in drum winding.
4.25 State the principle of braking in winding.
4.26 Describe the suspended calliper brake
4.27 List the electrical braking.
5.0 Know the Mine cables
5.1 Classifies types of cables used in mines
5.2 Explain the constructional details of each lay with its cross
sectional sketch
5.3 Explain cable jointing methods in U/G vertical shaft
5.4 State the care and Maintenance of cables
5.5 State the types of cables used for transmitting three phase (3
Ø) electrical power supply in underground mines.
a) In a vertical shaft, b) Along an underground level
c) Between the switch gear & Motor of belt conveyor
d) To supply a travelling coal cutting machine
e) To supply a electric coal drilling machine
5.6 Explain the layout of distribution of power supply from gate end
panel to the drilling equipment
5.7 Explain the layout of distribution of power supply from switch
gear to the coal face equipment
5.8 List the cables used for signalling in U/G mines and mining
telephones.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Coal face machinery a) Hand held drills - classification Electric
Rotary drills: Hammer Drills, Air leg, CCM, b) Power Loader -
Types of loaders, field of applications, working operation
218
2. Longwall face machinery Principle, design and application of
long wall face machinery shearer, AFC, Lump breaker, power
pack, chock shield supports used in long wall mining, SERDS
and DERDS- their applications- principle of working of AFC
(Armoured Face conveyor) - names the constituent parts of
AFC-application of Twin Bord AFC, bottom closed AFC - principle
of lump breaker- purpose of power pack- classification of
Powered supports in long wall mining - Hydraulic control
system.
3. Flameproof, intrinsically safe apparatus and signalling - Outlines
the necessity, FLP vs intrinsically safe apparatus field of
application, Frame proofing - constructional features methods
of intrinsic safety field of application. Method of signalling in
mines -electrical signalling, Mining telephones operation.
4. Winding- Winding in shafts, equipments required - purpose of
head gear -Shaft fittings -purpose of each fittings, guides -
Head gear pulley, keps - detaching hook's, - guides ropes in
winding, cage and skip winging - Cage winding and skip
winding, Drum winding and friction winding - Breaking in
winding.
5. Mine Cables -- Classification - Types - Constructional details -
Cable jointing - Care and maintenance - Distribution of three
phase electric power in underground mines - Cables used for
signalling - Mining Telephones and Switch gear (G.E.P).
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Elements of mining : D.J Deshmukh Vol. III
2. Mine Pumps, Haulages and Winding : S. Ghatak
3. Mining Machinery : S. Ghatak
4. Statham Series : Statham Vol.III
5. U.M.S Series : U.M.S Volumes
6. Mine Transportation : KERLIN
*****
219
MINE SURVEYING - II
Subject Title : Mine Surveying - II
Periods / Week : 04
TIME SCHEDULE
1 Theodolite surveying
part-II 15 23 1 2
2 Setting out Curves 6 16 2 1
3 Correlation Survey 8 16 2 1
4 Tacheometry 8 16 2 1
5 Dip, Strike, Fault
problems 10 23 1 2
6 Modern Surveying
Equipments 13 16 2 1
Total: 60 110 10 08
OBJECTIVES
to understand the
1.0 Theodolite survey.
1.1 Explain the term rectangular co-ordinates
1.2 Calculates the latitudes and departures from the traverse data.
1.3 Solves the problems related with rectangular co-ordinates,
Calculating the length and bearing of the closing line of the
traverse.
1.4 Calculates the area of closed traverse from the rectangular
co-ordinates
1.5 State the rules for distribution of error of closure
220
1.6 State the Bowdich Rule of balancing the traverse.
2.0 Setting Out Curves
2.1 Classifies the curves
2.2 Define (a) Simple curve (b) Reverse curve (c) Compound curve
(d) Transition curve (e) Vertical curve (f) Super elevation
2.3 State the elements of Simple curve
2.4 List the methods of setting out curve
2.5 Explain the method of setting out Simple curve by Chord and
Offset (a) on Surface (b) In an Underground
2.6 Explain the method of setting out curve by Chord and Angle (a)
on surface (b) in an Underground
2.7 Explain the method of setting out road way in underground from
a main road at
a given bearing (direction)and gradient
2.8 Simple problems to find the Elements of simple curve
3.0 Correlation Survey
3.1 Define the term correlation.
3.2 State the purpose of correlation.
3.3 List the different methods of correlation.
3.4 Describe the method of correlation by Direct traversing
3.5 Describe the method of correlation by Co-Planing or Exact
alignment method
3.6 Write short notes on Lateral shift of the instrument in Coplaning
method
3.7 Describe the methods of correlation by Weisbach triangle or
approximate alignment method
3.8 Write short notes on weisbach Triangle
3.9 Simple problem to find out the Azimuth of the line (draft) with
the given data in weisbach triangle.
4.0 Tacheometric Surveying
4.1 State the principle of Tacheometric Surveying
221
4.2 List the (a) merits (b) demerits of Tacheometric survey
4.3 List the methods of Tacheometric survey
4.4 Explain the stadia method of Tacheometric survey
4.5 List the relative merits of vertical and normal staff holding in
stadia method
4.6 Explain the determination of Tacheometric constants of a given
Tacheometer
4.7 Write short notes on Anallatic lens
4.8 Derives the relation (formula) among stadia reading, horizontal
distance and vertical distances when the line of sight is inclined
and the staff is held vertical
4.9 Solve problems for horizontal distances and vertical heights.
5.0 Dip, Strike, Fault problems
5.1 Define the terms (a) Dip (b) True dip (c) Apparent dip (d) Strike
(e) Fault.
5.2 State the inter relation between true dip, apparent dip and strike
of a mineral bed
5.3 Derives a formula relating them
5.4 Solves the problems relating to them - determines the rate and
direction of true dip or strike of a mineral bed
5.5 Solves problems related to strike and fault - calculate the length
of drift, passing through the fault.
5.6 Solves problems basing on bore hole date- Calculates the rate
and direction of true dip of the seam.
5.7 Solves problems connected to cross - measure drift driven
between two parallel seams with given data.
6.0 Modern Surveying Equipment
6.1 List the modern surveying Equipment
6.2 State the Principle of working of EDM (Electronic Distance
Measuring Instrument) used in mines
6.3 State the principle of working of GPS used in Mines.
6.4 State the applicability of GPS in Mines.
222
6.5 State the advantages of DGPS
6.6 List the key components of GIS
6.7 List the applications of GIS in Mining
6.8 Explain the principle of working of Total Station Instrument Used
in Modern Surveying
6.9 List the applicability of Total station
6.10 State the applications of Remote sensing in Mining.
6.11 Explain the following related to Remote sensing.
(a) Scale (b) Resolution (c) Electro Magnet Radiation (EMR).
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Theodolite: Rectangular Co ordinates- calculation of latitude
and departure - problems on Rectangular Coordinates -
calculation of Areas - Bowditch Rule
2. Setting Curves: Classification - Definitions - elements of simple
curve - Method of setting out curves - by chord and offset -
chard and angle - solves problem
3. Correlation survey: Purpose - methods of correlation - Direct
Traversing - Co - planning - Weisbach Triangle- solves problem
4. Tacheometry: Principles - systems - Constants Methods -
Stadia method, substance method, Tangential method - merits
and demerits of Tachometry - relation between stadia reading,
Horizontal distance, vertical distance, solves problems.
5. Dip, Strike, Fault problems: Definitions of Dip, Strike, Fault,
True Dip, Apparent Dip-Relation among them- Solving the
problems relating to them - determines the rate and direction
of true dip or strike of a mineral bed- Solving the problems
related to strike and fault - calculate the length of drift, passing
through the fault-Bore hole problems- cross measure drift
problems.
6. Modern surveying Instruments :- Modern surveying Equipment-
Principle of working of - EDM - GPS -advantages of DGPS -
Total station Instrument - applicability in Mines. -key components
of GIS- Remote sensing- Applicability
223
TEXT BOOKS:
1 Dr.B.C.Punmia, Surveying Vol. I,II & III, Pub: Laxmi Publication
New-Delhi
1 Kanetkar, Surveying & Levelling, Vol I & II, Geeta book store
Dhanbad
REFERENCE BOOK:
1. Winniberg, F., Metalliferous Mine Surveying
*****
224
Mine Ventilation
Subject Title : Mine Ventilation
Periods per Week : 04
Periods per Semester : 60
TIME SCHEDULE
No. Periods of Marks Answer Answer
Type Type
1 Introduction Ventilation in
Mine and Natural Ventilation 12 16 02 01
2 Mechanical Ventilation 13 16 02 01
3 Distribution of Mine Air 15 39 3 3
4 Auxiliary Ventilation 10 13 1 1
5 Ventilation survey 10 26 2 2
TOTAL 60 110 10 8
OBJECTIVES
to
1.0 INTRODUCTION VENTILATION IN MINE AND NATURAL
VENTILATION
1.1 Define the term Ventilation.
1.2 State the purpose of Ventilation.
1.3 List the various ventilation systems used in Mines
1.4 Classifies the systems of ventilation-Natural and Mechanical
1.2 Define the term mechanical ventilation
1.3 Explain the terms-Natural ventilation system
1.4 Define the terms down cast and up cast shafts with sketches
1.5 List the conditions suitable for N.V
225
1.6 List the factors influencing the production of N.V.P
1.7 Define Natural ventilating pressure
1.8 Determines Natural Ventilating Pressure
1.9 Define the term motive column
1.10 Applies the formula to determine the height of motive column
1.11 Applies the formula to determine N.V.P.
1.12 Converts height of motive column into preassure and vice versa
1.13 Solve the numerical problems related to N.V.P and Motive
column
1.14 List the Limitations N.V.
2.0 MECHANICAL VENTILATION
2.1 Explain the term mechanical ventilation
2.2 Classifies the mechanical ventilation fans basing on the
principle of working, location, forcing or exhausting.
2.3 Classifies the Centrifugal fans basing on the direction of bent
of blades.
2.4 Explain the principle of working of Centrifugal Fan.
2.5 Describe the constructional details of backward bladed
centrifugal fan and function of each part and drive.
2.6 Explain the reasons for preferring backward bladed fan over
others
2.7 List the merits and de-merits of Centre fugal Fan.
2.8 Explain the Principle of working of Air Screw Fan
2.9 Describe the Constructional Details, Functions of each part
and drive of Air Screw Fan.
2.10 List the Methods of controlling the quantity of Air Delivered by
the Fan
2.11 Compares Air Screw Fan with centrifugal Fan
2.12 Explain the purpose of fan fitting.
2.13 Define the laws of mechanical ventilation
226
2.14 Define the terms manometric efficiency, theoretical depression,
effective depression, mechanical efficiency and over-all
efficiency of mine fan
2.15 State the formula for each of the above
1.16 Solve the numerical problems for each of the above
1.17 Compares between forcing vs exhaust fans
1.18 List the factors for selection of fan for given mine conditions
3.0 UNDERSTAND THE DISTRIBUTION OF MINE AIR
3.1 Explain the coursing of air
3.2 List the ventilation devices used for coursing the air current -
Brattices, stopping's, doors, regulators, air crossing. Explain
the construction, location, field of application of each of the
above devices Explain the effects of regulator on mine ventilation
system.
3.3 Explain the accessional and declensional Ventilation systems.
3.4 List the merits and de-merits of above systems
3.5 Explain the Homotropal and Antitropal Ventilation
3.6 List the sources of leakage of air in a mine.
3.7 List the preventive measures of leakage of air
3.8 Explain the purpose of air lock
3.9 Identifies the location of air lock
3.10 State the laws of mine air friction
3.11 Explain the mine air friction and list the factors effecting the
mine air friction
3.12 Define the term "Equivalent Orifice"
3.13 Derives the formula of equivalent orifice
3.14 Solves the numerical problems on the above formula
3.15 State the laws relating laws governing the passage of Air in a
Mine
3.16 State the Equation to determine the pressure required to
overcome the friction to the air passage in a mine road way
Atkinso0ns and modify Atkinson's equations.
227
3.17 State the relation between pressure, resistance and quantity
through formula
3.18 Applies the formula to determine pressure, Velocity, co-efficient
of friction, area of cross section, quantity and area of rubbing
surface.
3.19 Enumerates the methods of reducing the mine air resistance
3.20 Explain the effects of mine air ways in series and parallel
3.21 State formula for total resistance in series and parallel
3.22 Simple problems to calculate effective resistance when
roadways are connected in series and parallel.
3.23 Explain the splitting of air with sketch
3.24 List the merits of splitting air
3.25 List the Ideal conditions for splitting
3.26 List the limitations of splitting
3.27 Simple problem to calculate effective resistance due to splitting,
change in ventilation pressure and Quantity
4.0 UNDERSTAND THE NECESSITY OF AUXILIARY
VENTILATION
4.1 Explain the Auxiliary ventilation
4.2 List the Conditions requiring auxiliary ventilation system.
4.3 List the different methods of arranging auxiliary ventilation
4.4 Explain the above with sketches
4.5 Explain the location of auxiliary fans
4.6 List the precautions in installing auxiliary fans
4.7 Applies the system of auxiliary ventilation under the following
situations
a) Single Heading
i)With Brattice cloth ii)With Ducting
b)Double Heading
4.8 State the necessity of Booster fans in underground mines.
228
4.9 Define the term Booster Fan
4.10 List the conditions requiring the use of Booster Fan
4.11 List the factors to be consider for location of Booster fans
4.12 Define the term Neutral line
4.13 List the effects of installation of Booster Fans
4.14 Explain ventilation system in Long wall face
4.15 Simple numerical problem on change in resistance, pressure
and Quantity with the installation of booster fan
5.0 KNOW THE VENTILATION SURVEY
5.1 Define the ventilation survey
5.2 Explain the objectives of ventilation survey
5.3 List the different components of ventilation survey
5.4 Explain the objectives of pressure survey
5.5 Explain the different methods of conducting pressure survey
5.6 List the equipment required
5.7 List the precautions for accurate work
5.8 Explain the objectives of quantity survey
5.9 List the methods of quantity survey
5.10 Explain the different methods of quantity survey
5.11 Sketch and Explain the instruments required for quantity survey
5.12 Determines the quantity of Air Flow in Mine Air Way by ventilation
survey
5.13 Explain the term Ventilation Efficiency Quotient (VEQ)
5.14 Explain the objects of qualitative survey
5.15 List the equipment required for qualitative survey
5.16 List the different components of qualitative survey
5.17 Explain the term Kata Factor
5.18 Determines cooling power of Mine Air with help of Kata
Thermometer
229
COURSE CONTENTS
1.0 INTRODUCTION VENTILATION IN MINE AND NATURAL
VENTILATION
Define the term Ventilation, State the purpose of Ventilation.
List the various ventilation systems used in Mine Classifies the
systems of ventilation-Natural and Mechanical Define the term
mechanical ventilation Explain the terms-Natural ventilation
system
Down cast and up cast shafts-Natural ventilation and
Mechanical Ventilation-Conditions suitable for Natural
Ventilation, factors influencing the production of Natural
ventilation-Definition of N.V.P and motive column and their
derivations and its applications in related calculations limitations
of N.V.P
2.0 MECHANICAL VENTILATION
Classification of Mechanical ventilation, classification of
centrifugal fan, constructional details of backward bladed fan
Principle of working off air screw fan controlling the quantity of
air delivered, fittings of mine fan, loss relating to quantity water
gauge etc.-Definition of terms - manometeric efficiency,
theoretical depression, effective depression, mechanical
efficiency, overall efficiency, Factors for selection of mine fans.
3.0 DISTRIBUTION OF MINE AIR
Objects of distribution and coursing the air, ventilation devices
- its construction, location, application regulators- ascensional
and descensional l ventilation homotropal and antitropal
ventilation systems, leakage of air, air lock, computer basis
analysis of mine air distribution.
4.0 AUXILIARY VENTILATION AND BOOSTER VENTILATION
Auxiliary ventilation methods, conditions required for the system
and different methods location of auxiliary fan Booster fan
location, neutral line, effects of installation off booster fans.
5.0 VENTILATION SURVEY
Objectives of ventilation survey, different methods of pressure,
quality, quantity surveys - precautions, accessories etc., kata
thermo meter.
230
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mishra, G.B. Mine Environment and Ventilation, Oxford
University Press, 1992.
2. Hartman, H.L. Mine Ventilation and Air Conditioning, Wiley
Interscience publication, 1993.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Hall, C.J., Mine Ventilation Engineering, Society of Mining
Engineers, New Engineers, New York, Second Edition, 1992.
2. Vutukuri, V.S., Mine Environment Engineering, Trans Tech
Publishers, 1986. 3. McPherson, M.J., Subsurface Ventilation
and Environmental Engineering, Chapman and Hall Publication,
London, 1993.
*****
231
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING LAB PRACTICE
Subject Title : Mechanical Engineering Lab Practice
Periods / Week : 03
TIME SCHEDULE
S.No. Major Topics No. of
Periods
1 Hooks Law verification 08
2 Study of Hydraulic Pumps 10
3 Determination of Flash and Fire
points of Fuels and Lubricants 08
4 Determination of Calorific Values of Fuels 08
5 Performance of IC engines 08
6 Performance of Air Compressors 03
TOTAL 45
OBJECTIVES
to
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1.0 Hooks Law verification
1.1 Draw the stress and strain diagram for Mild Steel and verify
Hooks Law
1.2 Conduct compression test on timber
1.3 Conduct bending test on timber
2.0 Study of Hydraulic Pumps
2.1 Study of reciprocating pumps
2.2 Study of centrifugal pumps
2.3 Study of jet pump
2.4 Determine the pump characteristics of centrifugal pump
2.5 Determine the pump characteristics of reciprocating pump
232
3.0 Determination of Flash and Fire points of Fuels and Lubricants
3.1 Determine the flash and fire points of kerosene and diesel oils
using Able's flash and fire point tester
3.2 Determination of flash and fire points of given lubricating oil
using Cleaveland's Flash and Fire point tester
4.0 Determination of Calorific values of fuels
4.1 Study of Bomb calorimeter and determine calorific value of a
given fuel.
4.2 Study Junkers gas calorimeter to determine calorific value of
gaseous fuel
5.0 Performance of IC engines
5.1 Study of given Petrol engine and determination of IHP, BHP
and mechanical efficiency
5.2 Study of given diesel engine and determination of IHP, BHP
and mechanical efficiency
6.0 Performance of Air Compressors
6.1 Study of air compressor and determination of volumetric
efficiency
COURSE CONTENTS
1.0 Hooks Law verification
Draw the stress and strain diagram for Mild Steel specimen
and verify Hooks Law- compression test on timber- bending
test on timber.
2.0 Study of Hydraulic Pumps
Reciprocating pumps-Study of centrifugal pumps- jet pump-
pump characteristics of centrifugal pump- pump characteristics
of reciprocating pump
3.0 Determination of Flash and Fire points of Fuels and
Lubricants
Determine the flash and fire points of kerosene and diesel oils
usinAbles flash and fire point tester-Determination of given
lubricating oil using Cleaveland g s Flash and Fire point tester
4.0 Determination of Calorific values of fuels
Bomb calorimeter and determine calorific value of a given fuel-
Junkers gas calorimeter to determine calorific value ``+of
gaseous fuel
233
5.0 Performance of IC engines
Study of given Petrol engine and determination of IHP, BHP
and mechanical efficiency- diesel engine and determination of
IHP, BHP and mechanical efficiency
6.0 Performance of Air Compressors
Study of air compressor and determination of volumetric
efficiency
*****
Experiments Key Competences
1. Hooks law verification 1. Understand Regarding UTM
2. Understand size of specimen,
calculation of %elongation and
contraction
3. Understand how to calculate stress
and strain.
4. Understand to draw stress-strain
diagram.
5. Understand marking various properties
on stress-strain diagram of mild steel
specimen
6. Understand how to apply tensile load
and compressive load on timber.
2. Study of Hydraulic Pumps 1. Understand working principle of
Reciprocating and centrifugal pumps.
2. Understand various parts of pumps and
their condition.
3. Understand working principle of jet
pump.
4. Understand various characteristics of
pumps and their efficiency.
5. Understand to plot graph representing
various characteristics of pumps.
3. Determination of flash and 1. Understand various types of fuels and
fire points of fuels and lubricants. their densities.
2. Understand flash and fire points of fuels
and their limits.
234
3. Understand various flash and fire point
tester like Ables flash and fire point
tester and Cleaveland`s Flash and Fire
point tester.
4. Understand to tabulate readings of
different fuels and lubricants.
4. Determination of Calorific 1. Understand various types of solid,
values of Fuels liquid and gaseous fuels and their
calorific values.
2. Undestand combustion process of
various fuels.
3. Understand different types of calori-
meters and their working process.
4. Understand condition of different parts
of Bomb calorimeter and Junker`s gas
calorie meter.
5. Understand formula`s of Higher Calorific
Value and Lower Calorific Value and
calculation.
5. Performance of I.C. Engine 1. Understand different types of engines
and various components of engine.
2. Understand two stroke and four stroke
petrol and diesel engines and their
working principles.
3. Understand to record speed, stroke and
area of the engine cylinder.
4. Understand to tabulate and calculate
B.H.P, I.H.P, and Mechanical efficiency
of the engine.
5. Undestand to plot graphs representing
various characteristics of engines.
6. Performance of Air 1. Understand different types of air
compressor compressor.
2. Understand clearance volume,
Volumetric efficiency of single stage
and multistage air compressors.
Understand to plot graph of various
characteristics of air compressor
235
Mine Planning and Design Lab Practice
Subject Title : Mine Planning and Design Lab
Practice
Periods per semester: 45
TIME SCHEDULE
S.No List of Experiments No. of Periods
1 Estimation of ore reserve based on
bore hole data 5
2 Design of mine opening. 5
3 Design of length of long wall face 3
4. Design of Opencast mine 5
5. Optimum blast design 5
6. Design of mine ventilation system 5
7. Detailed planning by Data mine/ Surpac
software of massive deposit
Detailed planning by Data mine/ Surpac
software of vein type deposit 2
8. Pillar design problem for underground
mines 5
9. Computer analysis of data collected
during Practical Training after First
year summer vacation (Industrial
training) 3
10. Design of a pumping system for a
u/g mine 2
11. Design of support system in U/G
mining 3
12. Preparation of EMP of mines,
collection of various fields data and
their evaluation 2
TOTAL 45
236
OBJECTIVES
to
COURSE CONTENTS
.1. Estimation of ore reserve based on bore hole data.
a) lime stone deposit b) Iron ore ,c) Coal deposit.
2. Design of mine opening
a) Design of drive in a coal mine
b) Design of Raise/ winge metal mine
c) Design of shaft in a coal mine
3. Design of length of long wall face.
a) Design of length of long wall face
b) Problem related to scheduling(CPM/PERT)
4. Opencast mine Design
a) Design of haul road
b) Design of ultimate slope in o/c mine
c) Optimization of shovel dumper combination
5. Optimum Blast design
a) for u/g mine b) for Opencast
6. Design of mine ventilation system
a) Calculation of relative humidity etc
b) Calculation of air quantity
c) Equivalent resistance of mines.
7. a) Detailed planning by Data mine/ Surpac software of massive
deposit
b) Detailed planning by Data mine/ Surpac software of vein
type deposit
8. Pillar design problem for underground mines.
a) Practice of tributary concepts b) Solomon equations
237
9. Computer analysis of data collected during Practical Training
after First year summer vacation (Industrial training)
10. Design of a pumping system for a u/g mine
a) Practice of Pump Capacity calculation for Centrifugal and
Turbine pumps
11. Design of support system in U/G mining
a) Estimation of supports bearing capacity
b) Setting load and yield load of Power supports.
12. Preparation of EMP of mines, collection of various fields data
and their evaluation.
Key Competencies to be achieved by the student
Experiments Key Competency
1 Estimation of ore reserve Understand able to Estimation of Ore

based on bore hole data reserve different bore hole data of different
of lime stone deposit Iron type of deposits regarding scale of map
ore ,Coal deposit.
2 a) Design of drive in a coal Understand and able to design of drive

mine and raise and winge
b) Design of Raise/ winge Understand and able to design shaft
metal mine
c) Design of shaft in a
coal mine
3 Design of length of long Understand and able to calculate length

wall face face required for particular panel
4 Design of Opencast mine Understand and able to design of haul road

ultimate slope in o/c mine,Optimization of
shovel dumper combination
5. Optimum blast design Understand and able to calculate the

Optimum blast design.
6. Design of mine ventilation Understand the Calculation of relative

system humidity ,Calculation of air quantity
And Equivalent resistance of mines.
238
7. Detailed planning by Understand various software working mode
Data mine/ Surpac
software of massive
deposit
Detailed planning by
Data mine/ Surpac
software of vein type
deposit
8. Pillar design problem for Understand tributary concept and able to

underground mines calculate factor safety of pillar.
9. Computer analysis of Understand Field collected data computer

data collected during analysis.
Practical Training after
First year summer
vacation (Industrial
training)
10. Design of a pumping Understand and able to capacity calculation

system for a u/g mine of various pumps
11. Design of support Understand and able to design various

system in U/G mining supports bearing strength
12 Preparation of EMP of Understand various compound while

mines, collection of preparation of EMP report.
various fields data and
their evaluation
239
PROGRAMMING IN C LAB PRACTICE
Subject Title : Programming in C lab Practice
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Exercise on structure of C program
2. Exercise on Keywords and identifiers
3. Exercise on constants and variables
4. Execution of simple C program
5. Exercise on operators and expressions
6. Exercise on special operators
7. Exercise on input and output of characters
8. Exercise on formatted input and output
9. Exercise on simple if statement
10. Exercise on if..else statement
11. Exercise on else..if ladder statement
12. Exercise on switch statement
13. Exercise on conditional operator (? :)
14. Exercise on while statement
15. Exercise on for statement
16. Exercise on do..while statement
17. Exercise on one dimensional arrays
18. Exercise on two dimensional arrays
19. Exercise on structure
20. Exercise on array of structures.
240
student
Experiments (No. of
Periods)
1 Exercise on For a given C program, Identify different
structure of C identify the different building building block in a C
program blocks program
2 Exercise on For a given C program Identify different

Keywords and identify the keywords and keywords
identifiers identifiers Check whether the
keywords are in
lowercase
Differentiate identifiers
and keywords
3 Exercise on For a given C program Identify the constants

constants and identify the constants and Identify the variables
variables variables Declare variables with
proper names
Know the assignment
of values to variables
4 Execution of Execute a simple C program Acquaint with C

simple C program program editing
Compile the program
Rectify the syntactical
errors
Execute the program
5 Exercise on Write a C program that uses Identify different

operators and different arithmetic arithmetic operators
expressions operators Build arithmetic
expressions
Identify the priorities of
operators
Evaluate arithmetic
expression
Compile the program
errors
Execute the program
241
Check the output for its
correctness
6 Exercise on Write a C program that Identify different special

s p e c i a l uses special operators operators
operators Build expressions using
special operators
Compile the program
errors
Execute the program
Check the output for its
correctness
7 Exercise on input Write a C program for Know the use of getchar()

and output of reading and writing function
characters characters Know the use of putchar()
function
Compile the program
errors
Execute the program
Check whether the correct
output is printed for the
given input
8 Exercise on Write a C program using Know the use of format

formatted input formatted input and string for different types of
and output formatted output data in scanf() function
Know the use of format
string for different types of
data in printf() function
Check whether the data is
read in correct format
Check whether the data is
printed in correct format
9 Exercise on Write a C program using Build a relational

simple if simple if statement expression
statement Use the if statement for
decision making
Rectify the syntax errors
Check the output for
correctness
242
10 Exercise on Write a C program using Build a relational
if..else statement if..else statement expression
Use the if..else statement
for decision making
correctness
11 Exercise on Write a C program using Use else..if ladder

else..if ladder else..if ladder statement statements with correct
statement syntax
Debug logical errors
correctness
12 Exercise on Write a C program using Use switch statement with

s w i t c h switch statement correct syntax
statement Identify the differences
between switch and else..if
ladder
correctness
13 Exercise on Write a C program using Build the three expressions

c o n d i t i o n a l ( ? : ) conditional operator for conditional operator
operator Use conditional operator
with correct syntax
Differentiate conditional
operator and if..else
statement
14 Exercise on Write a C program using Build the termination

while statement while statement condition for looping
Use while statement with
correct syntax
Check whether correct
number of iterations are
performed by the while
loop
243
15 Exercise on for Write a C program using Build the initial, increment

statement for statement and termination conditions
for looping
Use for statement with
correct syntax
performed by the for loop
Differentiate for and while
statements
16 Exercise on Write a C program using Build the termination

d o . . w h i l e do statement condition for looping
statement Use do statement with
correct syntax
performed by the while
loop
Differentiate do..while,while
and for statements
17 Exercise on one W rite a C program to Create a one dimensional

d i m e n s i o n a l create and access one array with correct syntax
arrays dimensional array Store elements into array
Read elements from array
Validate boundary
conditions while accessing
elements of array
Check for the correctness
of output for the given input
18 Exercise on two W rite a C program to Create a two dimensional

d i m e n s i o n a l create and access two array with correct syntax
arrays dimensional array Store elements into array
244
Read elements from array
Validate boundary
conditions while accessing
elements of array
19 Exercise on Write a C program using Define a structure with

structure structure correct syntax
Identify different members
of a structure
Declare a structure variable
Access different members
of structure
Observe the size of the
structure
20 Exercise on array W rite a C program to Define a structure with

of structures create an array of correct syntax
structures and store and Identify different members
retrieve data from that of a structure
array Declare a structure variable
Create an array of structure
Access individual element
of the array of structure
Access different members
of structure
observations
245
MINE SURVEYING LAB PRACTICE- II
Subject Title : Mine Surveying Lab Practice- II
TIME SCHEDULE
S.No Major Topics No. of Periods
1 Theodolite Traversing 10
2 Curve setting 10
3 Tacheometry 10
4 Field Exercises using total station 10
5 Surveying with GPS 05
6 Survey Camp --
Total 45
OBJECTIVES
to
1.0 Know the parts, functions and uses of Transit theodolite.
1.1 Plot the traverse by meridian method
1.2 Plot the traverse survey by Rectangular co- ordinates
2.0 Know the Triangulation.
2.1 Carries out Extension of the given base line.
3.0 Know the Curve Setting.
3.1 Sets out curve by chord and offset.
3.2 Sets out curve by Chord and Angle.
246
4.0 Know the Tacheometry survey.
4.1 Determines the tacheometric constants.
4.2 Determines the R.L of points by fixed hair method.
4.3 Determines the R.L.s of points by tangential method.
5.0 Field Exercises using total station
5.1 Orientation of total station to true north
5.2 To measure distance between two given points using total
station
5.3 To measure angle between to surveying stations
5.4 To measure multiple sets (rounds) of observations with total
station
5.5 To carryout the traverse of a given area
5.6 Calculation of traverse area using total station
5.7 Calculation of perimeter of given surveyed area
5.8 Find out the height of remote object using Remote elevation
method
6.0 Survey Camp
6.1 Correlation survey
6.2 Subsidence survey
6.3 Triangulation
6.4 Traversing
6.5 Determination of gradient of a roadway
6.6 Setting out curves
Note: 25 marks out of 100 are allotted for Survey camp
COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Know the theodolite traversing.
Traverse survey by direct bearing method- traverse survey by
double foresight method- Plot the traverse by meridian method
and rectangular co- ordinates
247
2.0 Know the Curve Setting.
Sets out curve by chord and offset-Sets out curve by Chord
and Angle.
3.0 Know the Tacheometry survey.
Determines the tachometric constants- R.L of points by fixed
hair method- R.L.s of points by tangential method.
4.0 Field Exercises using total station
Single station setup and carry out surveying (radiation method),
- Carry out traverse. Measurement of -angle between the
stations -distance between the two given survey stations-
Remote object height by Remote elevation method
5.0 Surveying with GPS
Procedure to capture geo-spacial co-ordinates using GPS -
Method to transfer the GPS info into Total station and GIS
software.
6.0 Survey Camp
Correlation survey-Subsidence survey-Triangulation-
Traversing-Determination gradient of a roadway-Setting out
curves.
248
Key Competencies to be achieved by the student
1 Traverse survey by direct Conduct traverse survey by direct bearing
bearing method method (continuous Azimuth method).
Measure the bearings of all the lines of
traverse.
2 Traverse survey by double Conduct traverse survey by double foresight
foresight method method. Measure the included angles of
the traverse.
3 Plotting Plot the traverse by meridian method and
rectangular coordinates. Find the Latitudes
and Departures of the lines of the traverse.
4 Various types of theodolites Study of various other types of theodolites
5 Extension of the base line. Carries out Extension of the given base
line by theodolite. Measure the angles of
the triangle. Use the trigonometrical
formulas.
6 Set out curve by chord and Set out curve by chord and offset by chain
offset and Cross-Staff.
7 Set out curve by Chord and Set out curve by Chord and Angle method
Angle. using theodolite.
8 Determine the tacheometric Determines the tacheometric constants by

constants. Fixed hair method
9 Determine the R.L of points Determines the R.L of points by fixed hair
by fixed hair method. method by tacheometer.
10 Determine the R.L.s of points Determines the R.L.s of points by

by tangential method. tangential method by tacheometer.
11 Plotting Plotting of triangulation survey of the given

area.
12 Carry out profile leveling Carry out profile leveling survey of the given
area and plot its cross section.
13 Subsidence survey Carry out subsidence survey on a given

area and plot the subsidence profile.
14 Ploting contours Plot the contours of the given area.
249
MINING MACHINERY LAB PRACTICE
Subject Title : Mining Machinery Lab Practice
Periods per Semester: 45
TIME SCHEDULE
1 Different cross sections of wire
ropes, rope capping and cables used
in mines 6
2 Various equipment used in rope
haulage systems and Signalling system
in haulages 6
3 Tensioning arrangement in belt
conveyor and Winding System
Equipments. 4
4 Different types of pumps used in
mining, study the characteristics
of pumps 6
5 Salient features of drilling machine 6
6 Different types of Chock shield
supports used in Long wall Mining 3
7 Different types of road headers used
in mines and salient features of DERDS 8
8 Constructional features of Flame Proof
apparatus, Gate end box to connect
electrical equipments in mines 6
Total 45
250
OBJECTIVES
1.0 Different cross sections of wire ropes and rope capping
1.1 Identify and sketch the different types of wire ropes
1.2 Observe the number of strands and wires in the stands.
1.3 Observe a types of core used in each wire
1.4 Find out the field application of each wire rope
1.5 Calculate bending factor, factor of safety of each wire rope
1.6 Sketch the different types of rope capping
1.7 Observe the condition under which each type of rope capping
is used
1.8 Know the recapping and splicing of wire ropes
1.9 Sketch different types of cables used in mines
1.10 Know the different types of cables used in underground mines
for supplying three phase electric power.
2.0 Various equipment used in rope haulage systems
2.1 Sketch the direct rope haulage system used in mines and
observe the braking system present in it.
2.2 Sketch the endless rope haulage system used in mines and
also sketch various attaching devices like small man clip
2.3 Sketch the various safety devices used in haulage system
2.4 Draw and know the arrangement for loading and unloading of
skip at pit-bottom And pit-top respectively.
2.5 Study of safety devices provided of haulage roads and
locomotives - Exhaust conditioning and flame traps &
underground Battery charging station layout
2.6 Study of aerial rope ways - driving/tensioning/loading/unloading
and angle stations, Calculations.
3.0 Tensioning arrangement in belt conveyor and Winding
System Equipments.
3.1 Sketch and know the tandem drive (Tensioning arrangement)
system used in conveyor haulage system.
251
3.2 Sketch and know the various safety devices used in conveyor
haulage system.
3.3. Study of various types of head gear-fleet angle, Study of shaft
fittings-signal systems, guides, safety dogs and protective
roofing, study of guides- methods of support and tensioning
arrangements.
3.4. Study of fittings of winding engines- drums, brakes, and depth
indicators
4.0 Different types of pumps used in mining and study the
characteristics of pumps
4.1 Sketch the reciprocating pump, Name its parts and know the
Functioning of each parts.
4.2 Knows the method of starting and stopping of turbines pump
4.3 Draw the Characteristic curves of Centrifugal/ Turbine pumps.
5.0 Salient features of drilling machine
5.1 Sketch the electrical coal drill used in mine
5.2 Sketch and know the working of sun and planet gear used in
coal drill
5.3 Sketch the different types of drill rods used in mining.
6.0 Chock shield supports used in Long wall Mining
6.1 Sketch and know the Chock shield supports used in Long wall
Mining.
7.0 Different types of road headers used in mines and salient
features of DERDS
7.1 Know about principle of working of road headers
7.2 Draw the diagram of DOSCO road header used in mines.
7.3 Sketch and know about principle of working of DERDS.
8.0 Flameproof and Intrinsically safe apparatus
8.1 Know the constructional features of Flame Proof Apparatus
8.2 Draw the diagram of Flame proof apparatus
8.3 Sketch and know the principle of working of Gate End
Switchgear and it's safety features
252
8.4 Know various methods of connecting Cables to Gate End Box
8.5 Layout of Electrical power distribution in mines.
8.6 Electrical layout for distribution of power supply from gate end
panel to the coal face equipment.
COURSE CONTENTS
1.0 Different cross sections of wire ropes ,rope capping and
Cables
Types of wire ropes types of core used in each wire- field
application of each wire rope-Calculate bending factor, factor
of safety of each wire rope-Sketch the different types of rope
capping-Observe the condition under which each type of rope
capping is used-Recapping and splicing of wire ropes-Cross
section of Cables
2.0 Various equipment used in rope haulage systems
The direct rope haulage system used in mines and observe
the types of motor used, braking system present in it- endless
rope haulage system used in mines and also sketch various
attaching devices like small man clip- various safety devices
used in haulage system- Signalling system in haulage road
way
3.0 Tensioning system in conveyor haulage
Sketch the Tensioning system used in conveyor-The various
safety devices used in conveyor.
4.0 Different types of pumps used in mining, study the
Reciprocating pump and know about the method of starting
and stopping of reciprocating pump- turbine pump and observe
the functioning of balancing disk
5.0 Salient features of drilling machine
Electrical coal drill used in mine- working of sun and planet
gear used in coal drill - different types of drill rods used in mining.
253
6.0 Chock shield supports used in Long wall Mining
Key components of Chock shield supports - Sketch the Chock
shield support
7.0 Different types of road headers used in mines and salient
features of DERDS
Principle of working of road headers-Draw the diagram of
DOSCO road header used in mines-Principle of working of
DERDS.
8.0 Flameproof and Intrinsically safe apparatus - Salient features
of Flame Proof Apparatus - Gate end Box - Methods of making
circuit intrinsically safe apparatus and Flame Proof Enclosure
- Methods of connecting cable to Gate End Box.
Key components to be achieved by the student
11 Different cross sections Learns Various cross sections of

of wire ropes ,rope Wire ropes
capping and Cables Learns methods of capping wire ropes
Learns methods of splicing
Learns Various cross sections Mine
Cables
2 Various equipment used Learns the direct rope haulage

in rope haulage systems system
Learns endless rope haulage system
Learns various attachment devices
used in endless haulage system
Learns various safety devices used
in haulage
Learns the layout of signalling system
used in haulage roadways
3 Tensioning system in Learns the methods of tensioning

conveyor haulage used in conveyor
Learns the tandem drive of tensioning
arrangement in belt conveyor
4 Different types of pumps Learns different types of pumps used

used in mining, study the in Mines
254
Learns constructional reciprocating
pump
Learns the methods of starting and
stoping of turbine pump.
Learns the constructional features of
turbine pump
Learns the purpose of Balancing Disc
used in turbine pump
5 Salient features of drilling Learns Salient features of Electrical

machine coal drill
Learns the Sun and Planet gear used
in Electrical coal drill
Learns various types of Drill bits used
with electric drill
6 Chock shield supports Learns different types of Chock shield

used in Long wall Mining supports
Learns the constructional details of
Chock Shield support
Learns the purpose of various
components of Chock shield support
7 Different types of road Learns various types of road headers

headers used in mines used in mines
and salient features of Learns constructional features of
DERDS DOSCO road header
Learns the important components of
SERDS and DERDS.
8 Flameproof and Learns the constructional features of

Intrinsically safe Flame proof apparatus
apparatus Learns the constructional features of
Gate end Box along with it's safety
features
Learns the methods of making the
circuit intrinsically safe
255
V SEMESTER
256
V SEMESTER

/Week Semester
cal tion onal Exam
Hours Marks Marks
THEORY
MNG-501 Surface Mining 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-502 Mine Management

and Entrepreneurship 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-503 Mine Legislation and

General safety 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-504 Rock Mechanics

and Strata Control 4 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-505 505(A)Advanced
(Elective) Surveying
505(B)Mineral Pro- 4 60 3 20 80 100

cessing and Quality
Control

Engineering 4 60 3 20 80 100
PRACTICAL
MNG-507 Rock Mechanics and

Strata Control Lab
Practice 6 90 3 40 60 100
MNG-508 508(A) Advanced

(Elective) Mine Surveying
Lab Practice 6 90 3 40 60 100
508(B)Computer
application in Min-
ing Lab Practice

Engineering Lab
Practice 3 45 3 40 60 100
MNG-510 Project Work 3 45 3 40 60 100
TOTAL 24 18 630 30 280 720 1000
257
SURFACE MINING
Subject Title : Surface Mining
TIME SCHEDULE
Type Type
1 Basics and Methods

of open Cast Mining 12 26 2 2
2 Over burden removal
and extraction of
coal reserves 08 16 2 1
3 OCP Machinary :-
1. Excavation
Machinary
2.Auxiliary
Operations
3.Transportation
Machinary 10 16 2 1
4 Drilling and Blast-
ing in open Castmines 08 13 1 1
5 Types of Transport 08 13 1 1
6 Reclamation & Mine
Closure Plan: 06 13 1 1
7 Safety and Precaui
tionary Measures
in Open Cast Mines: 08 13 1 1
Total 60 110 10 08
258
OBJECTIVES
to
1.0 Applicability:
1.1 Define terms Pit, surface mining, Opencast mining, Strip mining
and Quarrying.
1.2 Basic Parameters: Size of a mine area.Pit depth.Bench height,
width and slope.Define pit slope, angle of repose of OB dump,
Overall slope of OB dump and Design pit slope.Cutoff
grade.Stripping ratio.Determination of mine parameters.Annual
production and life of mine.
1.3 Advantages and Disadvantages of opencast mining.
1.4 Opening up of deposits: Explain Box cut, Site selection and
driving, Formation of benches, trenches, driving of entry and
opening trenches. Different methods of opening up of the
deposits.
1.5 Laying of haul roads .
2.0. Over Burden Removal and Extraction of coal Reserves:
2.1 Systems of overburden removal and disposal
2.2 Site selection for disposal of Overburden
2.3 Design of waste dumps.
2.4 Selection of equipment, bench parameters
2.5 Explain working of rippers, shovels, draglines, shovel-dragline
combination and bucket wheel excavators.
2.6 Explain various Casting methods
2.7 Layouts: Basic layouts for flat, horizontal, inclined and steep
deposits strip mining layouts.
2.8 Exploitation of coal over developed coal pillars : shovel-dumper
combination
2.9 Explain In pit crushing and conveying.
2.10 Explain High wall mining.
2.11 Explain Surface miner.
259
2.12 Define Placer mining.
2.13 Define Hydraulicking.
2.14 Define Dredging.
2.15 Define Leaching
3.0 OCP Machinary
3.1. Excavation machinary
3.2. Auxiliary operations
3.3. Transportation machinary
3.4 Different Types of Excavators used in Open Pits.
3.5 Explain various Capacity and Types of Shovels.
3.6 Explain Dragline.
3.7 Hydraulic Excavators
3.8 Define Multi Bucket Excavators.
3.9 Define Front End Loaders and Back hoe loaders
3.10 Define Selection Criteria of above and their construction,
operations.
3.11 Suitability and Applicability
3.12 Calculation of their production
3.13 Explain Bulldozers.
3.14 Explain Scrapers
3.15 Explain Graders.
3.16 Explain Tractor Shovels or Front End Loaders
4.0 Drilling and Blasting in Open Cast Mmines
4.1 Explain Deep hole blasting.
4.2 Development and use of high slurry explosives.
4.3 Control blasting techniques.
4.4 Use of Bulk Explosives and SMS/SME.
4.5 Explain Drilling and Blasting in Granite quarry.
4.6 Explain the practices of Drilling and Blasting in Iron ore surface
260
mining.
4.7 Explain secondary blasting, blasting hazards- noise, ground
vibrations, fly rock, dust and air over pressure, sleeping of
holes and dealing with misfires in Open cast mines.
4.8 Blasting economics
5.0 Types of Transport
5.1 Rail, Road, Pipe Line, Conveyors and Aerial ropeway
transportation system, their suitability
5.2 Define High angle Belt Conveyors
5.3 Explain Tripper cars.
5.4 Explain Stackers.
5.5 Reclaimers
5.6 In pit crushing and conveying layout.
5.7 Spreaders.
6.0 Reclamation & Mine Closure Plan
6.1 Reclamation of surface mining, degradation of land.
6.2 Mine Closure Plan
7.0. Safety and pre Cautionary Measures in Open Cast Mines
7.1 Safety in opencast and surface operations
7.2 Spoil dumps and fires in opencast mines.
7.3 Safety issues in the use of dumpers in OC mines.
7.4 Automatic Fire Protection system in Surface Mining Equipment.
7.5 Slope Stability in OC mines and Design of slope in OB and
Coal benches
7.6 Gradient of the haul roads, berms, dividers, Super elevation,
Blind curves and lighting etc.,
7.7 Fly rocks, air over pressure.
7.8 Dangers due to electricity, HEMM and fire on HEMM.
7.9 Sliding of OB/Coal benches, Sliding of OB dumps
7.10 Problems associated with failure of slopes and various
261
controlling methods.
Text Books:
1. Kennedy, B.A., Surface Mining - 2nd Edition, SME, New York,
1990.
2. Hartman H.L., Introductory Mining Engineering, John Wiley and
Sons, 2002.
3. Hartman, H.L. (Ed.), SME Mining Engg. Handbook Vol. I and II,
Society for Mining, Metallurgy, and Exploration, Inc., Colorado,
1992.
4. Pfleider, E. P, Surface Mining, 1st Edition, New York, 1968.
5. Konya, C.J. and Walter, E.J., Surface Blast Design, New Jersey,
1990.
6. Rzhevsky V., Open pit Mining Operations, Mir Publications,
1971.
Reference Books:
1. Amitosh De, Heavy Earth Moving Machinery, Lovely Prakashan,
Dhanbad, 2000.
2. Hustrulid, W. and Kuchta, M, Open Pit Mine Planning & Design,
Vol. 1, Fundamentals, Balkema, Rotterdam, 1998.
3. Singh, R.D., Principles and Practices of Modern Coal Mining,
New Age International (P) Ltd., Publishers, 1997.
4. Mishra G.B., Surface Mining, Dhanbad Publishers, Dhanbad,
1990.
*****
262
MINE MANAGEMENT AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP
Subject Title : Mine Management and
Entrepreneurship
TIME SCHEDULE
Type Type
1 Mine Management
Entrepreneurship and
organisational structure 24 40 5 3
2. Industrial Dispute Act-
1947 and Total Quality
Management 12 24 2 2
3 Recruitments and
Training 9 12 1 1
4 Network analysis 15 24 2 2
Total 60 110 10 08
OBJECTIVES
1.0 Mine Management Entrepreneurship and Organisational
Structure
1.1 State the role of Mining Industry in economic development of
our country.
1.2 State the applicability of different types of ownership of Industries
with reference to mining.
1.3 Define the term Management
1.4 Explain the different functions of Management
1.5 State the Principle of scientific Management and list its
characteristics.
1.6 Define the term organisation
263
1.7 List the different departments in Mining Industry.
1.8 Draw the organisation chart of a conventional Underground
mine
1.9 Draw the organisation chart of a mechanised Long wall mine
1.10 Draw the organisation chart of a mechanised Opencast mine.
1.11 Explain the concepts of Entrepreneurship
1.12 Define the term Entrepreneurship
1.13 List the factors that motivate entrepreneur
1.14 State the risks and rewards encountered by an entrepreneur in
respect of finance, career and personality
1.15 Explain the requirements of an entrepreneur
1.16 Explain the Maslow's theory of motivation
1.17 Explain Traits theory of leadership and Behavioural theory of
leadership
1.18 Explain the method of product selection
1.19 Explain the method of site selection
1.20 Explain decision making process
1.21 Explain communication process
1.22 List the financial assistance programs
1.23 Explain the role of banks in the development of entrepreneur
1.24 State the statutory requirement in setting up a mining industry
1.25 Conduct demand and market surveys
1.26 Evaluates Techno-economic factors
1.27 Explain the break even Analysis
1.28 Explain the terminology used in break even Analysis
1.29 Solve simple numerical problems on Break even Analysis
1.30 Differentiate sellers and Buyer's market
1.31 Market conditions, Monopoly, Oligopoly and Perfect competition
1.32 Feasibility study report.
264
2.00 Industrial Dispute act-1947 and Total Quality Management
2.1 Define the term Industrial Dispute act-1947
2.2 State various causes and adverse effects of Industrial Dispute.
2.3 List various provisions of ID act
2.4 Define the term works committee, voluntary organisation, strike
and lockout
2.5 Explain the conciliation officer and Bord of conciliation
2.6 Explain the court of enquiry
2.7 Explain the Industrial tribunal
2.8 Define the total quality management
2.9 Discuss ISO standards and list the constituents of ISO 9000
series of quality systems.
2.10 State the outstanding of features and drawbacks of ISO 9000
series of standards.
2.11 Know the Indian Standards on quality systems
3.0 Know the Recruitments and Training
3.1 Define the term recruitment and training
3.2 State various methods of recruitment process.
3.3 State Essential Qualification of persons recruited in mines under
various category.
3.4 Explain different category training as per VTC Rules
3.5 Explain various training programmes.
4.0 Network analysis
4.1 Define network analysis
4.2 State the objectives of network analysis
4.3 Define the various terms CPM, Activity, Predecessor event,
Merge and burst event, dummy activity
4.4 List the guide lines for construction of network diagrams
4.5 List the merits and demerits of CPM
4.6 Solve simple problems on CPM
265
4.7 Define the term PERT
4.8 List the time estimate in PERT
4.9 State the methodology of PERT
4.10 List the merits and demerits of PERT
4.11 Compare PERT Vs CPM
4.12 Solve the simple problems on PERT
COURSE CONTENTS
1.0 Mine management Entrepreneurship and organisational
structure
Role of mining Industry in country's economic development,
ownerships of Industries, Management, organisation, in the
context of mining Industry.
Motivating factors, Risks and Rewards, requirements of
entrepreneur, products selection. site solution, , setting of a
Mine-Theory of motivation-Leader ship-Decision making
process-communication process- Market survey., Demand
survey techno-economic-Break even analysis- Sellers and
Buyers market- Feasibility study report
2.0 Industrial Dispute Act-1947 and Total Quality Management
Industrial Dispute act-1947, causes f or Industrial Dispute
adverse effects for Industrial Dispute various provisions of ID
act works committee, conciliation officer, Bord of conciliation
court of enquiry, industrial tribunal, voluntary organisation ,strike
and lockout-Total Quality Management
Definition of TQM-constituents of ISO 9000 series-Merits and
drawbacks of ISO-Indian standards of Quality system .
3.0 Recruitments and training
Recruitment and training, Methods of recruitment - Essential
Quality of person different category training as per VTC Rules
- Training programmes
4.0 Network analysis
Definition and Objectives of network analysis-construction of
266
network diagrams-Definitions of various terms-Merits and
demerits of CPM-Simple problems on CPM-PERT-Definition,
methodology, time estimates -Simple problems on PERT-
Compression CPM Vs PERT
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Prasad, S.D. and Rakesh., A Critical Appraisal of Mine
Legislations. Lovely Prakashan, 1995. Dhanbad.
2. Mine Disasters of India, NCSM Publication. 8. Kejriwal, B.K.,
Safety in Mines, Gyan Khan Prakashan, Dhanbad, 1994.
3. Vocational Training Rules, Lovely Prakashan, Dhanbad, 1995.
4. The Workmen's compensation Act, 1923, Ram Narainlal Beni
Prasad, Allahabad, 1995.
5 Kejriwal, B.K., Safety in Mines, Gyan Khan Prakashan,
Dhanbad, 1994
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Mine Management, Legislation and Ground safety:S.Ghattak.
2. Mine Management : V.N.Singh
3. Industrial Management :O.P.Khanna
4. Industrial Management : Jain and Bhanu.
*****
267
MINE LEGISLATION AND GENERAL SAFETY
Subject Title : Mine Legislation and General
Safety
TIME SCHEDULE
Type Type
1 Mines Act 1952 10 16 2 1

2 Mines Rules 1955 10 16 2 1
3 Coal Mines Regulations 20 39 3 3
4 Metalliferious Mines
Regulations 10 26 2 2
5 Indian Electricity Rules
applicable to mines 10 13 1 1
Total 60 110 10 08
OBJECTIVES
to know
1.0 Mine Act 1952
1.1 State the necessity of Mine Legislation
1.2 List the different laws applicable to mines
1.4 Define the term Adult, Agent, Chief Inspector, Inspector, Relay
and Shift, Serious bodily injury, reportable injury, Week, Day,
Minerals, Qualified Medical Practitioner.
1.5 List the situations exempted from application of the Mines Act.
1.6 List the provisions related to committee constructed under
section 12.
1.7 List the provisions related to the drinking water.
268
1.8 List the provisions related to employment of a persons below
18 years of age
1.9 List the provisions of Act in respect of notice to be given about
accidents
1.10 List the provisions related to hours of work below ground and
above ground
1.11 List the provisions of limitations of daily hours of work including
overtime
1.12 Enumerates the provisions of Act, related to leave wages
2.0 Mine Rules 1955
2.1 Define the terms, leave, calendar year, certifying surgeon, court
of enquiry, ordinarily employed.
2.2 List provisions related to lavatories, urinals on surface and
underground
2.3 List the rules related to First Aid
2.4 List the provisions related to Pit safety committee
2.5 List the rules related to qualification, appointment and duties of
Welfare Officer.
2.6 List the rules related to qualification, appointment and duties of
Workmen Inspector.
2.7 List the provisions related to Welfare eminities.
3.0 Know the provisions of CMR
3.1 Define the terms; approved safety lamp, Banks man, competent
person, Ventilating District, Working place
3.2 Know the other terms limited to CMR only.
a) Define the terms shot firer, over man, assistant or under
manager, on setter, firery seam, gassy seam of first, second
and third degree, General body of air.
3.3 List the provisions related to board of mining examinations.
3.4 List the provisions related to practical experience for managers
examinations.
3.5 List the provisions related to practical experience of candidates
for sirdars and shotfirers examinations.
269
3.6 List the provisions related to qualification and appointment of
managers.
3.7 List the provisions related to appointment of Under Manager /
Asst. Manager.
3.8 List the duties and responsibilities of manager
3.9 List the duties and responsibilities of Safety Officer
3.10 List the duties and responsibilities of Over-Man
3.11 List the provisions related to Haulage roads
3.12 List the provisions related to travelling roadways.
3.13 List the provisions related to open cast working
3.14 List the provisions related to setting of supports
3.15 List the provisions related to steep workings.
3.16 List the provisions related to development
3.17 List the provisions related to work, depillaring operation
3.18 List the provisions related to and contiguous workings
3.19 List the provisions related to systematic timbering rules under
CMR
3.20 List the provisions related to precaution against dust
3.21 List the provisions related to precaution against erruption of
gas
3.22 List the provisions related to dangers from underground
inundation
3.23 List the provisions related to precautions after a fire has broken
out.
3.24 Know the provisions related to standards of ventilation
3.25 List the precautions against fire in the ventilation
3.26 List the precautions against inflammable gases and noxious
gases
3.27 List the precautions against the contrabands
3.28 List the provisions related to storage of explosives, Magazines
transport of explosives
270
3.29 List the provisions reserve station, drilling, charging stemming
3.30 List the provisions related to finding of shot holes electrical shot
firings
3.31 List the provisions related to inspections before shot firing
3.32 List the provisions related to dealing with misfires.
3.33 List the provisions related to use and supply of helmets
3.34 List the provisions related to use and supply of other protective
equipment.
4.0 Know the provisions of Metalliferious Mines Regulations
4.1 Definations:- Auxiliary fan, Bellman, Landing, Material,
Metalliferous mine, Socket, "Winze or Raise".
4.2 State the age and general qualifications etc., of candidates
appearing for mining board examinations.
4.3 State the validity of foremens, mates, engine - drivers, blasters
and gas testing certificates as per MMR.
4.4 State the retirement age for managers and officers etc., as per
MMR.
4.5 List the qualifications of inspectors.
4.6 List the duties of magazine incharges.
4.7 List the provisions of ladderways.
4.8 List the regulations related to suspension gear.
4.9 List the provisions of examinations of winding equipment.
4.10 List the provisions related to appointment of winding engine
men and their duties.
5.0 Indian Electricity Rules Applicable to Mines
5.1 List the provisions related to application of Indian Electrical rules
applicable to mines
5.2 List the provisions related to Notices - given as per rules
5.3 List the provisions related to Lighting, communications and fire
precautions
5.4 List the provisions related to Method of earthing
271
5.5 List the provisions related to Voltage limits
5.6 List the provisions related to Cables
5.7 List the provisions related to Flexible cables
5.8 List the provisions related to Precautions where gas exists
5.9 List the provisions related to Shot-firing
5.10 List the provisions related to Signalling
5.11 List the provisions related to Earthing of neutral points
COURSE CONTENTS
1 Mines Act 1952
Meaning of the terms, Mine Act, Regulations, Rules, Bye-laws,
standing orders, and situations under which act does not apply.
Committee - Notice of Accident - Provisions of Mines Act in
respect of Drinking water health and hyginie conservancy, Hour
and limitations of Employment - Employment of person below
18 years - Leave with wages.
2 Mines Rules 1955
Mine Rules related to drinking water, lavatories, urinals with on
surface and in underground first aid, - Ambulance, Hours, and
limitations of Employment - with wages and over time - Pit
safety committee - Workmen Inspector - Welfare Offier.
3 Coal Mines Regulations
Important definitions, regulations related to notice of accidents
duties of managers, Asst/under Managers, Overman, foreman
and surveyor, Mine plans and sections. Mine ventilation, mine
lighting and safety equipment and types of
fences(Miscellaneous) - Duties of Manager, Safety Officer,
Overman - Haulage and Travelling road ways - Open cast
workings - Setting of supports - Steep workings, development
and depillaring operations - Contagious workings - Standard of
ventilation - Contrabands - Protective equipments.
4 Metalliferious Mines Regulations
Auxiliary fan, Bellman, Landing, Material, Metalliferous mine,
272
Socket, "Winze or Raise" - Age and general qualifications of
candidates appearing for mining board examinations - Validity
of foremens, mates, engine - drivers, blasters and gas testing
certificates - Retirement age for managers and officers -
Qualifications of inspectors - Duties of magazine incharges -
Provisions of ladderways - Regulations related to suspension
gear - Provisions of examinations of winding equipment -
Provisions related to appointment of winding engine men and
their duties.
5 Indian Electricity rules applicable to mines
Communications and fire precautions - Method of earthing -
Earthing - Voltage limits-Switchgear and terminals-Cables-
Flexible cables-Precautions where gas exists-Shot-firing-
Signaling- Earthing of neutral points.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mines Act 1952, Lovely Prakashan, Dhanbad, 1995.
2. Coal Mines Regulations, 1961, Lovely Prakashan, Dhanbad,
1995.
3. Metal Mines Regulations, 1961, Lovely Prakashan, Dhanbad,
1995.
4. DGMS Circulars, By National Council of Safety in Mines,
Dhanbad, 1995.
5. Mines rules, 1955, Lovely Prakashan, Dhanbad, 1995.
6. The Mines Rescue Rules, 1986, Lovely Prakashan, Dhanbad,
1995.
7. The Indian Electricity Rules, 1995, Lovely Prakashan, Dhanbad,
1995.
8. The Payment of Wages Act, 1936, Ram Narain Lal Beni Prasad,
1995.
9. Vocational Training Rules, Lovely Prakashan, Dhanbad, 1995.
10. The Workmen's compensation Act, 1923, Ram Narainlal Beni
Prasad, Allahabad, 1995.
11. Kejriwal, B.K., Safety in Mines, Gyan Khan Prakashan,
Dhanbad, 1994.
*****
273
ROCK MECHANICS AND STRATA CONTROL
Subject Title : Rock Mechanics and Strata
control
TIME SCHEDULE
Type Type
1 Introductory concepts
and Ground forces 03 3 1 -
2 The Stress analysis and
stress distribution in
underground mine 12 26 2 2
3 Geo Mechanical
properties of Rocks and
methods of determination 12 26 2 2
4 Theories of rock failure,
rock behaviour and
stress measuring devices 13 16 2 1
5 Subsidence 10 13 1 1
6 Strata control 10 26 2 2
Total 60 110 10 08
OBJECTIVES
to
1.0 Introductory Concepts and Ground Forces
1.1 Define the term Rock mechanics.
1.2 State the scope of Rock Mechanics in Mining
1.3 List the areas of application of Rock Mechanics in Mining.
1.4 Define the terms a) Stress b) Strain c) Poisons ratio
274
1.5 Define the terms a) Young's Modulus b) Bulk Modulus c) Rigidity
Modulus
1.6 State the relation between various Modulus of elasticity
1.7 Define the terms a) Insitu stress b) Induced stress
1.8 Simple numerical problems in calculation of stress , strain,
various modulus of elasticity
2.0 Knows the Stress analysis and stress distribution around
mine opening
2.1 List different types of stresses on a block of rock in field in
three dimension space.
2.2 Analysis of stress and strain in three dimensions
2.3 State the relation between vertical and lateral stresses
2.4 Derive the relation between vertical strain to the lateral strain
2.5 Draw the normal stress and shear stress diagram in a 2D
model
2.6 Explain the stress distribution in a 2D model
2.7 Define the terms a) Cohesion b) Angle of internal friction in
relation to the failure plane
2.8 Define the terms a) Principal Plane b) Major principle stress
c) Minor principle stress
2.9 State the purpose of Mohr's circle
2.10 Draw the Mohr's circle to represent normal stress, shear stress,
major principle stress, minor principle stress, maximum shear
stress
2.11 Draw the Mohr's envelope, and also represent the angle of
internal friction, Cohesion of plane of failure
2.12 Define the term hydro static stress
2.13 Explain the distribution of stresses around narrow opening
2.14 Explain the distribution of stresses around a wider opening or
Longwall panel.
2.15 Define the terms a) Bed separation b) Abutment pressure
275
2.16 Simple numerical problems in calculation of lateral stress and
lateral strain
2.17 Simple numerical problems to draw the Mohr's circle and to
compute angle of internal friction , Cohesion
3.0 Geo-Mechanical properties of Rocks and methods of
determination
3.1 List the determinable Rock properties.
3.2 List physical and Mechanical properties of Rocks.
3.3 State the ISRM specifications of preparation of rock sample
3.4 Define the terms a) Unconfined compressive strength b)
Confined compressive strength of rock specimen
3.5 Define the terms a) density b) porosity c) void ratio d) degree
of saturation e) permeability
3.6 State the relation between porosity and void ratio
3.7 Explain the method of determining the unconfined compressive
strength of rocks.
3.8 Explain the method of determining the confined compressive
strength of rock using tri-axial test.
3.9 Write the limitations of computation of tensile strength of rocks
3.10 Explain Brazilian test to determine the tensile strength of rocks.
3.11 Explain shear strength of rocks.
3.12 Explain the method of computation of point load strength index.
3.13 Explain the method of determination of Protadyoknov strength
index.
3.14 Define the term Rock mass
3.15 Define the term Rock Quality Designation (RQD)
3.16 Simple numerical problems to calculate RQD for a given rock
specimens
3.17 State the classification of RQD ratings
3.18 Classifies Rocks by Mohr's Hardness scale.
3.19 List the factors consider for estimation of RMR
276
3.20 State the classification of RMR ratings
3.21 List the factors influencing the "Tunnel Quality Index" or Q-mass
3.22 Simple numerical to calculate a) Compressive strength b)
Shear strength c) Tensile strength of a given rock specimen
4.0 Theories of Rock failure ,Rock Behaviour and stress
measuring devices
4.1 State different theories of failure of Rocks.
4.2 State the Effect of water ,time and Temperature
4.3 State deformability of Rock
4.4 List the methods of measurement of in-situ stresses
4.5 Explain the flat-jack method of measuring in-situ stress of rock
4.6 List the methods of measurement of induced stresses
4.7 Explain the method of measurement of deformation of strata
by remote convergence Indicator
4.8 Explain the method of measurement of deformation of strata
by "Magnetic ring multipoint borehole extensometer.
4.9 Define the terms a) Coal Bumps b) Rock bursts.
4.10 State the causes of Rock bursts and Coal bumps.
4.11 List the preventive measures against Coal Bumps and Rock
Bursts.
5.0 Understand subsidence
5.1 Define the term subsidence.
5.2 List different types of subsidence
5.3 Define the terms a) Sub critical width of extraction b) Critical
width of extraction c) Super critical width of extraction
5.4 Define the terms related to subsidence a) Angle of draw b)
Angle of break c) Subsidence trough d) Point inflection
5.5 Draw the profile of subsidence indicating a) Subsidence trough
b) Strain profile c) Amount of subsidence d) Angle of draw e)
Point of inflection
5.6 Define the term subsidence factor
277
5.7 List the factors influencing angle of draw.
5.8 List the factors influencing the amount of subsidence
5.9 Describe the effects of subsidence.
5.10 List the protective measures on surface and underground to
minimise damages due to mining operations.
5.11 Explain the method of subsidence measurement.
6.0 Knows strata control
6.1 States the necessity of supports in mine.
6.2 Lists the various materials used for supporting in mines,
Timber, Iron and steel, Building Stone, Brick, concrete.
6.3 Classify the types of supporting systems.
6.4 State the applicability of props, chocks, cogs, stulls, bars, linked
bars, fore-poling, roof stitching, roof bolting, roof masters, roof
shields and safari supports.
6.5 Gives the sub-classification of the supports on the basis of
material and form of use.
6.6 Mentions the size and shape of the props, chocks, roof bolting
and bars.
6.7 States the principle of roof bolting
6.8 Explains the systems of roof bolting and their applicability.
6.9 Lists the merits and demerits of roof bolting.
6.10 Explains the rigid and yielding props.
6.11 Describes the constructional details of friction and Hydraulic
props.
6.12 Explains the method of setting props at different situations.
6.13 Explains the method of setting bars at different situation.
6.14 Explains the method of setting chocks at different situations.
6.15 Explains the method of Fore-poling.
6.16 Explains the method of Roof stitching.
6.17 Explains the method of Safari supporting.
278
6.18 Explains the method of supporting at roadway junction.
6.19 Explains the method of supporting at heavy roof collapse while
clearing the debris.
6.20 Explains withdrawal of supports by safety prop with drawer
with sketch.
COURSE CONTENTS
1.0 Introduction
Definition of rock mechanics - Scope of Rock mechanics in
mining- Application of Rock mechanics to mining field Stress-
Strain-Modulus of elasticity-Relation between various Modulus
of elasticity-Terms Insitu stress -Induced stress -simple
numerical problems
2.0 Stress Analysis, Stress distribution in underground
Various forces acting on block in Insitu condition -- Relation
between vertical and lateral stresses -Induced stresses due to
Mining - Principle plane- Major Principal Stress, Minor principle
stress-Diagram normal and shear stresses in a 2D model-
stress distribution around a Mine workings , narrow and wider
openings-Mohr's circle- simple numerical problems on lateral
strain- Mohr's circle
3.0 Geo Mechanical properties of Rocks and methods of
determination
Rock properties - Physical Mechanical, properties of rocks -
uni-axial compressive strength - confined compressive Strength
(Tri axial test) -Tensile strength shear strength - strength indices
of rocks - point load strength index protodyakonov's strength
index - porosity - Relation between them - methods determining
shear strength. Definition of rock mass, classification of rock
stability - Give the RQD (Rock Quality Designation) Classifies
Rocks by Mohr's Hardness scale. ,Give the RMR (Rock mass
rating), factors consider for estimation of RMR, Estimation of
RMR, simple numerical problems for estimation of RQD,
Classificationof roof rock based on RMR-Tunnel Quality Index
4.0 Theories of Rock failure ,Rock Behaviour and stress
279
measuring devices
Theories of failure of Rocks. the Confining Pressures the Effect
of water, time and Temperature -instruments used for
measurement of stress- Flat jack method - Remote
convergence recorder-Magnetic ring multipoint extensometer-
Coal Bumps and Rock bursts-State the causes of Rock bursts
and bumps.List the preventive measures against bumps and
bursts.
5.0 Understand subsidence
Define term Subsidence- related terms of subsidence- the
angle of draw-positive and negative- Factors influencing angle
of draw- List the factors effecting subsidence - List the effects
of subsidence- protective measures on surface and
underground to minimise damages due to mining operations -
method of subsidence measurement.
6.0 Knows strata control
Supports - Necessity - Materials used - Classification of
supporting Systems - Applicability of various types of supports
- Size, Shape of supports - Principle of roof bolting, stitching -
Merits and demerits of bolting - Rigid and Yielding props -
constructional details of Friction, Hydraulic props - Method of
setting Various supports at different situations - Fore poling.
safari supporting- Junction Supports - Clearance of Heavy roof
Collapse - Systematic Supporting - withdrawal of supports.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Obert, L. and Duvall, W.I., Rock Mechanics and Design of
Structure in Rock John Wiley and Sons Inc., New York, 1967.
2. Vutukuri, V.S., and Lama, R.D., Handbook on Mechanical
Properties of Rocks, Vol. I, II, III and IV, Transtech Publication,
Berlin, 1974/78.
3. Peng, S.S., Ground Control, Wiley Interscience, New York,
1987.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
280
1. Brady, B.H.G. and Brown, S.T., Rock Mechanics, Wiley
Interscience, 1985.
2. Hoek, E., and Brown, S.T., Underground Excavations in Rocks,
Institute of Mining Metallurgy, London, 1980.
4. Introduction to Rock Mechanics: Richard E. Goodman,
Publication -John Wiely and Sons
5. Rock mechanics and strata control: B.P.Verma
6. Wining and working Vol 1, 2: D.J.Deshmukh & R.T.DeshmukVol
1,2.
*****
281
ADVANCED SURVEYING
Subject Title : Advanced Surveying
Subject Code : MNG-505(A) Elective
TIME SCHEDULE
Type Type
1 Electronic Surveying 12 26 2 2
2 Remote Sensing 08 16 2 1
3 Global positioning
system and GIS 15 29 3 2
4 Total station 25 39 3 3
Total 60 110 10 08
OBJECTIVES
to
1.0 Electronic Surveying
1.1 State the basics of Surveying with Electronic instruments
1.2 State the basic principles of surveying with Electronic
instruments
1.3 Explain the methods of measuring distance with electronic
instruments.
1.4 Compare surveying using Electronic instruments with
conventional surveying.
1.5 Explain the principles propagation of Electromagnetic waves.
1.6 Explain the working principle of Electromagnetic distance
measuring system.
1.7 State the different components of EDM instruments.
282
1.8 Explain the procedure of finding out of given area of setting out
a workUsing EDM.
1.9 Explain the EDM methods of carrying out baseline
measurement and traversing EDM methods of carrying out
baseline measurement
1.10 State the points to be observed for care and maintenance of
EDM instruments.
2.0 Remote Sensing
2.1 Define remote sensors.
2.2 State history of the development remote sensing India and
abroad.
2.3 State the various applications of remote sensing.
2.4 Explain the following related to remote sensing.
i) Scale
ii) Resolution and
iii) Electro Magnet Radiation (EMR).
2.5 Explain the effects of EMR interaction with atmosphere and
earth materials.
2.6 Explain about platforms & sensors used in remote sensing.
2.7 Explain the procedure data transmission and storage.
2.8 State the applications of remote sensing in Mining.
3.0 Global Positioning System and GIS
3.1 State the fundamentals of GPS.
3.2 Explain about GPS receivers, GPS observable and data
processing.
3.3 State the causes or errors and corrections in GPS observations.
3.4 Explain the procedure for planning and realisation of GPS
observations.
3.5 Explain the procedure for transformation of GPS results.
3.6 State the purpose of DGPS
283
3.7 State the advantages of DGPS
3.8 Explain the concept of map.
3.9 Explain the basic entities of a spatial map.
3.10 Define the term Raster format of image
3.11 Define the term Vector format of image
3.12 Distinguish between vector and raster formats of spatial
information.
3.13 Explain the salient features of Geographical information system
(GIS).
3.14 Explain the methods of entering the spatial & attribute data into
computers.
3.15 Explain the use of COGO in developing the spatial information.
3.16 List the applications of GIS in Mining
3.17 List the applications of GPS in Mining
3.18 Explain the procedure to digitize various mine plans
(Development , Depillaring, Surveying, Ventilation ) into different
layers using GIS
4.0 Understand the principles of total station
4.1 List the uses of total station
4.2 List the parts of total station
4.3 State the function of each part of total station
4.4 Explain the method of setting up total station for taking
observations
4.5 State the principle of working of Autolevel used in Total station
4.6 Explain the procedure for measurement of distances between
the given points
4.7 Explain the procedure for measurement of angle between the
given points
4.8 Explain procedure of taking multiple number of observations
over a single station
4.9 Explain the procedure for measurement of area with single
station setup
284
4.10 Explain the procedure of traversing using total station
4.11 Explain the method balancing the errors in the closed traverse
using Total station.
4.12 Define the term 'Resection'
4.13 Explain the orientation of total station by Resection method
4.14 Explain establishing (Transferring Bench Mark ) TBM by station
elevation method
4.15 Define the term 'Key In' points
4.16 State the purpose of 'Key In' points in total station
4.17 Define the term Stakeout
4.18 Explain the method of Staking out a point of known elevation
4.19 Explain the method of Stakeout line between the given two points
4.20 Explain the method of Stakeout an arc for a given radius and
angle
4.21 Define the term 'Remote elevation'
4.22 Explain the method of measuring height of a remote object
using 'Remote elevation' method
4.23 Explain the method of copying the total station jobs into USB
4.24 Explain the methods of transferring the survey jobs by
connecting to the System (PC)
4.25 Describe the steps involved to convert survey job into .csv
format
4.26 Describe the steps involved to convert the survey job into auto
CAD file format
4.27 Explain the method of transferring GPS data into Total station
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Electronic Surveying: Basics - Historical development,
methods of measuring distance, basic principles,
classifications, applications and comparison with conventional
surveying, propagation of electromagnetic waves,
electromagnetic distance measuring system, study of different
285
EDM instruments, computation of area, setting out works, base
line measurement EDM traversing, care and maintenance of
EDM instruments - Gyrometer - applicability - uses -
constructional details.
2. Remote Sensing: Definition, history of remote sensing, abroad
/ India multi concepts, concepts of Scale, resolution,
electromagnetic radiation (EMR), EMR interaction with
atmosphere and earth materials, platforms, sensors, data
transmission and storage, applications in Mining.
3. Global Positioning System and GIS: Fundamentals, GPS
observables and data processing, error correction, planning
and realisation of GPS observations, transformation of GPS
results.
Map - Definitions - representations, point, line, polygon common
coordinate system, map projections data entry, storage and
maintenance, spatial and non spatial, raster & vector formats,
entering data in computer, digitizer, scanner data conversion,
applications of GIS & GPS in Mining Engineering, COGO
geometry, digital terrain models.
4. Total Station: Parts and functions - setting up total station for
taking observations - Use of Total Station - Measurement of
distances and angles - multiple number of observations on a
single station - measurement of area with single station setup
- orientation of total station by resection method - establishing
TBM by station elevation -Height of the object by Remote
elevation method- Stakeout Points,Lines, Arc - Conversion of
jobs into .csv file, .dwg file (auto CAD file) format
TEXT BOOKS
1. Surveying: Principles and Applications AuthorBarry F.
KavanaghEdition6, illustratedPublisherPrentice-Hall
2. Punmia, B.C., Surveying Vol I and II, Laxmi Publication, New
Delhi, 1991
3. Kenetkar, T.P., Surveying and Levelling, Vol I and Vol II, United
Book Corporation, Poona, 1991.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
286
1. Mason,E., Coal Mining Series, Surveying ,Vol I And Vol II, Virtue
And Company Limited, London.
2. Clark, D., Plane And Geodetic Surveying,Vol I And Vol II, CBS
Publishing Co., 1986.
3. Assur,V.L.And Pilatov,A.M., Pratical Guide To Surveying MIR
Publishers, Moscow 1988.
4. Borshch,V., Komponiets,A., Navitny, G.And Knysh., Mine
Surveying MIR Publishers Moscow,1989. 5. Sahni, Advanced
Surveying, Lovely Prakashan, Dhanbad, 1992.
6. Alam Chand., Modern Concept Of Mine Survey, Lovely
Prakashan, Dhanbad,1992.
7. Ghatak., Mining Surveying, Lovely Prakashan,Dhanbad,1990.
*****
287
MINERAL PROCESSING AND QUALITY CONTROL
Subject Title : MINERAL PROCESSING AND
QUALITY CONTROL
Subject Code : MNG-505 (B) Elective
TIME SCHEDULE
Type Type
1 Scope and Basic

Concept of Ore Dressing/
Mineral Processing 03 16 2 1
2 Comminution 18 26 2 2
3 Industrial Sizing 18 16 2 1
4 Concentration 18 26 2 2
5. Clean Coal Technology 03 26 2 2
Total 60 110 10 08
OBJECTIVES
to
1.0 Scope and basic concept of ore Dressing/Mineral
processing
1.1 Define the term ore Dressing /Mineral Processing
1.2 State the scope of Mineral Processing.
1.3 State the important operation of Ore dressing
1.4 List the Properties of Mineral useful in Concentration.
1.5 Necessity and advantages of Mineral Processing
1.6 Necessity and advantages of Coal Cleaning
288
2.0 Comminution
2.1 Define Comminution
2.2 State the Objective of Comminution
2.3 List the Purpose of Comminution
2.4 Classify the Comminution Process
2.5 State Law of Comminution Process
2.6 Define the terms Sorting ,Liberation ,Hand Sorting, and
Mechanical sorting
2.7 State the Principles of Crushing
2.8 Classify the Crushing Operation
2.9 List the Type of Crusher
2.10 State jaw crusher and Gyratory crusher
2.11 State the Working principles and Operation of Blake and Dodge
Jaw Crusher
2.12 State Working Principles and Operation of Roll Crusher
2.13 Define the term Grinding
3.0 INDUSTRIAL SIZING
3.1 Understand the Importance of sizing
3.2 Know the size of Methods
3.3 Define Screening and Classifiers
3.4 Define Mesh Number and Mesh Size
3.5 Know designating the Mesh numbers as per ISI
3.6 The types of Industrial Screens
4.0 Concentration
4.1 Define Concentration
4.2 State the objectives of Concentrating
4.3 State the Principles of Concentration
4.4 Define the terms Concentrate, Tailing, and Middling
4.5 Classify the Concentration Operations
4.6 State the Working principle of Magnetic Separator, DMS,
Jigging and High Tension Separators.
289
4.7 List the Gravity Concentration Processes
4.8 Define the Sink and Float Technique
4.9 Describe the Working Principle of Tabling
4.10 Define the Principle of Jigging
4.11 Define the Froth flotation
5.0 Clean Coal Technology
5.1 Define the term CCT
5.2 List the Energy and Environment Benefits of CCT
5.3 List the General Importance of Coal cleaning
5.4 State the Development of Clean Coal Technology
5.5 Describe the Technology for CCT
5.6 List the Negative impact on Environment due to Coal usage
5.7 State the Removing of Impurities
5.8 Describe the Improve the Calorific value of Coal
COURSE CONTENTS
1.0 Scope and basic concept of ORE DRESSING/Mineral
processing
ORE DRESSING /MINERAL PROCESSING, scope of Mineral
Processing. the important operation of Ore dressing the
Properties of Mineral useful in Concentration. Necessity and
advantages of Mineral Processing, Necessity and advantages
of Coal Cleaning
2.0 Comminution
Comminution, the Objective of Comminution Classify the
Comminution Process, State Law of Comminution Process,
State the Principles of Crushing Classify the Crushing Operation
, Type of Crusher ,jaw crusher and Gyratory crusher, Working
principles and Operation of Blake and Dodge Jaw Crusher
Working Principles and Operation of Roll Crusher, the Grinding,
Compare Crushing and Grinding, Classify the Grinding Mills
3.0 INDUSTRIAL SIZING
290
Understand the Importance of sizing, Know the size of
Methods, Define Screening and Classifiers, Define Mesh
Number and Mesh Size Know designating the Mesh numbers
as per ISI, The types of Industrial Screens.
4.0 Concentration
Define Concentration, State the objectives of Concentrating,
State the Principles of Concentration, Define the terms
Concentrate, Tailing, and Middling, Classify the Concentration
Operations, The Working principle of Magnetic Separator, DMS,
Jigging and High Tension Separators. List the Gravity
Concentration Process, The Sink and Float Technique,
Working Principle of Tabling, Principle of Jigging, Define Froth
flotation .
5.0 Clean Coal Technology
Understand the Clean Coal Technology ,the Energy and
Environment Benefits of CCT, the General Importance of Coal
cleaning, Development of Clean Coal Technology, the
Technology for CCT, the Negative impact on Environment due
to Coal usage, How to Removing of Impurities, the Process,
Improve the Calorific value of Coal
TEXT BOOKS:.
1. Jain, S.K., Ore Processing, Oxford - IBH Publishing, 1984.
2. Gaudin, A.M., Principles of Mineral Dressing - McGraw Hill Book
Company, 1971.
3. Taggart, A.F., Handbook of Mineral Dressing, John Wiley and
4. Wills, B.A. Mineral Processing Technology, Pergamon Press,
1985.
5. Vijayendra, H.G., Handbook on Mineral Dressing, Vikas
Publishing House Pvt. Ltd. 1995.
6. Introduction of Mineral Processing: S.Mallishwararao .
*****
291
MINE ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING
Subject Title : Mine Environmental
Engineering
TIME SCHEDULE
Type Type
1 Mine Fires 15 29 3 2
2 Mine Explosions 10 23 1 2
3 Mine Inundation 10 16 2 1
4 Gas Detectors 15 23 1 2
5 Introduction to Continuous
monitoring of ventilation
system and mine lighting 10 19 3 1
Total 60 110 10 08
OBJECTIVES
to
1.0 Know the different aspects of Mine Fires
1.1 State the types of mine fires.
1.2 List the causes and preventive measures of Surface and
underground mine fires
1.3 Explain the term 'Spontaneous heating'
1.4 List the signs of spontaneous heating
1.5 List the factors for developing spontaneous heating.
1.6 List the causes and preventive measures of spontaneous
heating
292
1.7 List the different methods of dealing with fires and their
applicability
1.8 Explain the different methods of dealing with fires.
1.9 Explain the constructional details of preparatory, temporary and
permanent stoppings.
1.10 Explain the procedure of permanent sealing of fire in I,II,III degree
Gassy mines.
1.11 Explain the balancing of pressure at permanent stoppings.
1.12 Explain the method of collecting samples behind the Fire Seals
1.13 Calculates the CO/O2 and CO2/O2 deficiency ratio Interprets
Coward diagram for finding the explosibility of Methane Air
Mixture.
1.14 Explain the Explosability limits of the fire dam using Cowards
diagram.
1.15 List the different methods of re-opening of sealed off Areas.
1.16 Explain different methods of reopening of sealed off areas
1.17 List different fire fighting equipment.
1.18 Describe the fire fighting organisation
1.19 List the Nitrogen infusion methods for fire fighting
1.20 Describe the Nitrogen infusion for fire fighting
1.21 State stench warning
2.0 Mine Explosions
2.1 State the different types of mine explosions.
2.2 Explain the occurrence of fire damp explosion.
2.3 List the causes and preventive measures of fire damp
explosions.
2.4 Explain the development and occurrence of coal dust explosion.
2.5 List the causes and preventive measures of coal dust
explosions.
2.6 State the purpose of stone dust barriers.
2.7 State the principle of stone dust barriers.
293
2.8 Explain the construction and location of polish type of stone
dust barriers.
2.9 State the application and functions of water barriers
2.10 Describe the streaming and layering of Methane
2.11 List the Methane drainage methods
2.12 Explain the Methane drainage methods
3.0 Understand the dangers due to inundation in mines
3.1 Classifies the sources of water in Mines
3.2 List different causes of inundation due to surface water
3.3 List the precautions against inundation due to surface water.
3.4 List precautions against inundation due to underground water.
3.5 List different causes of inundation due to underground water
3.6 List the precautions to be taken while approaching water logged
area with sketch.
3.7 Explain the function and the use of burn side safety boring
apparatus.
3.8 State the purpose of water dams in Mines.
3.9 List different types of dams and their applicability.
3.10 State the factors governing the design of a dam.
3.11 Describe the construction of concrete dam.
3.12 Constructional details of brick dams with sketches.
3.13 Constructional details of Sump and Barriers.
3.14 Solve simple problems to calculate the thickness and factor of
safety of water dams
4.0 Gas detectors
4.1 Classifies the different methods of gas detection.
4.2 Explain the principles on which the detectors are developed or
designed.
4.3 Explain the determination of percentage of methane with the
help of each of the above detectors
294
4.4 List the precautions to be observed for accurate results in each
of the above cases.
4.5 Mentions the recent techniques of gas detection, remote
sensing devices, continuous recorders, remote monitoring,
infrared spectrometer and sensors.
4.6 List the method of CO detectors.
4.7 Explain the method of detection of CO by chemical detectors.
4.8 Explain the multi gas detector and its use.
5.0 Introduction to Continuous monitoring of ventilation
system and mine lighting
5.1 State the principles of continuous monitoring
5.2 Explain about Tele monitoring
5.3 List Advantages -Disadvantages of Tele monitoring.
5.4 State the purpose of mine lighting
5.5 Definitions of various terms in lighting: Lux, Candela, Lumen,
Candle, Candle power, M.S.C.P,M.H.C.P, Intensity of
Illumination, Glare etc
5.6 List the methods of lighting employed in Mines
5.7 List the places to be illuminated on the surface and below ground
5.8 Explain the methods of illuminating open cast mines
5.9 State the effects of Glare and methods of control
5.10 List the methods of improving illumination in underground mines
COURSE CONTENTS
1.0 Mine fires
Classification, causes, preventive measure, spontaneous
heating- causes and preventive measures. Different methods
of dealing with fire Permanent sealing of Fire. Collection of
samples behind fire seals - Interpretation of samples - Coward's
diagram, calculation of CO/O2 deficiency rations, reopening
of sealed off areas Fire fighting equipment and organisation-
Nitrogen infusion
295
2.0 Mine Explosions
Types of mine explosions-Causes and preventive measures,
coal dust explosion-causes and preventive measures, Treating
coal dust by watering and stone dust barriers - water barriers-
spot coolers- Methane drainage methods.
3.0 Mine Inundation
Inundation in mines-dangers different sources of water-
precautions against surface and underground water-
precautions-while approaching water logged area. Burn side
safety boring apparatus, purpose of dams. Design of a dam
construction of concrete dam. Accident due to Inundation-
Chasanala accident.
4.0 Gas Detectors
Gas detectors, Uses,- principle on which designed,
determination of percentage of gas with them-Recent
techniques of gas detection - remote sensing devices,
continuous recorders, monitors, infra-red spectrometers,
sensors-Carbon Monoxide detection - Warm blooded birds,
chemical detectors, Multi gas detector.
5.0 Continuous Monitoring of Ventilation System and Mine
Lighting
Continuous recording and monitoring of Air velocity and
Quantity-Tele monitoring systems - Advantages -
disadvantages of it- Purpose -Definitions on lighting - Methods
of lighting in mines. Places to be illuminated on surface and
underground - Standards of Lighting - Method of illumination in
open cast Mines.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ramlu, M.A., Mines Fires, Explosion, Rescue, Recovery and
Inundations, Mukhertu Publishers, Kharagpur, 1989.
2. Ramlu, M.A., Mine Disasters and Mine Rescue, Oxford and
IBH Publishers, 1991.
3. McPherson, M.J., Subsurface Ventilation and Environmental
Engineering, Chapman & Hall Publication, London, 1993.
296
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Misra, G.B., Mine Environment and Ventilation, Oxford University
Press, 1993.
2. The Mine Rescue Rules, 1986, Lovely Prakashan, Dhanbad,
1992.
3. Cummings A.B., and Given, I.V., SME Mining Engg. Hand Book
Vol. I and II, New York, 1994. 88
4. Sarkar, S.K. and Sarkar, S., State of Environment and
Development in Indian Coalfields, Oxford and IBH, 1996.
5. Classified Circulars by D.G.M.S., Dhanbad.
6. Ghatak, S., Mine Management, Legislation & General Safety.
7. Kaku, L.C. Fires in Coal Mines.
*****
297
ROCK MECHANICS AND STRATA CONTROL LAB
PRACTICE
Subject Title : ROCK MECHANICS AND STRATA
CONTROL LAB PRACTICE
TIME SCHEDULE
1 Sample collection and Specimen
Preparation 09
2 Uni-axial compressive strength of
rock specimen 12
3 Tri-axial Compressive Strength
rock specimen 15
4 Tensile strength of rock specimen
(Brazilian test) 12
5 Conduct Shear Strength of
rock Specimen 12
6 Determination of Point load strength
index of the rock sample 9
7 Determination of Protodyakonov's
strength index of rock sample 9
8 Determination of Slake Durability
Index of rock sample 12
Total 90
298
OBJECTIVES
to
1.0 Sample collection and Specimen Preparation
1.1 Identification of various core samples ( coal, sandstone)
1.2 Preparation of core sample for laboratory tests by performing
a) Cutting b) Grinding
1.3 Check the dimensions of the sample as per ISRM standards
2.0 Determinations of Uni-axial compressive strength of rock
2.1 Choose sample required to perform uni-axial compressive
strength
2.2 Know various operations of UTM
2.3 Perform uni-axial compressive strength of given specimen
2.4 Observe the plane of failures of various samples
2.5 Determine the stress vs strain relationship of the sample and
plot the same
2.6 Compute poisons ratio of the sample
2.7 Compute Young's Modulus of elasticity of the sample
3.0 Determination of Tri-axial compressive strength of rock
by UTM
3.1 Choose samples of different hardness to perform tri-axial
compressive strength of rock
3.2 Know various operations of UTM to perform tri-axial test
3.3 Familiarise various components of tri-axial testing device
3.4 Perform tri-axial load test on the sample under various load
conditions
3.5 Plot the Mohr's circle for various stress conditions of the sample
3.6 Compute coefficient of adhesion and angle of internal friction
of given sample from Mohr's circle diagram
3.7 Observe the failure plane of various samples
299
4.0 Determination of Tensile Strength of rock specimen
4.1 Know the significance of tensile strength of rock from strata
control point of view in mining
4.2 Know various limitations of conducting tensile strength of rock
by direct method
4.3 Prepare samples required to conduct Tensile strength
4.4 Perform tensile strength of rock by Brazilian test
4.5 Compute tensile strength of rock using Brazilian test formula
5.0 Determination of Shear Strength rock specimen
5.1 Know the significance of Shear strength of rock from strata
control point of view in mining
5.2 Prepare sample required to perform shear strength
5.3 Perform Shear Strength test for a given Specimen
5.4 Identification of failure plane for tested Specimen
5.5 Compare the failure planes of samples used for Tensile and
shear strength tests
6.0 Determination of Point load strength index of the sample
6.1 Know Moh's scale of hardness of rock and various other
indices used to determine the hardness of the rocks
6.2 Familiarize the equipment used to perform the point load
strength index
6.3 Determination of Point Load Strength Index of rock
7.0 Determination of Protodyakonov's strength index of
Rocks
7.1 Familiarize the equipments used to perform Protodyakonov's
strength Index
7.2 Know the significance of Protodyakonov's strength index in
determining the hardness of rock
7.3 Perform Protodyakonov's strength test
7.4 Calculate the Protodyakonov's strength Index of rock
8.0 Determination of Rock strength by Slake Durability Test
8.1 Understand the slake durability property of rock sample
300
8.2 Understand the void ratio and porosity of rock sample
8.3 Know the significance of permeability of rock specimen from
rock mechanics point of view
8.4 Know various part of equipment used to perform Slake
Durability test of sample
8.5 Perform slake durability test of the sample
8.6 Calculate Slake Durability Index of the sample
COURSE CONTENTS
1.0 Sample collection and Specimen Preparation
Identification of various coal ,and sandstone samples , Cutting,
Grinding of Sample preparation to perform laboratory tests ,
Check the sample specifications as per ISRM standards
2.0 Determination of Uni-axial compressive strength of rock
Know various operations of UTM, Determine uni-axial
compressive strength of rock , plot stress and strain Curve,
identify elastic Limit of sample , calculate Young's modulus ,
poisons ratio of sample.
3.0 Determination of Tri-axial compressive strength of rock
by UTM
Know various operation of UTM to perform Tri-axial
compressive strength of rock, and its significance in the field,
Plot Mohr's circle for the major and minor principal stresses (
Mohr's envelope) , Compute angle of internal friction, and
coefficient of adhesion form the Mohr's circle diagram.
4.0 Determination of Tensile Strength of rock specimen
Know the limitations of conduction of Tensile strength of rock
specimen by direct method, and its importance in the field,
Prepare sample to perform Tensile strength of rock, Compute
tensile strength by Brazilian test.
5.0 Determination of Shear Strength of rock specimen
301
Know the significance of shear strength of rock from strata
control point of view, Know various parts of shear box used to
perform test, Compute shear strength of rock specimen.
6.0 Determination of Point load strength index of the sample
Know moh's scale of hardness of rocks, and various indices
used to compute hardness of rock. Perform point load strength
index of the sample
7.0 Determination of Protodyakonov's strength index of rock
sample
Familiarise the equipment used to perform Protodyakonov's
strength index. Perform Protodyakonov's strength test, and
compute its index.
8.0 Determination of the Slake durability Index of rock
sample.
Understand porosity, void ratio, permeability of rock sample,
Familiarise the equipment used to perform Slake durability test.
Perform slake durability test and compute its index.
S. No Experiment Title Key Competency
1 Sample collection and a) Observation of Core Samples

Specimen Preparation (Coal and Stone)
b) Prepare core samples required
for laboratory testing
c) Know the ISRM standards of core
samples used for laboratory
testing
d) Check the sample prepared met
ISRM standards
2. Determination of uni-axial a) Choose the sample required to

compressive strength of rock perform test
b) Know various parts and
operational features UTM to
perform test
c) Placing of specimen between the
platforms of UTM and application
load gradually
302
d) Measurement of stress ,
longitudinal and lateral stresses
using strain gauge
e) Compute uni-axial compressive
strength
3 Determination of tri-axial a) Know various and functional

compressive strength of rock features of tri-axial load cell
b) Familiarise the operation and
application of load using UTM
c) Measurement of longitudinal and
lateral stresses
d) Plotting of Mohr's circle by
computing major and minor
principal stresses.
e) Computation of angle of internal
friction and cohesion of plane of
failure of sample from Mohr's
envelope
4 Determination of Tensile a) Know the significance of tensile

strength of rock specimen strength of rock from strata
control point of view
b) Preparation of sample to perform
Brazilian test
c) Familiarise the equipment used
for performing Tensile strength
test
d) Performing Brazilian test of
sample
e) Compute Tensile strength of
specimen
5 Determination of shear a) Know the significance of shear

strength of rock specimen strength of rock influencing the
failure of rock
b) Prepare sample required to
perform shear strength test
c) Familiarise the equipment used
for performing shear strength test
( Shear box and its usage)
d) Perform the shear strength test
e) Compute shear strength of rock
303
6 Determination of Point load a) Know various indices used to
strength index of rock sample assess the hardness of rock
b) Familiarise the equipment used
to perform point load strength
index
c) Perform point load strength test
d) Compute point load strength
index
e) Compute uni-axial compressive
strength from point load strength
index
7 Determination of a) Know the equipment used to

Protodyakonov's strength index perform Protodyakonov's strength
of rock sample index
b) Prepare the sample required to
perform test
c) Perform Protodyakonov's
strength test
d) Compute Protodyakonov's
strength index
8 Determination of Slake a) Prepare sample required to

durability test index of the perform slake durability test
sample b) Know the equipment used to
perform the test and its operation
c) Perform the Slake durability test
of the sample
d) Compute Slake durability test
index
e) Know the significance of porosity,
void ratio and permeability of the
rock mass in the field
304
ADVANCED MINE SURVEYING LAB PRACTICE
Subject Title : ADVANCED MINE SURVEYING
LAB PRACTICE
Subject Code : MNG-508(A) Elective
Periods/Week : 06
Periods/semester : 90
TIME SCHEDULE
S.No. Major Topics No. of Periods
1 Understand Various Menu Options
of Total Station 15
2 Field Exercises using total station -I 15
3 Field Exercises using total station -II 30
4 Transferring the field observation
into CAD 15
5 Surveying with GPS 15
Total 90
OBJECTIVES
1.0 Understand Various Menu Options of Total Station
1.1 Familiarize various Menu options of total station
1.2 Creation of new job
1.3 Open an existing job
1.4 Key In survey points
1.5 Options present under Survey
1.6 Options present under COGO
1.7 Copy the surveying points from one job to another job
1.8 Linking of one survey job to another survey job
1.9 Options to take readings with Prism and without prism
305
2.0 Field Exercises using total station -I
2.1 Centering of total station over a given surveying station using
optical plummet
2.2 Leveling of total station
2.3 Station setup given one known co-ordinate and one angle
2.4 Station setup using two known co-ordinates
2.5 Setting out orientation of total station by using resection method
2.6 Orientation of total station to true north
2.7 To measure distance between two given points using total
station
2.8 To measure angle between to surveying stations
2.9 To measure multiple sets (rounds) of observations with total
station
2.10 To carryout the surveying of given area by radiation method
2.11 To carryout the traverse of a given area
2.12 To perform a station setup on a known point by making
observation to one or more back sight points
2.13 To establish the position of an occupied point by total station
relative to a baseline or boundary line
2.14 Calculation of traverse area using total station
2.15 Calculation of perimeter of given surveyed area
2.16 Balancing of errors of a given traverse
3.0 Field Exercises using total station -II
3.1 Stake out of a given surveying point
3.2 To carryout stakeout of a line
3.3 Carryout widening of given road way using stakeout line
3.4 To carryout stakeout of an arc connecting two roadways for a
given radius and angle
3.5 Transferring the B.M located at an in accessible location into
surveying area
306
3.6 Find out the height of remote object using Remote elevation
method
3.7 Marking the surveying point of a given building plan using total
station
4.0 Transferring the field observation into CAD
4.1 To Transfer the surveying points of a job into USB drive
4.2 To transfer the surveying points of job into the system
4.3 Conversion of total station job file to CAD file format
4.4 Conversion of job file into .csv file
4.5 Importing the .csv file surveying points into total station
4.6 Calculation of area and volume of a given job using CAD
4.7 Earth work calculation to fill or cut the profile a given area based
on the pre-defined datum.
5.0 Global positioning system and GIS
5.1 Identifies the parts and the functions of Global Positioning
System.
5.2 Determine the Coordinates of various points on the ground using
GPS
5.3 Carryout of surveying to locate various geo special co-ordinates
using DGPS
5.3 Link the G.P.S data with Total Station.
5.4 Link the GPS data with GIS software.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Understand Various Menu Options of Total Station - Various
Menu Options of total station - Creating new Survey Job - Open
an existing survey job - Options for station setup- Options to
carryout surveying- Options to take readings - Options for
survey calculations - Options to draw the map - Options to
transfer the survey job information to USB, system. Menu option
to take reading with out prism (if present with the instrument)-
With prism.
307
2. Field Exercises using total station -I - Station setup - by angle
and survey station- by two stations - by two or more points
(Resection method) - Single station setup and carry out
surveying ( radiation method), - Carry out traverse.
Measurement of -angle between the stations -distance between
the two given survey stations- Balancing the errors of the
traverse.
3. Field Exercises using total station -II- Stake out - point, Line,
stake out an arc with the given angle and radius - Transferring
the Bench Present in an in accessible location to survey area
- Remote object height by Remote elevation method- Marking
the given surface plan location on the ground.
4. Transferring the field observation into CAD- Method of
transferring the filed observation to - USB, into system.
Conversion survey job into csv file and the file format required
by CAD- Loading the CAD drawing points into total station to
mark them in the field. Calculation of area and perimeter of the
given surveyed area using total station. Earth work calculations
using CAD based on the given datum
5. Surveying with GPS - Various features of GPS and DGPS,
Procedure to capture geo-spacial co-ordinates using GPS,
DGPS - Method to transfer the GPS info into Total station and
GIS software.
No. Experiment Title Key Competency
1 Understand Various Menu • Learns Menu options to create

Options of Total Station new survey job, open an existing
job
• Learns Menu options for station
set
• Learns Menu options for centering
and leveling
• Learns Menu options to take
measurements
• Learns Menu options to perform
various mathematical calculaI
tions such as area, perimeter
(COGO)
• Learns Menu Options to balance
the errors of the traverse
308
2 Field Exercises using total • Learns how to do station setup
station-I using given angle and survey
station
• Learns station setup w.r.t two
stations
• Learns to carryout surveying of
given area by radiation method
• Learns to traverse of given area
• Learns to calculate the area and
perimeter
• Learns how to balance the errors
in the traverse
3. Field Exercises using total • Learns stakeout of a point

station -II • Learns stake out of line
• Learns stake out of an arc
• Learns to transfer B.M located
in remote location onto the
survey area
• Learns to measure width and
height of a remote object
• Learns to locate the marking
points of the building plan on the
ground
4 Transferring the field observation • Learns to transfer the survey jobs
into CAD into USB drive
• Learns to transfer total station
observations into the System
(PC)
• Learns how to convert and export
the job into .csv format
• Learns how to import .csv format
file into the total station
• Learns conversion survey job file
into CAD format
• Learns to perform earthwork
calculations such as fill or cut of
given surveyed area w.r.t the
given datum.
5 Surveying with GPS • Learns the Salient features of

GPS and DGPS instrument
• Perform exercise to take the Geo
special co ordinates using GPS
• Learns to transfer the GPS data
into Total station
309
COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN MINING LAB PRACTICE
Subject Title : COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN
MINING LAB PRACTICE
Subject Code : MNG - 508(B) Elective
TIME SCHEDULE
1 Understand Various CAD commands 15
2 Practice Geometric Constructions
Using CAD 10
3 Practice 3-D drawings of underground
Mine pillar ,section of Mine Plan using
CAD Software 10
4 Digitization (R2V Conversion) of Mine
Maps Using AutoCAD Map 25
5 Ventilation simulation using VENT SIM
software using VENT SIM Light 20
6 Basic concepts Planning of stratified
deposits by Minex software 10
Total 90
OBJECTIVES
1.0 Understand various CAD Commands
1.1 Study of drawing editor screen.
1.2 Practice the methods of selecting/entering commands to start
new drawing accessing CAD commands by selecting from
menus, tool bars and entering Commands on command line.
1.3 Sets the limits of the drawing to get the needed working area.
1.4 Practice the 'setting commands' Grid, Snap, & Ortho
Commands.
310
1.5 Practice 'Draw commands'- point, line, pline, rectangle, circle,
tangent, ellipse, arc, polygon and spline.
1.6 Dimensions the given figures.
1.7 Practice 'modify commands' - erase, copy, mirror, move, rotate,
scale, stretch, trim, extend, break, chamfer, fillet, explode, Pedit,
Mledit.
1.8 Practice 'construct commands' - offset, array, Divide, measure.
1.9 Practice 'edit commands' - Undo, Redo, Oops, CopyClip,
PasteClip, Del.
1.10 Practice 'view commands' - Redraw, Regen, Zoom, Pan.
1.11 Practices 'Hatch commands' - Bhatch, Hatch
1.12 Practices 'insert commands' - Block, Wblock, Insert, Minsert.
2.0 Practice Geometric Constructions Using CAD
2.1 Practices dividing a line into number of segments.
2.2 Practices drawing external/internal common tangents for
circles of same/different radii.
2.3 Practices drawing external/internal common arcs for circles
of same/different radii.
2.4 Practices construction of ellipse, parabola, hyperbola, cycloid,
and helix.
3.0 Practices 3-D drawings of underground Mine pillar
,section of Mine Plan using CAD Software
3.1 Practice drawing of different 3D solid objects.
3.2 Practice 3D view of given building plan
3.3 Draw the 3D view of the underground mine pillar
3.4 Draw the 3D view of given section of Mine plan
4.0 Digitization (R2V Conversion) of Mine Plans using CAD
Map 3D
4.1 Download the free educational version of CAD Map 3D from
AUTODESK using respective institute AICTE Id (https://
academic.autodesk.com/?nd=landing)
4.2 Know the basic commands of AutoCAD Map 3D for digitization
of a given map
311
4.3 Carryout the digitization of given Mine Map by creating various
Layers
a) Development plan Layer
b) Depillaring plan Layer
c) Ventilation plan Layer
d) Mine Survey Plan Layer
e) Mine Surface Plan Layer
4.4 Entering the relevant information of the above digitized layers
5.0 Ventilation simulation using VENT SIM software using
VENT SIM Light
5.1 Download the free restricted version of VENT SIM Light
software for an educational institution (http://www.ventsim.com/
download/current-downloads/)
5.2 Understand basic features of Ventilation simulation software
such as VENT SIM
5.3 Perform the basic simulation of ventilation using VENT SIM
light by varying various road way parameter
6.0 Basic concepts of Mine Planning of stratified deposit
using Minex software
(http://www.gemcomsoftware.com/products/Minex)
6.1 Understand various features of Minex software
6.2 Perform mine planning operations using Minex software.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Understand various CAD Commands-Sets the limits of the
drawing- Draw commands- Modify commands- Edit
commands- View commands- Hatch commands
2. Practice Geometric Constructions Using CAD-Draws simple
geometrical shapes like circles, tangents
3. Practices3-D drawings of underground Mine pillar ,section of
Mine Plan using CAD Software-3D Commands - Simple 3D
312
elements- 3D view of underground mine pillar - 3D view of given
section of mine plan
4. Digitization (R2V Conversion) of Mine Plans using CAD Map
3D- Various options of AutoCAD Map 3D- Digitization options-
Digitization in various Layers-Underground Development Plan-
Depillaring Plan - Ventilation Plan - Underground Survey Plan -
Surface Survey Plan- entering relevant information
5. Ventilation simulation using VENT SIM software using VENT
SIM Light- Basics features of VENT SIM light - Simulation by
varying road way ventilation parameters
6. Basic concepts of Mine Planning of stratified deposit using
Minex software- Basic features of Minex software- Design of
mine using Minex
REFERENCEBOOKS
1. R.V.Ramani - Editor, APCOM Proceedings Application of
Computers and Operations Research in the Mineral Industry,
The Society of Mining, Metallurgy and Exploration, Inc.,1996
2. Kadri Dagdelen, Editor, Computer Applications in the Minerals
Industries, Colorado School of Mines, 1999.
3. Ramani R.V., et al. Computers in Mineral Industry, Oxford and
IBH Publishers, 1994.
4. Fytas, K. and Singhal, R.K. Computers Applications in Mineral
Industry, A.A.Balkema Publication, 1988. 5. E Balagurusamy ,
Fundamentals of Computers , Mc Graw Hills Publication, 2009
6. Basandra S K, Computers Today Fourth Edition, Galgotia
Publications Pvt. Ltd, 2004.
*****
313
MINE ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING LAB PRACTICE
Subject Title : Mine Environmental Engineering
Lab Practice
TIME SCHEDULE
S.No Major Topics No.of Periods
1 Quality Survey and Quantity survey 15
a) Detection and Determination of
percentage of mine gases
b) Flame safety lamp construction
assembling /Dismantling
c) To determine the psychrometric
properties, gas percentage in
atmosphere.
2 To study the principles and
characteristics governing mine fans.
Ventilation survey Quantity and Pressure 12
3 Exercise on study and sketch
various fire fighting equipments and
Analysis of Coal and Water 9
4 Study and sketch various equipments
used rescue and reviving 9
Total 45
OBJECTIVES
to
1.0 Flame Safety Lamp and Gas Detectors
1.1 Identifies and sketches the parts of flame safety lamp
314
1.2 Dissembles and assembles the flame safety lamp
1.3 Tests for the presence of inflammable gas accumulation and
percentage oftests.
1.4 Sketches the size and shape of the gas caps with varying
percentages of inflammable gas
1.5 Distinguishes between different types of flame safety lamps
1.6 Determines the percentage of methane using methanometers
1.7 Determines the percentage of CO using Co Detectors
(chemicals)
1.8 Determines the percentage of other gases using multi-gas
detectors.
1.9 To determine the psychrometric properties, gas percentage in
atmosphere.
1.10 Mine air sampling and detection of various mine gasses, like,
methane, carbon monoxide (CO), by conventional methods
and by gas chromatograph, etc.
1.11 Determination of psychrometric properties of air, measurement
of cooling power by Kata thermometer.
1.12 Determination of air born dust by gravimetric dust sampler,
personal dust sampler and by high volume sampler.
1.13 Noise survey: Determination of Noise by Dosimeter in (Dda).
1.14 Determination of crossing point temperature and index of
inflammability.
2.0 Studies the comprehensive model showing the coursing
of air ventilation with various devices - brattices, stopping
air crossing, doors, regulators, air locks
2.1 Sketches the ventilation devices
2.2 Draws the performance/characteristic curves of mine fans from
the observations made by conducting appropriate experiments
2.3 Conducts the ventilation survey for quantity of air using
anemometer, velometer, smoke test, pitot tube
2.4 Conducts the ventilation survey for pressure using inclined
manometer
315
2.5 Determines the ventilation efficiency quotient (VEQ)
2.6 Conducts the qualitative survey for determining the
temperature, relative humidity and cooling power of air.
2.7 Draws the ventilation plan
2.8 To study the principles and characteristics governing mine fans.
2.9 Study of air-reversal arrangement in mine fans.
3.0 Study of pressure survey and quantity survey in mines
using velometer, anemometer and barometer.
3.1 Study and sketch fire fighting equipments for class A, B,C, D,
E Fires.
3.2 Proximate analysis of coal
3.3 Measurement of vibrations due to various sources.
3.4 Determination of pH, TDS, TSS, dissolved oxygen and chemical
oxygen demand of water.
4.0 Various Rescue and Reviving apparatus used in Mines
1.1 Know about various, rescue and reviving apparatus
1.2 Study and sketch self contained breathing apparatus, Study of
self rescuers of different types.
1.3 Study and sketch gas mark
1.4 Sketch and study the escape apparatus or self rescuer used
in minus
1.5 Sketch and study the dragger pulmotor reviving apparatus.
COURSE CONTENTS
1.0 Flame Safety Lamp and Gas Detectors
Identifies the parts of flame safety lamp-Dissembles and
assembles the flame safety lamp-Tests for the presence of
inflammable gas accumulation and percentage of tests- size
and shape of the gas caps with varying percentages of
inflammable gas- different types of flame safety lamps -
Determination the percentage of methane using
methanometers-Determines the percentage of CO using Co
316
Detectors (chemicals)- Determination the percentage of other
gases using multi-gas detectors. To understand lamp design
and perform underground illumination surveys.Study of mine
flame safety lamp, gas testing with flame safety lamp electric
cap lamps, lamp room layouts and illumination survey.
2.0 Studies the comprehensive model showing the coursing
of air ventilation with various devices
Ventilation devices-Draws the performance/characteristic
curves of mine fans from the observations made by conducting
appropriate experiments- ventilation survey for quantity of air
using ainmometer, velometer, smoke test, pitot tube- ventilation
survey for pressure using inclined manometer-Determination
of the ventilation efficiency quotient (VEQ)- The qualitative
survey for determining the temperature, relative humidity and
cooling power of air- ventilation plan, To determine the
psychrometric properties, gas percentage in atmosphere. Mine
air sampling and detection of various mine gasses, like,
methane, carbon monoxide(CO), by conventional methods and
by gas chromatograph, etc.Determination of psychrometric
properties of air, measurement of cooling power by Kata
thermometer.Determination of air born dust by gravimetric dust
sampler, personal dust sampler by high volume sampler Noise
survey: Determination of Noise by Dosimeter in Dda.
Determination of crossing point temperature and index of
inflammability
3.0 Various Fire Fighting Equipments
Study and sketch fire fighting equipments for class A, B,C, D, E
Fires. Proximate analysis of coal Measurement of vibrations
due to various sources.Determination o f pH, TDS, TSS,
dissolved oxygen and chemical oxygen demand of water.
Determination of organic carbon of soil sample
4.0 Various Rescue and Reviving apparatus used in Mines
Know about various rescue and reviving apparatus- self
contained breathing apparatus- gas mark- self rescuer used
in minus- dragger pulmotor reviving apparatus.
317
S.No. Experiment Title Key Competency
1. Flame Safety Lamp and Gas • Able to identify the parts of

Detectors Flame safety lamp
• Able to determine the
percentage of CH4 by Flame
safety lamp
• Able to determine the
percentage of CO by Co
detectors and multi gas detector
2 Coursing of air ventilation with • able to determine the quantity of

various devices air
• able to determine the water
gauge
• able to identify the parts of
ventilation devices
3. Various Fire Fighting • able to analyses difference

Equipments between different class of fires
4 Various Rescue and Reviving • able to identify the parts of self-

apparatus used in Mines contained breathing apparatus,
gas mask, self-rescuer, reviving
apparatus, pulmotor
318
PROJECT WORK
Subject Title : Project work
OBJECTIVES
1. Identify different works to be carried out in the project.
2. Collect data relevant to the project.
3. Arrive at efficient method from the available choices based on
preliminary investigation.
4. Design the required elements of the project as per standard
practices.
5. Prepare working drawing for the project by CAD.
6. Prepare schedule of time and sequence of operations by PERT
and CPM.
7. Prepare charts or models for each project.
8. Prepare project report
9. Prepare the production mathematical calculation /capacities
of various operation(output ventilation, machinery and man
power) in mines during period of project
10. Prepare the layout /Drawing of various operations by CAD
COURSE CONTENTS
Identification of the Project- Collection of data- Organisation of
the data- Design of Project elements - Preparation of drawings-
Schedules and sequence of operations- Preparation of charts
and models- Preparation of report- calculation /capacities of
various operation- Drawing of various operations by CAD- time
and sequence of operations by PERT and CPM
Note :
Students shall be divided into groups of five and each group
319
shall be assigned a problem that calls for application of the
knowledge. Project work will be allotted by the concerned Head
of Section and assign a staff member as guide at the beginning
of VI semester. The students are exposed to the U/G workings
or Industries for collecting information or relevant data from
respective areas during the entire VI semester , to collect
information after the institutional working hours or during
holidays - second Saturdays / Sundays/ Winter/ Pongal holidays
and prepares project report under the supervision of guide.
Project report will be assessed at the end of VI Semester for
final examination.
Project may be selected from among the following suggested
topics
Underground mining(coal)
a) Bord and pillar mining method
b) Longwall mining method.
c) Blasting gallery method.
Surface mining
a) Pillars extracting by open cast method(coal)
b) Mechanised opencast mining.
c) In Pit crushing technology
d) Surface mining technology
e) Blasting technology
Metal Mining
a) Stoping methods
b) Mechanised stoping methods
Other Methods
Any other method identified and suggested by the HOD.
*****
320
VI SEMESTER
321
Diploma in Mining Engineering
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTION AND EXAMINATION
MNG: 601 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
VI SEMESTER
(PRACTICAL TRAINING)
S. Subject Duration Items Max. Remarks

No. Marks
1 Industrial 1.First
Training 6 assessment
(Practical Months (at the end
Training) of 2nd Month) 100
2. Second
Assessment
(at the end of
4th month) 100
3.Tranining
Report
a) Field Book 30
b) Record 30
4.Seminar /
Viva Voce 40
TOTAL MARKS 300
The industrial training shall carry 300 marks and pass marks
are 50% .A candidate failing to secure the minimum marks should
complete It at his own expenses.
During Industrial training the candidate shall put in a minimum
of 90% attendance.
VIth SEMESTER
(INDUSTRIAL TRAINING)
Duration:6 Months
322
OBJECTIVES
On completion of a spell of practical training in a industry,the
student will be able to
1. Know the organizational set up of a mine
2. State the function of each department/section in a mine
3. State the inter relationship among various departments/sections
4. Know the Geology of the mine and mine survey and preparation
of various mine plans.
5. Explain various geological features of mine
6. Carry out different surveys and prepare the various mine plans
in the survey Department.
7. Understand the winding system and pit top arrangements
8. Explain the various components of winding system and
equipment in winding Engine room
9. Explain the pit top arrangements
10. Know the methods of working Coal/Ore Deposit
11. Explain the development of Coal/Ore
12. Explain the depillaring /stoping of coal/ore
13. Know the transportation system in mines
14. Explain the different transportation systems
15. List the various safety devices used in different transportation
system
16. Know the ventilation systems in mines
17. Explain various ventilation systems used in mines
18. Explain various ventilation devices used for distribution of mine
air
19. Understand the drilling and blasting practice in mines
20. Explain the various patterns of drilling.
21. Explain the storage of explosives
22. Explain the various types of explosives used in mines
323
23. Explain the various tools/accessories /equipment used for
blasting
24. Explain the procedure of blasting/shot firing in mines(Orinary/
Electric)
25. Understands the lighting arrangements in mines
26. Explain about lamp room organization
27. Describe the cam lamp and flame safety lamp
28. Knowns the different machinery used in mines
29. Explain about different machinery employed on surface and in
underground.
*****
324
Industrial Training scheme
VI Semester
1. A candidate shall be assessed twice in each spell of industrial
training i.e at the third and sixth months before he/she has
completed the industrial training
2. The assessment shall be carried out by a committee
comprising of
a) A representative of the industry where the candidate is
undergoing training
b) A staff member of the concerned section of the polytechnic
3. The assessment at the end of the third and six months of
training shall each carry 100 marks for the progress made
during the corresponding period training.
4. The remaining 100 marks are allotted as follows for the training
record 30 marks, long book 30 marks and for seminar 40 marks
these are to be evaluated at the institution at the end of each
spell of training by a committee consisting faculty members
and Head of Dept.,Concerned.
5. The progress made during the end of each assessment will
be evaluated on the basis of the following parameters.
Assessment Name of the Parameter Max.Marks allotted
schemes No. for Each Parameter
1 Attendance and punctuality 05
2 Familiarity with Technical terms 05
3 Familiarity with Technologies 10
4 Attitude towards job 10
5 Application knowledge 15
6 Problem solving skills 10
7 Comprehension and observation 10
8 Human relations 10
9 Ability to communicate 10
10 General conduct during the period 05
11 Maintenance of dairy 10
TOTAL 100
325

DMNG PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DMNG PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CURRICULUM - 2016

Subject Name of the No. of Total Scheme of Total

MNG-101 ENGLISH-I 3 45 3 20 80 100

MNG-106 Mining Geology-I 5 75 3 20 80 100

MNG-108 Basic Workshop

MNG-109 Physics Lab

MNG-110 Chemistry Lab

MNG-111 Computer Funda-

TOTAL 26 16 630 -- 280 720 1000

Subject Name of the No. of Total Scheme of Total

Theory Practi- Dura Sessi End

MNG-201 ENGLISH-II 3 45 3 20 80 100

MNG-206 Mining Geology-II 5 75 3 20 80 100

MNG-208 Basic Workshop

MNG-209 Physics Lab

MNG-210 Chemistry Lab

MNG-211 Computer Funda-

TOTAL 26 16 630 -- 280 720 1000

Subject Name of the No. of Total Scheme of Total

Theory Practi- Dura Sessi End

MNG-302 Basic Electrical

MNG-303 Methods of working

MNG-304 Mining Machinery-I 4 60 3 20 80 100

MNG-305 Mine Surveying-I 5 75 3 20 80 100

MNG-306 Mining Geology-III 4 60 3 20 80 100

MNG-307 Electrical and

MNG-309 Mine Surveying

MNG-310 Mining Geology

MNG-311 Practical Training

TOTAL 25 17 630 280 720 1000

Subject Name of the No. of Total Scheme of Total

Subject Name of the No. of Total Scheme of Total

MNG-502 Mine Management

MNG-503 Mine Legislation and

MNG-504 Rock Mechanics

505(B)Mineral Pro- 4 60 3 20 80 100

MNG-506 Mine Environmental

MNG-507 Rock Mechanics and

MNG-508 508(A) Advanced

MNG-509 Mine Environmental

MNG-510 Project Work 3 45 3 40 60 100

TOTAL 24 18 630 30 280 720 1000

S.No. Subject Dura- Item Max. Remarks

Subject Name of the No. of Total Scheme of Total

MNG-101 ENGLISH-I 3 45 3 20 80 100

MNG-106 Mining Geology-I 5 75 3 20 80 100

MNG-108 Basic Workshop

MNG-109 Physics Lab

MNG-110 Chemistry Lab

MNG-111 Computer Funda-

TOTAL 26 16 630 -- 280 720 1000

01 Need for Understand the need Know the need to learn

02 Classroom Identify expressions How to greet the teacher

03 Expressing Express feelings Know the structures to

04 Expressing Express likes and Study the different ways

05 Making requests Learn some ways of Examine the various

06 The Mighty Comprehend the Understand the main

07 Adventures of Read and compre- Understand the central

08 Tiller Turns Read and understand Focus on minute details

09 The Present Differentiate between Learn the three broad

10 The Present Describe the actions Express the actions

11 The Past Tense- I Understand what Learn the irregular verbs

12 The Past Tense- Describe an action that Describe the actions in